1. home and garden
2. home improvement and repair
3. plumbing

PROJECT MANUAL
VOLUME 2 OF 2
RENOVATIONS FOR CHILDREN & YOUTH
AGENCY
FOR:
LANCASTER COUNTY GOVERNMENT CENTER
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET, LANCASTER, PA 17603
CITY OF LANCASTER, LANCASTER COUNTY
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER: 14106
1853 WILLIAM PENN WAY, LANCASTER, PENNSLYVANIA 17605
(717) 293-4475
JULY 29, 2014
ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION
RENOVATIONS FOR CHILDREN & YOUTH
AGENCY
FOR:
LANCASTER COUNTY GOVERNMENT CENTER
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET, LANCASTER, PA 17603
CITY OF LANCASTER, LANCASTER COUNTY
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER: 14106
DATE: JULY 29, 2014
ARCHITECT
GREENFIELD ARCHITECTS, LTD.
Attn: Tom Marcinkoski, A.I.A.
1853 William Penn Way
Lancaster, PA 17601
Phone: (717)-390-4614
Fax: (717)-293-4499
OWNER REPRESENTATIVE
COUNTY OF LANCASTER
Attn: Barry Garman
150 North Queen Street, Suite 601
Lancaster, PA 17608-3480
Phone: (717)-397-9753
Fax: (717)-295-3508
ENGINEERING CONSULTANT (MEP/FP
JDB ENGINEERING, INC
Attn: Tim Warren
President
3687 Concord Road
York, PA 17402-8628
Phone: (717)-757-5602
Fax: (717)-755-9007
MECHANICAL ENGINEER
JDB ENGINEERING, INC
Attn: Jeff Pauley, PE
Mechanical Engineer
3687 Concord Road
York, PA 17402-8628
Phone: (717)-757-5602
Fax: (717)-755-9007
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER
JDB ENGINEERING, INC
Attn: Bob Stees / Craig Malesic
Electrical Engineers
3687 Concord Road
York, PA 17402-8628
Phone: (717)-757-5602
Fax: (717)-755-9007
PLUMBING & FIRE PROTECTION
JDB ENGINEERING, INC
Attn: Steve List
Plumbing Engineer
3687 Concord Road
York, PA 17402-8628
Phone: (717)-757-5602
Fax: (717)-755-9007
RENOVATIONS FOR CHILDREN & YOUTH
AGENCY
FOR:
LANCASTER COUNTY GOVERNMENT CENTER
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET, LANCASTER, PA 17603
CITY OF LANCASTER, LANCASTER COUNTY
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER: 14106
DATE: JULY 29, 2014
HARDWARE CONSULTANT
SPEC GROUP INC.
Attn: Ed Linaugh
14 Cambridge Road
Downingtown, PA 17335
Phone: (610)-594-2157
OFFICE FURNISHINGS
BENJAMIN ROBERTS OFFICE INTERIORS
Attn: Jim Brown
240 North Prince Street
Lancaster, PA 17603
Phone: (717)-291-1001
Fax: (717)-392-0111
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION TABLE OF CONTENTS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 0 – in Volume 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 1 - in Volume 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - GENERAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISIONS 2 thru 14 - In Volume 1
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - MECHANICAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 21, 22, 23 and 25 - in Volume 2
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS - ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
DIVISION 26, 27 and 28 - in Volume 2
ADDENDA / BULLETIN - in Volume 2
RENOVATIONS FOR CHILDREN & YOUTH
AGENCY
FOR:
LANCASTER COUNTY GOVERNMENT CENTER
150 NORTH QUEEN STREET, LANCASTER, PA 17603
CITY OF LANCASTER, LANCASTER COUNTY
ARCHITECT’S PROJECT NUMBER: 14106
DATE: JULY 29, 2014
PROJECT MANUAL - VOLUME 2
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 0
In Volume 1
INFORMATION, BIDDING, and CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
DIVISION 1
In Volume 1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
DIVISION 2
In Volume 1
EXISTING CONDITIONS
DIVISION 3
In Volume 1
CONCRETE
DIVISION 4
In Volume 1
MASONRY
DIVISION 5
In Volume 1
METALS
DIVISION 6
In Volume 1
WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
DIVISION 7
In Volume 1
THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
DIVISION 8
In Volume 1
OPENINGS
DIVISION 9
In Volume 1
FINISHES
DIVISION 10
In Volume 1
SPECIALTIES
DIVISION 11
In Volume 1
EQUIPMENT
DIVISION 12
In Volume 1
FURNISHINGS
DIVISION 13
In Volume 1
SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION (Not Used)
DIVISION 14
In Volume 1
CONVEYING EQUIPMENT (Not Used)
DIVISION 21
Section 210500
Section 211313
FIRE SUPPRESSION
Common Work Results for Fire Suppression................................... Pages 1 – 8
Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems............................................................ Pages 1 – 7
DIVISION 22
Section 220500
Section 220519
Section 220523
Section 220529
Section 220533
Section 220553
Section 220700
Section 221116
Section 221119
Section 221316
Section 221319
Section 224000
PLUMBING
Common Work Results for Plumbing............................................ Pages 1 – 12
Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping ........................................... Pages 1 – 2
General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping....................................... Pages 1 – 5
Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment ........... Pages 1 – 11
Heat Tracing for Plumbing Piping ................................................... Pages 1 – 4
Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment........................... Pages 1 – 4
Plumbing Insulation ...................................................................... Pages 1 – 10
Domestic Water Piping ................................................................... Pages 1 – 6
Domestic Water Piping Specialties.................................................. Pages 1 – 5
Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping...................................................... Pages 1 – 5
Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties....................................................Pages 1 – 4
Plumbing Fixtures........................................................................... Pages 1 – 9
DIVISION 23
Section 230500
Section 230513
Section 230519
Section 230523
Section 230529
Section 230553
Section 230593
Section 230713
Section 230719
HEATING VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING
Common Work Results for HVAC ................................................. Pages 1 – 8
Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment ..................... Pages 1 – 3
Meters and Gages for HVAC Piping ............................................... Pages 1 – 2
General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping .......................................... Pages 1 – 4
Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment............... Pages 1 – 10
Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment .............................. Pages 1 – 3
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC................................ Pages 1 – 15
Duct Insulation ............................................................................... Pages 1 – 9
HVAC Piping Insulation ............................................................... Pages 1 – 10
DIVISION 23
Section 230900
Section 230993
Section 232113
Section 233113
Section 233300
Section 233423
Section 233600
Section 233713
DIVISION 25
HEATING VENTILATING & AIR CONDITIONING (continued)
Instrumentation and Control for HVAC ........................................ Pages 1 – 13
Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls................................... Pages 1 – 6
Hydronic Piping.............................................................................. Pages 1 – 9
Metal Ducts.................................................................................. Pages 1 – 10
Air Duct Accessories ...................................................................... Pages 1 – 8
HVAC Power Ventilators ............................................................... Pages 1 – 4
Air Terminal Units .......................................................................... Pages 1 – 5
Diffusers, Registers, and Grilles ...................................................... Pages 1 – 5
HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (Not Used)
DIVISION 26
Section 260500
Section 260519
Section 260526
Section 260529
Section 260533
Section 260553
Section 260923
Section 262726
Section 262813
Section 262816
Section 265100
ELECTRICAL CONSTRUCTION
Common Work Results for Electrical.............................................. Pages 1 – 4
Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ................... Pages 1 – 4
Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems ............................... Pages 1 – 4
Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems .................................. Pages 1 – 5
Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.................................... Pages 1 – 7
Identification for Electrical Systems ................................................ Pages 1 – 7
Lighting Control Devices................................................................ Pages 1 – 8
Wiring Devices ............................................................................... Pages 1 – 5
Fuses.............................................................................................. Pages 1 – 3
Enclosed Switches.......................................................................... Pages 1 – 4
Interior Lighting ............................................................................. Pages 1 – 7
DIVISION 27
Section 271300
Section 274134
Section 275118
Section 275313
COMMUNICATIONS
Voice and Data Communications Cabling ..................................... Pages 1 – 17
Cable Television System ................................................................. Pages 1 – 9
Sound Masking and Paging Systems ............................................... Pages 1 – 4
Clock Systems ................................................................................ Pages 1 – 5
DIVISION 28
Section 281300
Section 281310
Section 283111
ELECTRONIC SAFETY & SECURITY
Integrated Access Control-Security System .................................... Pages 1 – 9
Door Entry System......................................................................... Pages 1 – 4
Digital, Addressable Fire-Alarm System........................................ Pages 1 – 19
DIVISION 31
EARTHWORK (Not Used)
DIVISION 32
EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS (Not Used)
DIVISION 33
UTILITIES (Not Used)
ADDENDA / BULLETIN
END OF VOLUME 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 210500
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
Sleeves.
Escutcheons.
Silicone sealants.
Fire-suppression demolition.
Supports and anchorages.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
210500 - 1
G.
The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1.
2.
1.4
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
2.
C.
1.5
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for Fire-Suppression Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing by
Engineer and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately
modified at no additional cost to Owner. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are
specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B.
Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.
C.
Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for fire-suppression installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
C.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of fire-suppression materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
210500 - 2
D.
Coordinate connection of fire-suppression systems with exterior underground and overhead
utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
companies, and controlling agencies.
E.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for fire-suppression items requiring access
that are concealed behind finished surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A.
Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 21 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a.
b.
2.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
210500 - 3
2.4
SLEEVES
A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet:
longitudinal joint.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.
0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E.
Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G.
Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange
for attaching to wooden forms.
2.5
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated
finish.
C.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1.
D.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.
E.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
F.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chromeplated finish.
G.
One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H.
Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
210500 - 4
2.6
SILICONE SEALANTS
A.
Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of
grade indicated below.
1.
2.
B.
Grade: Pourable (self-leveling) formulation for openings in floors and other horizontal
surfaces that are not fire rated.
Sealant shall have VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to
40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand
and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
FIRE-SUPPRESSION DEMOLITION
A.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, equipment, and components
indicated to be removed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
3.2
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and
quality.
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved by Engineer.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
210500 - 5
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
H.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
I.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
J.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1.
New Piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Existing Piping: Use the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
K.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish or one-piece, stamped-steel type with concealed or
exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type or one-piece,
stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring
clips.
Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate
type.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, castbrass type with chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass
type with chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or
exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type or split-plate,
stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring
clips.
Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate
type.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes, or for holes formed by removable PE sleeves
unless holes are located in mechanical room floors, other wet areas, or as indicated.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
210500 - 6
L.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
2.
3.
Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 in interior non-fire-rated walls.
Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using food grade joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of
joint.
M.
Firestop: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Seal all floor, wall, and ceiling
penetrations with an FM-approved firestop material with a fire rating greater than or equal to
that of the surrounding floor, wall, or ceiling construction and/or penetration.
N.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
O.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
3.3
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 21 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
210500 - 7
E.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
F.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.4
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor fire-suppression materials and equipment.
B.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
**END OF SECTION 210500**
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
210500 - 8
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 211313
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Pipes and fittings.
Sprinklers.
Section 210500 "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression."
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
A.
1.4
Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System: Automatic sprinklers are attached to piping containing water and
that is connected to water supply through alarm valve. Water discharges immediately from
sprinklers when they are opened. Sprinklers open when heat melts fusible link or destroys
frangible device. Hose connections are included if indicated.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Standard-Pressure Piping System Component: Listed for 175-psig minimum working pressure.
B.
Delegated Design: Design sprinkler system(s), including comprehensive engineering analysis
by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria
indicated.
C.
Sprinkler system design shall be approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
1.5
Margin of Safety for Available Water Flow and Pressure: 10 percent, including losses
through water-service piping, valves, and backflow preventers.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include rated capacities, operating
characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
211313 - 1
B.
1.6
Delegated-Design Submittal: For sprinkler systems indicated to comply with performance
requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified
professional engineer responsible for their preparation.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For qualified Installer and professional engineer.
B.
Approved Sprinkler Piping Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 13, that
have been approved by authorities having jurisdiction, including hydraulic calculations if
applicable.
C.
Welding certificates.
D.
Field Test Reports and Certificates: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements and as described in NFPA 13. Include "Contractor's Material and
Test Certificate for Aboveground Piping."
E.
Field quality-control reports.
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Operation and Maintenance Data: For sprinklers to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications:
1.
Installer's responsibilities include designing, fabricating, and installing sprinkler systems
and providing professional engineering services needed to assume engineering
responsibility. Base calculations on results of fire-hydrant flow test.
a.
Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of working plans, calculations, and field
test reports by a qualified professional engineer.
B.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
D.
NFPA Standards: Sprinkler system equipment, specialties, accessories, installation, and testing
shall comply with the following:
1.
NFPA 13, "Installation of Sprinkler Systems."
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
211313 - 2
1.9
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of sprinklers with other construction that penetrates ceilings,
including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.2
Comply with requirements in "Piping Schedule" Article for applications of pipe, tube, and
fitting materials, and for joining methods for specific services, service locations, and pipe sizes.
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Standard Weight, Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E, Grade B.
Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
B.
Thinwall Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe:
ASTM A 135 or ASTM A 795/A 795M,
threadable, with wall thickness less than Schedule 30 and equal to or greater than Schedule 10.
Pipe ends may be factory or field formed to match joining method.
C.
Galvanized- and Black-Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of ASTM A 53/A 53M,
standard-weight, seamless steel pipe with threaded ends.
D.
Galvanized and Uncoated, Steel Couplings: ASTM A 865, threaded.
E.
Galvanized and Uncoated, Gray-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.4, Class 125, standard
pattern.
F.
Malleable- or Ductile-Iron Unions: UL 860.
G.
Cast-Iron Flanges: ASME 16.1, Class 125.
H.
Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, Class 150.
I.
Steel Welding Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M and ASME B16.9.
J.
Grooved-Joint, Steel-Pipe Appurtenances:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,
the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Anvil International, Inc.
Corcoran Piping System Co.
National Fittings, Inc.
Shurjoint Piping Products.
Tyco Fire & Building Products LP.
Victaulic Company.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
211313 - 3
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Pressure Rating: 250 psig minimum.
Galvanized and Uncoated, Grooved-End Fittings for Steel Piping: ASTM A 47/A 47M,
malleable-iron casting or ASTM A 536, ductile-iron casting; with dimensions matching
steel pipe.
Grooved-End-Pipe Couplings for Steel Piping: AWWA C606 and UL 213, rigid pattern,
unless otherwise indicated, for steel-pipe dimensions. Include ferrous housing sections,
EPDM-rubber gasket, and bolts and nuts.
PIPING JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials:
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick or
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic and asbestos free.
1.
2.
Class 125, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 150, Bronze Flat-Face Flanges: Full-face
gaskets.
Class 250, Cast-Iron Flanges and Class 300, Steel Raised-Face Flanges: Ring-type
gaskets.
B.
Metal, Pipe-Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12M/D10.12 for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.4
SPRINKLERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering
products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:
1.
2.
B.
General Requirements:
1.
2.
C.
Reliable Automatic Sprinkler Co., Inc.
Victaulic Company.
Standard: UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory" listing or "Approval Guide,"
published by FM Global, listing.
Pressure Rating for Automatic Sprinklers: 175 psig minimum.
Automatic Sprinklers with Heat-Responsive Element:
1.
Nonresidential Applications: UL 199.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
211313 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general
location and arrangement of piping. Install piping as indicated, as far as practical.
1.
Deviations from approved working plans for piping require written approval from
authorities having jurisdiction. File written approval with Engineer before deviating from
approved working plans.
B.
Piping Standard: Comply with requirements for installation of sprinkler piping in NFPA 13.
C.
Use listed fittings to make changes in direction, branch takeoffs from mains, and reductions in
pipe sizes.
D.
Install sprinkler piping with drains for complete system drainage.
E.
Install hangers and supports for sprinkler system piping according to NFPA 13. Comply with
requirements for hanger materials in NFPA 13.
1.
In food preparation/food handling areas, hanger rods shall be smooth surface except for
threaded lengths not exceeding five times rod diameter for connecting attaching device;
"all-thread" rods are not permitted. "All-thread" rods are permitted in areas where there
is no food preparation or food handling.
F.
Fill sprinkler system piping with water.
G.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Section 210500 "Common Work Results for Fire Suppression."
H.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 210500 "Common Work Results for Fire
Suppression."
3.2
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Install couplings, flanges, flanged fittings, unions, nipples, and transition and special fittings
that have finish and pressure ratings same as or higher than system's pressure rating for
aboveground applications unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipes, tubes, and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material in size, type, and thickness suitable for water
service. Join flanges with gasket and bolts according to ASME B31.9.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
211313 - 5
E.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
F.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12M/D10.12, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to "Quality Assurance" Article.
1.
Shop weld pipe joints where welded piping is indicated. Do not use welded joints for
galvanized-steel pipe.
G.
Steel-Piping, Cut-Grooved Joints: Cut square-edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe
and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe joints.
H.
Steel-Piping, Roll-Grooved Joints: Roll rounded-edge groove in end of pipe according to
AWWA C606. Assemble coupling with housing, gasket, lubricant, and bolts. Join steel pipe
and grooved-end fittings according to AWWA C606 for steel-pipe grooved joints.
3.3
SPRINKLER INSTALLATION
A.
3.4
Install sprinklers in suspended ceilings in center of acoustical ceiling panels.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.5
Install labeling and pipe markers on equipment and piping according to requirements in
NFPA 13.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
Leak Test: After installation, charge systems and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
Flush, test, and inspect sprinkler systems according to NFPA 13, "Systems Acceptance"
Chapter.
C.
Sprinkler piping system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
D.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
211313 - 6
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Clean dirt and debris from sprinklers.
B.
Remove and replace sprinklers with paint other than factory finish.
3.7
PIPING SCHEDULE
A.
Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded
fittings; and threaded joints.
Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron
threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end
fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end
fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded
joints.
Standard-pressure, wet-pipe sprinkler system, NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 4, shall be one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with threaded ends; uncoated, gray-iron threaded
fittings; and threaded joints.
Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with threaded ends; galvanized, gray-iron
threaded fittings; and threaded joints.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with cut- or roll-grooved ends; uncoated, grooved-end
fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
Standard-weight, galvanized-steel pipe with cut-grooved ends; galvanized, grooved-end
fittings for steel piping; grooved-end-pipe couplings for steel piping; and grooved joints.
Standard-weight, black-steel pipe with plain ends; steel welding fittings; and welded
joints.
**END OF SECTION 211313**
WET-PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
211313 - 7
SECTION 220500
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.3
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
Transition fittings.
Dielectric fittings.
Sleeves.
Escutcheons.
Grout.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
Cutting and patching for mechanical construction.
Supports and anchorages.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct shafts, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
F.
The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:
1.
2.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
CPVC: Chlorinated polyvinyl chloride plastic.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220500 - 1
3.
4.
G.
The following are industry abbreviations for rubber materials:
1.
2.
1.4
PE: Polyethylene plastic.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
EPDM: Ethylene-propylene-diene terpolymer rubber.
NBR: Acrylonitrile-butadiene rubber.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
2.
C.
1.5
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for Mechanical Equipment:
Equipment of higher electrical
characteristics may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing by
Engineer and connecting electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately
modified at no additional cost to Owner. If minimum energy ratings or efficiencies are
specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
B.
Protect stored pipes and tubes from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed
structural capacity of floor, if stored inside.
C.
Protect flanges, fittings, and piping specialties from moisture and dirt.
D.
Store plastic pipes protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for mechanical installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220500 - 2
C.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for
efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning.
D.
Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities
and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service
companies, and controlling agencies.
E.
Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors for mechanical items requiring access that
are concealed behind finished surfaces.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A.
Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.3
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 22 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a.
b.
2.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Plastic, Pipe-Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping
system manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220500 - 3
E.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
F.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
G.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
H.
Solvent Cements for Joining Plastic Piping:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
2.4
ABS Piping: ASTM D 2235.
CPVC Piping: ASTM F 493.
PVC Piping: ASTM D 2564. Include primer according to ASTM F 656.
PVC to ABS Piping Transition: ASTM D 3138.
Fiberglass Pipe Adhesive: As furnished or recommended by pipe manufacturer.
TRANSITION FITTINGS
A.
AWWA Transition Couplings: Same size as, and with pressure rating at least equal to and with
ends compatible with, piping to be joined.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
Dresser Industries, Inc.; DMD Div.
Ford Meter Box Company, Incorporated (The); Pipe Products Div.
JCM Industries.
Smith-Blair, Inc.
Viking Johnson.
Underground Piping NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Manufactured fitting or coupling.
Underground Piping NPS 2 and Larger: AWWA C219, metal sleeve-type coupling.
Aboveground Pressure Piping: Pipe fitting.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Fittings: CPVC and PVC one-piece fitting with manufacturer's
Schedule 80 equivalent dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solventcement-joint end.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
Eslon Thermoplastics.
NIBCO, Inc.
Thompson Plastics, Inc.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220500 - 4
C.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Adaptors: One-piece fitting with manufacturer's SDR 11 equivalent
dimensions; one end with threaded brass insert, and one solvent-cement-joint end.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
D.
Plastic-to-Metal Transition Unions: MSS SP-107, CPVC and PVC four-part union. Include
brass end, solvent-cement-joint end, rubber O-ring, and union nut.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
E.
Elson Thermoplastics.
NIBCO, Inc.
Thompson Plastics, Inc.
Flexible Transition Couplings for Underground Nonpressure Drainage Piping: ASTM C 1173
with elastomeric sleeve, ends same size as piping to be joined, and corrosion-resistant metal
band on each end.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.5
Elson Thermoplastics.
NIBCO, Inc.
Thompson Plastics, Inc.
Cascade Waterworks Mfg. Co.
Fernco, Inc.
Mission Rubber Company.
Plastic Oddities, Inc.
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials and with
insulation material to prevent galvanic action and prevent corrosion.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Capitol Manufacturing Co.
Central Plastics Company.
Eclipse, Inc.
Epco Sales, Inc.
Hart Industries, International, Inc.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220500 - 5
D.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
E.
Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, fullface- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
F.
Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
Calpico, Inc.
Lochinvar Corp.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.6
Advance Products & Systems, Inc.
Calpico, Inc.
Central Plastics Company.
Pipeline Seal and Insulator, Inc.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F.
1.
G.
Capitol Manufacturing Co.
Central Plastics Company.
Epco Sales, Inc.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Perfection Corp.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
Sioux Chief Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Victaulic Co. of America.
SLEEVES
A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet:
longitudinal joint.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
C.
Cast Iron: Cast or fabricated "wall pipe" equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe, with plain
ends and integral waterstop, unless otherwise indicated.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220500 - 6
D.
Stack Sleeve Fittings: Manufactured, cast-iron sleeve with integral clamping flange. Include
clamping ring and bolts and nuts for membrane flashing.
1.
Underdeck Clamp: Clamping ring with set screws.
E.
Molded PVC: Permanent, with nailing flange for attaching to wooden forms.
F.
PVC Pipe: ASTM D 1785, Schedule 40.
G.
Molded PE: Reusable, PE, tapered-cup shaped, and smooth-outer surface with nailing flange
for attaching to wooden forms.
2.7
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated
finish.
C.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw.
1.
D.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated.
Split-Casting, Cast-Brass Type: With concealed hinge and set screw.
1.
Finish: Polished chrome-plated and rough brass.
E.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
F.
Split-Plate, Stamped-Steel Type: With concealed hinge, set screw or spring clips, and chromeplated finish.
G.
One-Piece, Floor-Plate Type: Cast-iron floor plate.
H.
Split-Casting, Floor-Plate Type: Cast brass with concealed hinge and set screw.
2.8
GROUT
A.
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1.
2.
3.
Characteristics:
Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
noncorrosive,
220500 - 7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved by Engineer.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
K.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1.
New Piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
Chrome-Plated Piping: One-piece, cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated
finish.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece or split-casting,
cast-brass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish or one-piece, stamped-steel type with concealed or
exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220500 - 8
g.
h.
2.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, cast-brass type or one-piece,
stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring
clips.
Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: One-piece, floor-plate
type.
Existing Piping: Use the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Chrome-Plated Piping: Split-casting, cast-brass type with chrome-plated finish.
Insulated Piping: Split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed hinge and spring
clips.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, castbrass type with chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass
type with chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping in Unfinished Service Spaces: Split-casting, cast-brass type with
polished chrome-plated finish or split-plate, stamped-steel type with concealed or
exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring clips.
Bare Piping in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, cast-brass type or split-plate,
stamped-steel type with concealed or exposed-rivet hinge and set screw or spring
clips.
Bare Piping at Floor Penetrations in Equipment Rooms: Split-casting, floor-plate
type.
M.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes, or for holes formed by removable PE sleeves
unless holes are located in mechanical room floors, other wet areas, or as indicated.
N.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
2.
3.
Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a.
b.
c.
4.
O.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
PVC Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6 in interior non-fire-rated walls.
Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Firestop: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors at pipe
penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Section 078413
"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220500 - 9
P.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
Q.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
3.2
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 22 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
I.
Plastic Piping Solvent-Cement Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces. Join pipe and fittings
according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Comply with ASTM F 402 for safe-handling practice of cleaners, primers, and solvent
cements.
ABS Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2235 and ASTM D 2661 Appendixes.
CPVC Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2846/D 2846M Appendix.
PVC Pressure Piping: Join schedule number ASTM D 1785, PVC pipe and PVC socket
fittings according to ASTM D 2672. Join other-than-schedule-number PVC pipe and
socket fittings according to ASTM D 2855.
PVC Nonpressure Piping: Join according to ASTM D 2855.
PVC to ABS Nonpressure Transition Fittings: Join according to ASTM D 3138
Appendix.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220500 - 10
J.
Plastic Pressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3139.
K.
Plastic Nonpressure Piping Gasketed Joints: Join according to ASTM D 3212.
L.
PE Piping Heat-Fusion Joints: Clean and dry joining surfaces by wiping with clean cloth or
paper towels. Join according to ASTM D 2657.
1.
2.
M.
3.3
Plain-End Pipe and Fittings: Use butt fusion.
Plain-End Pipe and Socket Fittings: Use socket fusion.
Fiberglass Bonded Joints: Prepare pipe ends and fittings, apply adhesive, and join according to
pipe manufacturer's written instructions.
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
Dry Piping Systems: Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of
dissimilar metals.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install mechanical equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.5
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.
B.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220500 - 11
3.6
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces necessary for
mechanical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B.
Repair cut surfaces to match adjacent surfaces.
3.7
GROUTING
A.
Mix and install grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other
equipment base plates, and anchors.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G.
Place grout around anchors.
H.
Cure placed grout.
**END OF SECTION 220500**
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR PLUMBING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220500 - 12
]^_]]`{|]@}[
__`]@[]^~`
__\+
+#

%`<
_} _ }_ €]^] ] `]_\ @} _ _ @€€~_[
`]]_
^]€_]]\_€€[]]
<|
]@€@}_}]~__[~
`>%<=>
+]@
__‚$]_[€]€]@_ƒ@€]~_@^
`%%<<=>
%€_] _ __ __‚ $] ~ _ }_} ] @ ]€_] _
~__~_@_
+#+%
<`
<$`<
> ] +_ _  „] ]@ \ ]]} …@~ _€€[ ]
€]@]‚
_@_@‚@„†]]~€_…@~\€]^€]@„[]]
~_@_@€
+<
_@_@‚

\‡%`]
ˆ>@~\>
ˆ‰>@~%€_}<ƒ
>@ƒ>@~
^
$%+<=>+>+>
?@[!\
!#
=
#]~]#]@}\
_#[€+@_}‚>_}#_[€]~€[}
=

Š
‹
!
`
`_‚ [ ] …@# [€ _ _\ _ ] _ _@~@~\ ##
_~
+@#~~„[‚=]@]@„\@]_
+@ `]]‚ =_\ +\ „]]~#]@ [€ @ „_‰#]@ [€ _
]^~‚__\„_]@]‰]€@~_]]
]€]
_‚@~@~ƒ„_‰}]@€~_[„_‰_~_‰}
+]‚†@_„ƒ]]_‰#]]~_
ˆ]‚_
}‚$][€][€_
@_[‚+@]~@€]@_\=_
Œ_@@~#+@_}‚#‡}]^_@@~]€}]€@
_}]$@@+@‚]~]€_}€@
+@#_}$}‚

Œ_^‚+„_]_#[€
[€]‚+]]„_@„}_
@„„‚ =\ + „_ „@}  ]]]#_\ €]]@#~_
]~__@_„][~@_]‰}€@
+#`<>%

>>%
>_#~]@}€@}_}€€}€@}_}]_]€€_~]
__„€]]
=
>_#^_^_@„„}€€}]_€@}_}]@
ŽŽ
%$`>%!ŽŽ
$%+<=>+>+>
?@[!\
!#
SECTION 220523
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
FOR PLUMBING PIPING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following general-duty valves:
1.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Copper-alloy ball valves.
Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for valve tags and
charts.
Division 22 piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
DEFINITIONS
A.
The following are standard abbreviations for valves:
1.
2.
1.4
CWP: Cold working pressure.
TFE: Tetrafluoroethylene plastic.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated. Include body, seating, and trim materials;
valve design; pressure and temperature classifications; end connections; arrangement;
dimensions; and required clearances. Include list indicating valve and its application. Include
rated capacities; shipping, installed, and operating weights; furnished specialties; and
accessories.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
FOR PLUMBING PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220523 - 1
B.
ASME Compliance:
1.
2.
C.
1.6
ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
NSF Compliance: NSF 61 Annex G and NSF 372 for valve materials for potable-water service.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Use the following precautions during storage:
1.
2.
C.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
Protect threads, flange faces, grooves, and weld ends.
Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
Maintain valve end protection.
Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew-point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
Use sling to handle large valves; rig sling to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use
handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified.
VALVES, GENERAL
A.
Refer to Part 3 "Valve Applications" Article for applications of valves.
B.
Bronze Valves: NPS 2 and smaller with threaded ends, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
D.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
FOR PLUMBING PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220523 - 2
E.
Valve Actuators:
1.
2.
Handwheel: For valves other than quarter-turn types.
Lever Handle: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.
F.
Extended Valve Stems: On insulated valves.
G.
Valve Flanges: ASME B16.1 for cast-iron valves, ASME B16.5 for steel valves, and
ASME B16.24 for bronze valves.
H.
Valve-End Connections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
2.3
Flanged: With flanges according to ASME B16.1 for iron valves.
Grooved: With grooves according to AWWA C606.
Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
Valve Bypass and Drain Connections: MSS SP-45.
COPPER-ALLOY BALL VALVES
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
Copper-Alloy Ball Valves:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Div.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Crane Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Jenkins Valves.
Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div.
Grinnell Corporation.
Hammond Valve.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
B.
Copper-Alloy Ball Valves, General: MSS SP-110.
C.
Two-Piece, Copper-Alloy Ball Valves: Brass or bronze body with full-port (conventional port
for throttling duty), chrome-plated bronze ball; TFE seats; and 600-psig minimum CWP rating
and blowout-proof stem.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other
conditions affecting performance.
1.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
FOR PLUMBING PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220523 - 3
B.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
C.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
D.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
E.
Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper
size, length, and material. Verify that gasket is of proper size, that its material composition is
suitable for service, and that it is free from defects and damage.
F.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Refer to piping Sections for specific valve applications. If valve applications are not indicated,
use the following:
1.
2.
Shutoff Service: Ball valves.
Throttling Service: Conventional port ball valves.
B.
If valves with specified CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves with higher
CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Domestic Water Piping: Use the following types of valves:
1.
D.
Select valves, except wafer and flangeless types, with the following end connections:
1.
3.3
Ball Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller: Two-piece, 600-psig CWP rating, copper alloy.
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Solder-joint or threaded ends, except provide
valves with threaded ends for heating hot water, steam, and steam condensate services.
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
FOR PLUMBING PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220523 - 4
3.4
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Refer to Section 220500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for basic piping joint
construction.
B.
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-freealloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust or replace valve packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service but
before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if persistent leaking occurs.
**END OF SECTION 220523**
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
FOR PLUMBING PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220523 - 5
SECTION 220529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following hangers and supports for mechanical system piping and
equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
1.3
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
Metal framing systems.
Fiberglass strut systems.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Fastener systems.
Pipe stands.
Equipment supports.
DEFINITIONS
A.
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society for The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
B.
Terminology: As defined in MSS SP-90, "Guidelines on Terminology for Pipe Hangers and
Supports."
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting combined
weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
B.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For the following:
1.
Steel pipe hangers and supports.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29,2014
220529 - 1
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code--Steel."
AWS D1.2, "Structural Welding Code--Aluminum."
AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code--Sheet Steel."
AWS D1.4, "Structural Welding Code--Reinforcing Steel."
ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code: Section IX.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
STEEL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components. Refer to Part 3
"Hanger and Support Applications" Article for where to use specific hanger and support types.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Anvil International.
Carpenter & Paterson, Inc.
Empire Industries, Inc.
Michigan Hanger Co., Inc.
National Pipe Hanger Corporation.
C.
Galvanized, Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
D.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
E.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion for support of
bearing surface of piping.
2.3
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A.
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and U-bolts.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29,2014
220529 - 2
2.4
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Description: MFMA-3, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels
and other components.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Michigan Hanger Co.
National Pipe Hanger Corp.
Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International, Ltd.
Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International, Ltd.
C.
Coatings: Manufacturer's standard finish, unless bare metal surfaces are indicated.
D.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
2.5
FIBERGLASS STRUT SYSTEMS
A.
Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly, similar to MFMA-3, made of
fiberglass channels and other components.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.6
Michigan Hanger Co.
National Pipe Hanger Corp.
Power-Strut Div.; Tyco International Ltd.
Unistrut Corp.; Tyco International Ltd.
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A.
Description: 100-psig-minimum, compressive-strength insulation insert.
B.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Johns Manville.
Owens Corning.
C.
Insulation-Insert Material: Preformed pipe sections of noncombustible, inorganic, hydrous
calcium silicate with non-asbestos fibrous reinforcement.
Water-repellent treated,
ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate.
D.
For Clamped Systems: Insert shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
E.
For Clevis, Roller, or Band Hangers: Insert shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
F.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29,2014
220529 - 3
2.7
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
B.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type zinc-coated or stainless steel, for use in
hardened portland cement concrete with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.8
Hilti, Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
Masterset Fastening Systems, Inc.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Powers Fasteners.
Empire Industries, Inc.
Hilti, Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Powers Fasteners.
PIPE STAND FABRICATION
A.
Pipe Stands, General: Shop or field-fabricated assemblies made of manufactured corrosionresistant components to support roof-mounted piping.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
c.
ERICO/Michigan Hanger Co.
MIRO Industries.
Portable Pipe Hangers.
B.
Compact Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic unit with integral-rod-roller, pipe clamps, or V-shaped
cradle to support pipe, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
C.
Low-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: One-piece plastic or stainless-steel base unit with plastic roller,
for roof installation without membrane penetration.
D.
High-Type, Single-Pipe Stand: Assembly of base, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
support, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1.
2.
Base: Plastic or stainless steel.
Vertical Members: Two or more cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel, continuousthread rods.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29,2014
220529 - 4
3.
E.
High-Type, Multiple-Pipe Stand: Assembly of bases, vertical and horizontal members, and pipe
supports, for roof installation without membrane penetration.
1.
2.
3.
4.
F.
2.9
Horizontal Member: Cadmium-plated-steel or stainless-steel rod with plastic or stainlesssteel, roller-type pipe support.
Bases: One or more plastic.
Vertical Members: Two or more protective-coated-steel channels.
Horizontal Member: Protective-coated-steel channel.
Pipe Supports: Galvanized-steel, clevis-type pipe hangers.
Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe support made from structuralsteel shape, continuous-thread rods, and rollers for mounting on permanent stationary roof curb.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
2.10
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural-steel
shapes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
2.
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are specified in Sections specifying piping systems
and equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized, metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29,2014
220529 - 5
F.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of 120 to 450 deg F pipes,
NPS 4 to NPS 16, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 24, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes, NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24, if little or no insulation is required.
Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow offcenter closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
Adjustable Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated stationary
pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated
stationary pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 2.
Split Pipe-Ring with or without Turnbuckle-Adjustment Hangers (MSS Type 11): For
suspension of noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
Extension Hinged or 2-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated stationary pipes, NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes, NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steel
pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes, NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange and with U-bolt to retain pipe.
Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes,
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36, if vertical adjustment is required, with steel pipe base stanchion
support and cast-iron floor flange.
Single Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes, NPS 1 to NPS 30, from 2
rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes, NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 20, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 42, if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to NPS 24, if
small horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes, NPS 2 to
NPS 30, if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition
to expansion and contraction.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29,2014
220529 - 6
G.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
H.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
I.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers, NPS 3/4 to
NPS 20.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers,
NPS 3/4 to NPS 20, if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19): For use under roof installations with bar-joist
construction to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23): For structural shapes.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads.
Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
Malleable Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below, or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
b.
c.
13.
14.
15.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29,2014
220529 - 7
J.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
K.
Steel Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): Fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches.
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41 roll hanger with
springs.
Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to absorb expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
a.
b.
c.
Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
L.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
M.
Comply with MFMA-102 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
N.
Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
3.2
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Steel Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building
structure.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29,2014
220529 - 8
B.
Trapeze Pipe Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange for
grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping and support together on field-fabricated trapeze
pipe hangers.
1.
2.
3.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual
pipe hangers.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel shapes selected for loads being supported.
Weld steel according to AWS D1.1.
Do not rest pipe directly on base of trapeze.
C.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping and support
together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
2.
F.
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
Pipe Stand Installation:
1.
2.
Pipe Stand Types except Curb-Mounting Type: Assemble components and mount on
smooth roof surface. Do not penetrate roof membrane.
Curb-Mounting-Type Pipe Stands: Assemble components or fabricate pipe stand and
mount on permanent, stationary roof curb.
G.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and
other accessories.
H.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
I.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
J.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
K.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
L.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so piping live and dead loads and stresses from
movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29,2014
220529 - 9
M.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so maximum
pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.1 (for power piping) and ASME B31.9 (for building
services piping) are not exceeded.
N.
Insulated Piping: Comply with the following:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles on piping 2-1/2 inches and larger if
insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that
matches adjoining insulation.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier and on
piping 2 inches and smaller without a vapor barrier. Shields shall span an arc of 180
degrees.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
5.
6.
3.3
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits according to ASME B31.1 for power piping and
ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
NPS 4: 12 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
NPS 5 and NPS 6: 18 inches long and 0.06 inch thick.
NPS 8 to NPS 14: 24 inches long and 0.075 inch thick.
NPS 16 to NPS 24: 24 inches long and 0.105 inch thick.
Cold Pipes NPS 1-1/4 and Larger: Include thermal hanger shield inserts.
Insert Material: 4 inches longer than length of protective shield. Insert shall be same
thickness as adjoining insulation.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make smooth bearing surface.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.4
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29,2014
220529 - 10
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for shielded metal arc welding, appearance
and quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work, and with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and contours
of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.6
PAINTING
A.
Touch Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
B.
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
**END OF SECTION 220529**
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29,2014
220529 - 11
SECTION 220533
HEAT TRACING FOR PLUMBING PIPING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes plumbing piping heat tracing for a complete UL listed system of heaters and
components approved specifically for maintaining hot water at selected temperatures.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product.
1.
2.
1.4
Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, and furnished specialties and
accessories.
Schedule heating capacity, length of cable, spacing, and electrical power requirement for
each electric heating cable required.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Certificates: Quality assurance test certificates from manufacturer for each reel of
heating cable, signed by manufacturer's quality control officer.
1.
B.
1.5
Certificates shall indicate cable type, cable rating, watts per foot, voltage rating, test date,
batch number, reel number and length of cable, test voltage and test amperage reading.
Field quality-control reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For electric heating cables to include in operation and
maintenance manuals.
HEAT TRACING
FOR PLUMBING PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220533 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SELF-REGULATING, PARALLEL-RESISTANCE HEATING CABLES
A.
Basis-of-Design Product: Thermon Americas Inc.; Warm Trace, Model HSX 2100. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide the named product or a comparable product by another
manufacturer.
B.
Comply with IEEE 515.1.
C.
Heater: Self-regulating heater consisting of two No. 14 AWG, nickel-coated, stranded copper
bus wires embedded in parallel in a radiation cross-linked self-regulating conductive polymer
core, specifically designed for hot water temperature maintenance. Heater shall be capable of
varying its heat output along its entire length to maintain the water in the selected temperature
range.
1.
2.
Self-regulating cable must be designed and specifically approved for maintaining hot
water. Cables used for freeze protection of water lines are prohibited.
Heating cable core shall be permanently marked with manufacturer's identification
number for traceability.
D.
Heater Cover: Polyolefin dielectric jacket rated 300 Vac at 105 deg C, a tinned copper braid
equivalent to No. 14 AWG wire size, and a nominal 40-mil polyolefin outer jacket color-coded
for easy identification.
E.
Electrical Characteristics: Heater shall operate on a line voltage of 208 Vac without the use of
thermostats.
F.
Operating and Performance Characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
G.
2.2
Heat-traced and insulated piping shall maintain nominal hot water temperatures in the
supply lines at 140 deg F when powered at 208 Vac.
For each hot water maintenance temperature selected, only one product will be allowed.
All cables shall be installed in parallel passes; no spiral wrapping is permitted.
Power retention of the heating element shall be in accordance with IEEE 515.1, article
4.2.6, Performance After Thermal Aging.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by
a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
ACCESSORIES
A.
Cable Installation Accessories: Fiberglass tape, heat-conductive putty, cable ties, silicone end
seals and splice kits, and installation clips all furnished by manufacturer, or as recommended in
writing by manufacturer.
HEAT TRACING
FOR PLUMBING PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220533 - 2
B.
Warning Tape: Continuously printed "Electrical Tracing"; vinyl, at least 3 mils thick, and with
pressure-sensitive, permanent, waterproof, self-adhesive back.
1.
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch
minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine surfaces and substrates to receive electric heating cables for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
B.
3.2
Ensure surfaces and pipes in contact with electric heating cables are free of burrs and
sharp protrusions.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
APPLICATIONS
A.
Install the following types of electric heating cable for the applications described:
1.
3.3
Temperature Maintenance for Domestic Hot Water: Self-regulating, parallel-resistance
heating cable.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install electric heating cable across expansion, construction, and control joints according to
manufacturer's written instructions; use cable-protection conduit and slack cable to allow
movement without damage to cable.
B.
Electric Heating-Cable Installation for Temperature Maintenance for Domestic Hot Water:
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.4
Install electric heating cables after piping has been tested and before insulation is
installed.
Install insulation over piping with electric heating cables according to Section 220719
"Plumbing Piping Insulation."
Install warning tape on piping insulation where piping is equipped with electric heating
cables.
Install the heating cable on the domestic hot water line to each plumbing fixture and terminate
at stop valve located just below the fixture.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
HEAT TRACING
FOR PLUMBING PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220533 - 3
B.
3.5
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and
inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.
C.
Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service
representative:
1.
2.
3.
Perform tests after cable installation but before application of coverings such as
insulation, wall or ceiling construction, or concrete.
Test cables for electrical continuity and insulation integrity before energizing.
Test cables to verify rating and power input. Energize and measure voltage and current
simultaneously.
D.
Repeat tests for continuity, insulation resistance, and input power after applying thermal
insulation on pipe-mounted cables.
E.
Cables will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.
F.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
3.6
PROTECTION
A.
Protect installed heating cables, including nonheating leads, from damage during construction.
B.
Remove and replace damaged heat-tracing cables.
**END OF SECTION 220533**
HEAT TRACING
FOR PLUMBING PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220533 - 4
SECTION 220553
IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING
PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following plumbing piping and equipment identification materials and
their installation:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Equipment markers.
Pipe markers.
Valve tags.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
1.4
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME A13.1, "Scheme for the Identification of Piping
Systems," for letter size, length of color field, colors (as scheduled in this Section), and viewing
angles of identification devices for piping.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with location of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
Equipment Markers: Engraved, color-coded laminated plastic. Include contact-type, permanent
adhesive.
1.
2.
Terminology: Match schedules as closely as possible.
Data: Name and plan number.
IDENTIFICATION FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220553 - 1
2.2
PIPING IDENTIFICATION DEVICES
A.
Manufactured Pipe Markers, General: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering indicating service,
and showing direction of flow.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Colors: Comply with ASME A13.1, unless otherwise indicated.
Lettering: Manufacturer's standard preprinted captions.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Full-band pipe markers
extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Either full-band or strip-type
pipe markers at least three times letter height and of length required for label.
Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate both directions; or
as separate unit on each pipe marker to indicate direction of flow.
B.
Pretensioned Pipe Markers: Precoiled semirigid plastic formed to cover full circumference of
pipe and to attach to pipe without adhesive.
C.
Plastic Tape: Continuously printed, vinyl tape at least 3 mils thick with pressure-sensitive,
permanent-type, self-adhesive back.
1.
2.
2.3
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: 3/4 inch
minimum.
Width for Markers on Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches or Larger: 1-1/2
inches minimum.
VALVE TAGS
A.
Valve Tags: Stamped or engraved with 1/4-inch letters for piping system abbreviation and 1/2inch numbers. Provide 5/32-inch hole for fastener.
1.
2.
Material: 0.032-inch-thick polished brass or aluminum; 0.0375-inch-thick stainless steel;
3/32-inch-thick laminated plastic with 2 black surfaces and white inner layer; or valve
manufacturer's standard solid plastic.
Valve-Tag Fasteners: Brass wire-link or beaded chain; or S-hook.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATIONS, GENERAL
A.
Products specified are for applications referenced in other Division 22 Sections. If more than
single-type material, device, or label is specified for listed applications, selection is Installer's
option.
IDENTIFICATION FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220553 - 2
3.2
EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install equipment markers with permanent adhesive on or near each major item of mechanical
equipment. Data required for markers may be included on signs, and markers may be omitted if
both are indicated.
1.
2.
3.
3.3
Letter Size: Minimum 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than 24
inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering
for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths the
size of principal lettering.
Data: Distinguish among multiple units, indicate operational requirements, indicate
safety and emergency precautions, warn of hazards and improper operations, and identify
units.
Locate markers where accessible and visible.
PIPING IDENTIFICATION
A.
Piping Color-Coding: Paint piping systems in exposed locations according to the schedule
below. Refer to Division 09 Section "Interior Painting" for painting products and procedures.
1.
2.
B.
Install manufactured pipe markers indicating service on each piping system. Install with flow
indication arrows showing direction of flow.
1.
2.
C.
Domestic Cold Water: Green.
Domestic Hot Water: Yellow.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, Less Than 6 Inches: Self-adhesive pipe markers.
Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 3/4 inch wide, lapped at least 1-1/2
inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe; or use
pretensioned pipe markers. Use size to ensure a tight fit.
Pipes with OD, Including Insulation, 6 Inches and Larger: Self-adhesive pipe markers.
Use color-coded, self-adhesive plastic tape, at least 1-1/2 inches wide, lapped at least
3 inches at both ends of pipe marker, and covering full circumference of pipe; or use
shaped pipe markers. Use size to match pipe and secure with fasteners.
Locate pipe markers and color bands where piping is exposed in finished spaces; machine
rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and exterior
nonconcealed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and nonaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced markers.
IDENTIFICATION FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220553 - 3
3.4
VALVE-TAG AND VALVE-SCHEDULE INSTALLATION
A.
3.5
Install tags on valves and control devices in piping systems, except check valves; valves within
factory-fabricated equipment units; plumbing fixture supply stops; shutoff valves; faucets;
convenience and lawn-watering hose connections; and HVAC terminal devices and similar
roughing-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List tagged valves in Owner's existing
valve schedule.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.6
Relocate identification materials and devices that have become visually blocked by other work.
CLEANING
A.
Clean faces of identification devices and glass frames of valve schedules.
**END OF SECTION 220553**
IDENTIFICATION FOR
PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220553 - 4
SECTION 220700
PLUMBING INSULATION
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes insulation materials; insulating cements; field-applied jackets; accessories
and attachments; and sealing compounds.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for firestopping materials and requirements
for penetrations through fire and smoke barriers.
Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for pipe
insulation shields and protection saddles.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: Identify thermal conductivity, thickness, and jackets (both factory and field
applied, if any), for each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the U.S. Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing materials identical to those
specified in this Section according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency
acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and
sealer and cement material containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing and
inspecting agency.
1.
2.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread rating of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
rating of 50 or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread rating of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
rating of 150 or less.
PLUMBING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220700 - 1
1.5
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Packaging: Ship insulation materials in containers marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM specification designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for insulation application.
C.
Coordinate installation and testing of heat tracing.
1.7
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after testing piping systems and, where required, after installing
and testing heat tracing. Insulation application may begin on segments of piping that have
satisfactory test results.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation:
a.
b.
2.2
CertainTeed Corp.
Johns Manville.
Knauf Insulation.
Owens Corning.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
RBX Corporation.
INSULATION MATERIALS FOR PIPING
A.
Mineral-Fiber Insulation: Glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin complying with the
following:
1.
2.
Preformed Pipe Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 547, Type 1, with factory-applied, allpurpose, vapor-retarder jacket.
Blanket Insulation: Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II, without facing.
PLUMBING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220700 - 2
3.
Fire-Resistant Adhesive:
grades:
a.
b.
4.
5.
B.
2.3
Class 1, Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass-fiber insulation,
for sealing edges of glass-fiber insulation, and for bonding lagging cloth to unfaced
glass-fiber insulation.
Class 2, Grade A for bonding glass-fiber insulation to metal surfaces.
Vapor-Retarder Mastics: Fire- and water-resistant, vapor-retarder mastic for indoor
applications. Comply with MIL-C-19565C, Type II.
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with
ASTM C 449/C 449M.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: Closed-cell, sponge- or expanded-rubber materials.
Comply with ASTM C 534, Type I for tubular materials and Type II for sheet materials.
1.
2.
C.
Comply with MIL-A-3316C in the following classes and
Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
Ultraviolet-Protective Coating: As recommended by insulation manufacturer.
Prefabricated Thermal Insulating Fitting Covers: Comply with ASTM C 450 for dimensions
used in preforming insulation to cover valves, elbows, tees, and flanges.
FIELD-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
General: ASTM C 921, Type 1, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Standard PVC Fitting Covers: Factory-fabricated fitting covers manufactured from 20-milthick, high-impact, ultraviolet-resistant PVC.
1.
2.
C.
2.4
Shapes: 45- and 90-degree, short- and long-radius elbows, tees, valves, flanges, reducers,
end caps, soil-pipe hubs, traps, mechanical joints, and P-trap and supply covers for
lavatories for the disabled.
Adhesive: As recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
Foil and Paper Jacket:
aluminum foil.
Laminated, glass-fiber-reinforced, flame-retardant kraft paper and
ACCESSORIES AND ATTACHMENTS
A.
Glass Cloth and Tape: Comply with MIL-C-20079H, Type I for cloth and Type II for tape.
Woven glass-fiber fabrics, plain weave, presized a minimum of 8 oz./sq. yd..
1.
B.
Tape Width: 4 inches.
Bands: 3/4 inch wide, in one of the following materials compatible with jacket:
1.
2.
3.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304; 0.020 inch thick.
Galvanized Steel: 0.005 inch thick.
Aluminum: 0.007 inch thick.
PLUMBING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220700 - 3
C.
Wire: 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, stainless steel; or 0.062-inch, soft-annealed, galvanized steel.
D.
Weld-Attached Anchor Pins and Washers: Copper-coated steel pin for capacitor-discharge
welding and galvanized speed washer. Pin length sufficient for insulation thickness indicated.
1.
E.
Adhesive-Attached Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.
1.
F.
2.5
Welded Pin Holding Capacity: 100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the attached
surface.
Adhesive: Recommended by the anchor pin manufacturer as appropriate for surface
temperatures of ducts, plenums, and breechings; and to achieve a holding capacity of
100 lb for direct pull perpendicular to the adhered surface.
Self-Adhesive Anchor Pins and Speed Washers: Galvanized steel plate, pin, and washer
manufactured for attachment to duct and plenum with adhesive. Pin length sufficient for
insulation thickness indicated.
VAPOR RETARDERS
A.
Mastics: Materials recommended by insulation material manufacturer that are compatible with
insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation and other
conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Verify that systems and equipment to be insulated have been tested and are free of
defects.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Coordinate insulation installation with the trade installing heat tracing.
requirements for heat tracing that apply to insulation.
PLUMBING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
Comply with
220700 - 4
3.3
GENERAL APPLICATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of equipment and piping including fittings, valves, and
specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of equipment and pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
2.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
PLUMBING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220700 - 5
3.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 4 inches o.c.
a.
4.
5.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape as recommended by insulation material manufacturer to
maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
P.
For above ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Manholes.
Handholes.
Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
B.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations:
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
1.
C.
Install insulation
Refer to Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for requirements on firestopping and
fire-resistive joint sealers.
Insulation Installation at Floor Penetrations:
1.
2.
Pipe: Install insulation continuously through floor penetrations.
Seal penetrations through fire-rated assemblies.
Comply with requirements in
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."
PLUMBING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220700 - 6
3.5
MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION APPLICATION
A.
Mineral-Fiber Pipe Insulation Installation: Apply insulation to piping systems as follows:
1.
Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Apply preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and
bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket
insulation.
Apply canvas jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive,
overlapping seams at least 1 inch, and seal joints with vapor-retarder mastic.
Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
a.
b.
c.
4.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire, tape, or bands
without deforming insulation materials.
Where vapor retarders are indicated, seal longitudinal seams and end joints with
vapor-retarder mastic. Apply vapor retarder to ends of insulation at intervals of 15
to 20 feet to form a vapor retarder between pipe insulation segments.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets, secure laps with outward clinched
staples at 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets with vapor retarders, do not staple
longitudinal tabs but secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by the
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-retarder mastic.
Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of
pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
When premolded insulation elbows and fittings are not available, apply mitered
sections of pipe insulation, or glass-fiber blanket insulation, to a thickness equal to
adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation materials with wire, tape, or bands.
Cover fittings with standard PVC fitting covers.
Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
a.
b.
c.
Apply premolded insulation sections of the same material as straight segments of
pipe insulation when available. Secure according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
When premolded insulation sections are not available, apply glass-fiber blanket
insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to
allow valve operation without disturbing insulation. For check valves, arrange
insulation for access to strainer basket without disturbing insulation.
Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
PLUMBING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220700 - 7
d.
e.
3.6
Use preformed standard PVC fitting covers for valve sizes where available.
Secure fitting covers with manufacturer's attachments and accessories. Seal seams
with tape and vapor-retarder mastic.
For larger sizes where PVC fitting covers are not available, seal insulation with
canvas jacket and sealing compound recommended by the insulation material
manufacturer.
FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC THERMAL INSULATION APPLICATION
A.
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation Applications for Piping Systems: Apply insulation to
piping systems as follows:
1.
Apply insulation to straight pipes and tubes as follows:
a.
b.
2.
Apply insulation to flanges as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Apply pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation segment the same as overall width of the flange and
bolts, plus twice the thickness of the pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer
circumference of adjacent straight pipe segments with cut sections of sheet
insulation of the same thickness as pipe insulation.
Secure insulation to flanges and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to
the pipe surface.
Apply insulation to fittings and elbows as follows:
a.
b.
4.
Follow manufacturer's written instructions for applying insulation.
Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to
the pipe surface.
Apply mitered sections of pipe insulation.
Secure insulation materials and seal seams with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow passage of air to
the pipe surface.
Apply insulation to valves and specialties as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Apply preformed valve covers manufactured of the same material as pipe
insulation and attached according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
Apply cut segments of pipe and sheet insulation to valve body. Arrange insulation
to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without disturbing
insulation. For check valves, fabricate removable sections of insulation arranged
to allow access to strainer basket.
Apply insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
Secure insulation to valves and specialties and seal seams with manufacturer's
recommended adhesive. Cement to avoid openings in insulation that will allow
passage of air to the pipe surface.
PLUMBING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220700 - 8
3.7
FIELD-APPLIED JACKET APPLICATION
A.
Foil and Paper Jackets: Apply foil and paper jackets where indicated.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.8
Draw jacket material smooth and tight.
Apply lap or joint strips with the same material as jacket.
Secure jacket to insulation with manufacturer's recommended adhesive.
Apply jackets with 1-1/2-inch laps at longitudinal seams and 3-inch-wide joint strips at
end joints.
Seal openings, punctures, and breaks in vapor-retarder jackets and exposed insulation
with vapor-retarder mastic.
FINISHES
A.
3.9
Flexible Elastomeric Thermal Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured, apply two coats of the
insulation manufacturer's recommended protective coating.
PIPING SYSTEM APPLICATIONS
A.
Insulation materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section.
B.
Application schedules identify piping system and indicate pipe size ranges and material,
thickness, and jacket requirements.
C.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not apply insulation to the following
systems, materials, and equipment:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.10
Flexible connectors.
Vibration-control devices.
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
Below-grade piping, unless otherwise indicated.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings, unless potential for personnel injury.
Air chambers, unions, strainers, check valves, plug valves, and flow regulators.
INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULES, GENERAL
A.
Refer to insulation application schedules for required insulation materials, vapor retarders, and
field-applied jackets.
B.
Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for
a type of equipment, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
C.
Insulate indoor and outdoor equipment in paragraphs below that is not factory insulated.
PLUMBING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220700 - 9
3.11
A.
INTERIOR PIPE INSULATION APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Service: Domestic hot water.
1.
2.
3.
Operating Temperature: 60 to 140 deg F.
Insulation Material: Mineral fiber or flexible elastomeric.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Pipe Sizes Up to 2 Inches: 1 inch.
Pipe Sizes Over 2 Inches: 1-1/2 inches.
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
Vapor Retarder Required: No.
Finish: None.
Service: Domestic cold water and trap priming lines.
1.
2.
3.
Operating Temperature: 35 to 60 deg F.
Insulation Material: Mineral fiber or flexible elastomeric.
Insulation Thickness: Apply the following insulation thicknesses:
a.
b.
c.
4.
5.
6.
Pipe Sizes Up to 1 Inch: 1/2 inch.
Pipe Sizes 1 Inch to 4 Inches: 1 inch.
Pipe Sizes Over 4 Inches: 1-1/2 inches.
Field-Applied Jacket: None.
Vapor Retarder Required: Yes.
Finish: None.
**END OF SECTION 220700**
PLUMBING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
220700 - 10
SECTION 221116
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes domestic water piping inside the building.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Section 220519 "Meters and Gages for Plumbing Piping" for pressure gages and fittings.
Section 220700 "Plumbing Insulation" for insulation for domestic water piping.
Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for water distribution piping
specialties.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
Provide components and installation capable of producing domestic water piping systems with
125 psig, unless otherwise indicated.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Water Samples: Specified in Part 3 "Cleaning" Article.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Field quality-control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
B.
Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 14, NSF 61 Annex G, and
NSF 372. Plastic piping components shall be marked with "NSF-pw."
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221116 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to Part 3 "Pipe and Fitting Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and
joining materials.
B.
Transition Couplings for Aboveground Pressure Piping: Coupling or other manufactured fitting
the same size as, with pressure rating at least equal to and ends compatible with, piping to be
joined.
2.2
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88, Type L, water tube, drawn temper.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Copper Pressure Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast-copper-alloy or ASME B16.22, wroughtcopper, solder-joint fittings. Furnish wrought-copper fittings if indicated.
Bronze Flanges: ASME B16.24, Class 150, with solder-joint ends. Furnish Class 300
flanges if required to match piping.
Copper Unions: MSS SP-123, cast-copper-alloy, hexagonal-stock body, with ball-andsocket, metal-to-metal seating surfaces, and solder-joint or threaded ends.
Copper, Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75 copper tube or ASTM B 584 bronze
castings.
a.
2.3
Grooved-End-Tube Couplings: Copper-tube dimensions and design similar to
AWWA C606. Include ferrous housing sections, gasket suitable for hot water, and
bolts and nuts.
VALVES
A.
Bronze general-duty valves are specified in Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing
Piping."
B.
Balancing valves and drain valves are specified in Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping
Specialties."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPE AND FITTING APPLICATIONS
A.
Transition and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping rating may be used
in applications below, unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flanges may be used on aboveground piping, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Grooved joints may be used on aboveground grooved-end piping.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221116 - 2
D.
Fitting Option: Extruded-tee connections and brazed joints may be used on aboveground
copper tubing.
E.
Aboveground Domestic Water and Trap Priming Piping: Use any of the following piping
materials for each size range:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.2
NPS 1 and Smaller: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered
joints.
NPS 1-1/4 and NPS 1-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and
soldered joints.
NPS 2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
NPS 2: Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper grooved-end fittings;
grooved-end-tube couplings; and grooved joints.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and
soldered joints.
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 3-1/2: Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper groovedend fittings; grooved-end-tube couplings; and grooved joints.
NPS 4 to NPS 6: Hard copper tube, Type L; copper pressure fittings; and soldered joints.
NPS 4 to NPS 6: Hard copper tube, Type L with grooved ends; copper grooved-end
fittings; grooved-end-tube couplings; and grooved joints.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the
following requirements apply:
1.
2.
Shutoff Duty: Use bronze ball valves for piping NPS 2-1/2 and smaller.
Drain Duty: Hose-end drain valves.
B.
Install shutoff valve close to water main on each branch and riser serving plumbing fixtures or
equipment, on each water supply to equipment, and on each water supply to plumbing fixtures
that do not have supply stops. Use ball valves.
C.
Install drain valves for equipment at base of each water riser, at low points in horizontal piping,
and where required to drain water piping.
1.
3.3
Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains, risers, and branches.
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Section 220500 "Common Work Results
for Plumbing."
B.
Install domestic water piping level without pitch and plumb.
3.4
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Section 220500 "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221116 - 3
B.
Soldered Joints: Use ASTM B 813, water-flushable, lead-free flux; ASTM B 32, lead-freealloy solder; and ASTM B 828 procedure, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Grooved Joints: Assemble joints with grooved-end-pipe or grooved-end-tube coupling housing,
gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Extruded-Tee Connections: Form tee in copper tube according to ASTM F 2014. Use tool
designed for copper tube; drill pilot hole, form collar for outlet, dimple tube to form seating
stop, and braze branch tube into collar.
3.5
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Pipe hanger and support devices are specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1.
2.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
Individual, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs: According to the following:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls, if indicated.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B.
Install supports according to Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
C.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D.
Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, to a minimum of 3/8 inch.
E.
Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum horizontal spacing and minimum
rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
NPS 3/4 and Smaller: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1 and NPS 1-1/4: 72 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 96 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 2-1/2: 108 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 3 to NPS 5: 10 feet with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 6: 10 feet with 5/8-inch rod.
NPS 8: 10 feet with 3/4-inch rod.
F.
Install supports for vertical copper tubing every 10 feet.
G.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221116 - 4
3.6
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment and machines to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect domestic water piping to water-service piping with shutoff valve, and extend and
connect to the following:
1.
3.7
Plumbing Fixtures: Cold- and hot-water supply piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller
than required by plumbing code. Refer to Section 224000 "Plumbing Fixtures."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect domestic water piping as follows:
1.
2.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it has been inspected and
approved by authorities having jurisdiction.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before
inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having
jurisdiction:
a.
b.
3.
4.
B.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or
closing-in after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange final inspection for authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or
inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having
jurisdiction.
Test domestic water piping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fill domestic water piping. Check components to determine that they are not air bound
and that piping is full of water.
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave new, altered, extended, or replaced domestic water piping uncovered and
unconcealed until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or
concealed before it was tested.
Cap and subject piping to static water pressure of 50 psig above operating pressure,
without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and
allow to stand for four hours. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must
be repaired.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping or portion thereof until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221116 - 5
3.8
ADJUSTING
A.
Perform the following adjustments before operation:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
3.9
Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
Open shutoff valves to fully open position.
Remove plugs used during testing of piping and plugs used for temporary sealing of
piping during installation.
Remove and clean strainer screens. Close drain valves and replace drain plugs.
Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings, adjustments, and operation.
CLEANING
A.
Clean and disinfect potable domestic water piping as follows:
1.
2.
Purge new piping and parts of existing domestic water piping that have been altered,
extended, or repaired before using.
Use purging and disinfecting procedures prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or,
if methods are not prescribed, procedures described in either AWWA C651 or
AWWA C652 or as described below:
a.
b.
Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at
outlets.
Fill and isolate system according to either of the following:
1)
2)
c.
d.
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least 50 ppm
of chlorine. Isolate with valves and allow to stand for 24 hours.
Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution with at least
200 ppm of chlorine. Isolate and allow to stand for three hours.
Flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine is in water coming from
system after the standing time.
Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat
procedures if biological examination shows contamination.
B.
Prepare and submit reports of purging and disinfecting activities.
C.
Clean interior of domestic water piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
**END OF SECTION 221116**
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221116 - 6
SECTION 221119
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following domestic water piping specialties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Water regulators.
Water tempering valves.
Trap-seal primer valves.
Hose bibbs.
Section 220500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint
construction, basic installation requirements; and escutcheons, dielectric fittings, sleeves,
and sleeve seals that are not in this Section.
Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty ball valves.
Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labeling and
identifying requirements.
Section 221116 "Domestic Water Piping" for water-supply piping and connections.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
1.4
Minimum Working Pressure for Domestic Water Piping Specialties: 125 psig, unless otherwise
indicated.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For domestic water piping specialties to include in operation
and maintenance manuals.
DOMESTIC WATER
PIPING SPECIALTIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221119 - 1
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Potable-water piping and components shall comply with NSF 372, NSF 61 Annex G, and
NSF 14 as applicable. Mark "NSF-pw" on plastic piping components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Water Regulators:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Water Tempering Valves:
a.
b.
c.
3.
Josam Co.
Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
Tyler Pipe; Wade Div.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Hydromechanics Div.
Trap Seal Primer Valves:
a.
2.2
Leonard Valve Co.
Mark Controls Corp.; Powers Process Controls.
Symmons Industries, Inc.
Water Hammer Arresters:
a.
b.
c.
d.
4.
Cla-Val Co.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.
IMI Cash Valve.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.
WATER REGULATORS
A.
General: ASSE 1003, water regulators, rated for initial working pressure of 150 psig minimum,
of size, flow rate, and inlet and outlet pressures indicated. Include integral factory-installed or
separate field-installed Y-pattern strainer.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2-Inch NPS and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends.
2-1/2-Inch NPS and Larger: Bronze or cast-iron body with flanged ends. Include
AWWA C550 or FDA-approved interior epoxy coating for regulators with cast-iron
body.
Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials.
Exterior Finish: Polished chrome-plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.
DOMESTIC WATER
PIPING SPECIALTIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221119 - 2
B.
2.3
Single-seated, direct-operated, integral-bypass type.
WATER TEMPERING VALVES
A.
General: Manually adjustable, thermostatically controlled water tempering valve; brass body;
and adjustable temperature setting.
B.
System Water Tempering Valves: Piston or discs controlling both hot- and cold-water flow,
capable of limited antiscald protection. Include threaded inlets and outlet, and internal checks
on inlets, low capacity for a flow of less than 0.5 gpm to 3.5 gpm. Temperature shall be set at
105 deg F.
1.
2.4
Finish: Chrome plated.
HOSE BIBBS
A.
Hose Bibbs (HB-1):
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Central Brass.
Chicago Faucet Co.
T&S Brass and Bronze Works, Inc.
Standard: ASME A112.18.1 for sediment faucets.
Type: 1/2-inch male inlet, 3/4-inch hose thread outlet, removable tee handle, rough brass
with inline backflow preventer with 3/4-inch hose thread on inlet and outlet.
Mounting: Wall mounted.
TRAP SEAL PRIMER VALVES
A.
Trap Seal Primer Valves (TP-1):
characteristics:
1.
2.
3.
2.6
ASSE 1018, water-supply-fed type, with the following
125-psig minimum working pressure.
Automatic, brass trap primer valve activated by drop in water pressure.
Inlet and Outlet Connections: 1/2-inch NPS threaded, union, or solder joint.
DRAIN VALVES
A.
Hose-End Drain Valves: MSS SP-110, 3/4-inch NPS ball valve, rated for 400-psig minimum
CWP. Include 2-piece, ASTM B 62 bronze body with standard port, chrome-plated brass ball,
replaceable seats and seals, blowout-proof stem, and vinyl-covered steel handle.
1.
2.
Inlet: Threaded or solder joint.
Outlet: Short-threaded nipple with ASME B1.20.7 garden-hose thread and cap.
DOMESTIC WATER
PIPING SPECIALTIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221119 - 3
2.7
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Water Hammer Arresters: ASME A112.26.1M, ASSE 1010, or PDI-WH 201, bellows or piston
type with pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes are based on water-supply fixture units,
ASME A112.26.1M sizes A through F and PDI-WH 201 sizes A through F.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PLUMBING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install plumbing specialty components, connections, and devices according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install pressure regulators with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and valve bypass. Install pressure
gages on inlet and outlet.
C.
Install hose bibbs with integral or field-installed vacuum breaker.
D.
Install supply-type, trap-seal primer valves with outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a
minimum of 1 percent, and connect to floor-drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for
proper flow.
E.
Fasten wall-hanging plumbing specialties securely to supports attached to building substrate if
supports are specified and to building wall construction if no support is indicated.
F.
Fasten recessed, wall-mounting plumbing specialties to reinforcement built into walls.
G.
Secure supplies to supports or substrate.
H.
Install individual stop valve in each water supply to plumbing specialties. Use ball or globe
valve if specific valve is not indicated.
I.
Install water-supply stop valves in accessible locations.
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.3
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping and specialties.
LABELING AND IDENTIFYING
A.
Equipment Nameplates and Signs: Install engraved plastic-laminate equipment nameplate or
sign on or near each of the following:
1.
2.
Water pressure-reducing valves.
Supply-type, trap-seal primer valves.
DOMESTIC WATER
PIPING SPECIALTIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221119 - 4
B.
3.4
Distinguish among multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety
and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations, in addition to
identifying unit. Nameplates and signs are specified in Section 220553 "Identification for
Plumbing Piping and Equipment."
COMMISSIONING
A.
Before startup, perform the following checks:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Before operating systems, perform the following steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.5
Close drain valves, hydrants, and hose bibbs.
Open general-duty valves to fully open position.
Remove and clean strainers.
Verify that drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until
clear.
Startup Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written instructions. If no procedures are prescribed
by manufacturer, proceed as follows:
1.
2.
D.
System tests are complete.
Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired.
Clear space is provided for servicing specialties.
Adjust pressure-reducing valves to pressures indicated.
Adjust water tempering valves to provide temperature indicated at faucet outlet.
Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning.
PROTECTION
A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
**END OF SECTION 221119**
DOMESTIC WATER
PIPING SPECIALTIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221119 - 5
SECTION 221316
SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes pipe and fittings for soil, waste, and vent piping inside the building.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Section 221319 "Sanitary Waste Piping Specialties" for soil, waste, and vent piping
systems' specialties.
DEFINITIONS
A.
ABS: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene plastic.
B.
PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following minimum working
pressure, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
1.5
Soil, Waste, and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Field quality-control inspection and test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency.
SANITARY WASTE AND
VENT PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221316 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
PIPING MATERIALS
A.
2.3
Refer to Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article for applications of pipe, tube, fitting, and joining
materials.
HUBLESS CAST-IRON SOIL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Pipe and Fittings: ASTM A 888 or CISPI 301 and marked with the collective trademark of the
Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Institute.
B.
Shielded Couplings: ASTM C 1277 assembly of metal shield or housing, corrosion-resistant
fasteners, and rubber sleeve with integral, center pipe stop.
1.
Standard, Shielded, Stainless-Steel Couplings: CISPI 310, with stainless-steel corrugated
shield; stainless-steel bands and tightening devices; and ASTM C 564, rubber sleeve.
a.
Manufacturers:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
ANACO.
Fernco, Inc.
Ideal Div.; Stant Corp.
Mission Rubber Co.
Tyler Pipe; Soil Pipe Div.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Aboveground, Soil and Waste Piping NPS 4 and Smaller:
1.
Hubless cast-iron soil pipe and fittings; standard, shielded, stainless-steel couplings; and
hubless-coupling joints.
SANITARY WASTE AND
VENT PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221316 - 2
3.2
PIPING INSTALLATION
A.
Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Section 220500 "Common Work Results
for Plumbing."
B.
Install cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook,"
Chapter IV, "Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings."
C.
Install sway bracing on cast-iron, no-hub soil pipe 4 inches and larger in accordance with the
International Plumbing Code and CISPI.
D.
Make changes in direction for soil and waste drainage and vent piping using appropriate
branches, bends, and long-sweep bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep 1/4 bends may be used
on vertical stacks if change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn,
double Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings if 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side
with common drain pipe. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Do not
change direction of flow more than 90 degrees. Use proper size of standard increasers and
reducers if pipes of different sizes are connected. Reducing size of drainage piping in direction
of flow is prohibited.
E.
Install soil and waste drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, unless
otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Building Sanitary Drain: 2 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 3 and
smaller; 1 percent downward in direction of flow for piping NPS 4 and larger.
Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 2 percent downward in direction of flow.
Vent Piping: 1 percent down toward vertical fixture vent or toward vent stack.
Install engineered soil and waste drainage and vent piping systems as follows:
1.
Combination Waste and Vent: Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction.
G.
Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil piping passing through concrete slabs-on-grade if slab
is without membrane waterproofing.
H.
Do not enclose, cover, or put piping into operation until it is inspected and approved by
authorities having jurisdiction.
3.3
JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Basic piping joint construction requirements are specified in Section 220500 "Common Work
Results for Plumbing."
B.
Join hubless cast-iron soil piping according to CISPI 310 and CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and
Fittings Handbook" for hubless-coupling joints.
SANITARY WASTE AND
VENT PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221316 - 3
3.4
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing
Piping and Equipment." Install the following:
1.
2.
Vertical Piping: MSS Type 8 or Type 42, clamps.
Install individual, straight, horizontal piping runs according to the following:
a.
b.
c.
3.
4.
100 Feet and Less: MSS Type 1, adjustable, steel clevis hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet: MSS Type 43, adjustable roller hangers.
Longer Than 100 Feet, if Indicated: MSS Type 49, spring cushion rolls.
Multiple, Straight, Horizontal Piping Runs 100 Feet or Longer: MSS Type 44, pipe rolls.
Support pipe rolls on trapeze.
Base of Vertical Piping: MSS Type 52, spring hangers.
B.
Install supports according to Section 220529 "Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and
Equipment."
C.
Support vertical piping and tubing at base and at each floor.
D.
Rod diameter may be reduced 1 size for double-rod hangers, with 3/8-inch minimum rods.
E.
Install hangers for cast-iron soil piping with the following maximum horizontal spacing and
minimum rod diameters:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
NPS 1-1/2 and NPS 2: 60 inches with 3/8-inch rod.
NPS 3: 60 inches with 1/2-inch rod.
NPS 4 and NPS 5: 60 inches with 5/8-inch rod.
NPS 6: 60 inches with 3/4-inch rod.
NPS 8 to NPS 12: 60 inches with 7/8-inch rod.
F.
Install supports for vertical cast-iron soil piping every 15 feet.
G.
Support piping and tubing not listed above according to MSS SP-69 and manufacturer's written
instructions.
3.5
CONNECTIONS
A.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect soil and waste piping to exterior sanitary sewerage piping. Use transition fitting to join
dissimilar piping materials.
C.
Connect drainage and vent piping to the following:
1.
2.
Plumbing Fixtures: Connect drainage piping in sizes indicated, but not smaller than
required by plumbing code.
Plumbing Specialties: Connect drainage and vent piping in sizes indicated, but not
smaller than required by plumbing code.
SANITARY WASTE AND
VENT PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221316 - 4
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
During installation, notify authorities having jurisdiction at least 24 hours before inspection
must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.
Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping before concealing or closing-in
after roughing-in and before setting fixtures.
Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by authorities having jurisdiction to
observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements.
B.
Reinspection: If authorities having jurisdiction find that piping will not pass test or inspection,
make required corrections and arrange for reinspection.
C.
Reports: Prepare inspection reports and have them signed by authorities having jurisdiction.
D.
Test sanitary drainage and vent piping according to procedures of authorities having jurisdiction
or, in absence of published procedures, as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.7
Test for leaks and defects in new piping and parts of existing piping that have been
altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report
for each test, complete with diagram of portion of piping tested.
Leave uncovered and unconcealed new, altered, extended, or replaced drainage and vent
piping until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that was covered or concealed
before it was tested.
Roughing-in Plumbing Test Procedure: Test drainage and vent piping, except outside
leaders, on completion of roughing-in. Close openings in piping system and fill with
water to point of overflow, but not less than 10-foot head of water. From 15 minutes
before inspection starts to completion of inspection, water level must not drop. Inspect
joints for leaks.
Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and traps
filled with water, test connections and prove they are gastight and watertight. Plug ventstack openings on roof and building drains where they leave building. Introduce air into
piping system equal to pressure of 1-inch wg. Use U-tube or manometer inserted in trap
of water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure must remain constant without
introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture
connections for gas and water leaks.
Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest piping, or portion thereof, until
satisfactory results are obtained.
Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action.
CLEANING
A.
Clean interior of piping. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses.
B.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
C.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day and when work stops.
**END OF SECTION 221316**
SANITARY WASTE AND
VENT PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221316 - 5
SECTION 221319
SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following sanitary drainage piping specialties:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Cleanouts.
Floor drains.
Section 220500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials, joint
construction, basic installation requirements; and escutcheons, dielectric fittings, sleeves,
and sleeve seals that are not in this Section.
Section 220553 "Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment" for labeling and
identifying requirements.
Section 221316 "Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping" for drainage and vent piping and
connections.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with following
minimum working-pressure ratings, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
1.4
Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping: 10-foot head of water.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Drainage piping specialties shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing
agency.
SANITARY WASTE
PIPING SPECIALTIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221319 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
2.2
Floor-Drain Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap
seal primer valve connection.
CLEANOUTS
A.
Wall cleanout cover with plug.
1.
2.
Applicable Standard: ASME A112.36.2M.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
5.
2.3
Josam Co.
Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Zurn Industries, Inc., Hydromechanics Div.
Application: Wall cleanout.
Cover Shape and Material: Round, stainless steel with 1/4 - 20 by 3-1/2 center screw.
Closure: Brass plug, countersunk hole.
FLOOR DRAINS
A.
Floor Drain FD-1: Where plumbing specialties of this designation are indicated, provide
products complying with the following:
1.
2.
Applicable Standard: ASME A112.21.1M.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Josam Co.
Smith: Jay R. Smith Mfg. Co.
Tyler Pipe, Wade Div.
Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.
Zurn Industries, Inc., Hydromechanics Div.
Body Material: Cast iron.
Seepage Flange: Required. Anchor flange.
Clamping Device: Required.
Outlet: Bottom.
Top Strainer Material: Nickel bronze.
Top Shape: Round and of size compatible to drain size.
Top Loading Classification: Light Duty.
Inlet Fitting: Cast iron, spigot or no-hub outlet, and trap seal primer valve connection.
Trap Material: Cast iron.
Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
SANITARY WASTE
PIPING SPECIALTIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221319 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
SANITARY DRAINAGE PIPING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION
A.
Refer to Section 220500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for piping joining materials,
joint construction, and basic installation requirements.
B.
Install sanitary drainage piping specialty components, connections, and devices according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Install cleanouts in aboveground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not
indicated, according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Size same as drainage piping up to 4-inch NPS. Use 4-inch NPS for larger drainage
piping unless larger cleanout is indicated.
Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees.
Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping 4-inch NPS and smaller and 100 feet
for larger piping.
Locate at base of each vertical soil and waste stack.
D.
Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished
wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.
E.
Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained. Set grates of drains flush with
finished floor or as indicated. Size outlets as indicated.
F.
Install individual traps for floor drains connected to sanitary building drain, unless otherwise
indicated.
G.
Install floor-drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining
flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes where penetrated.
H.
Position floor drains for easy access and maintenance.
I.
Install floor-drain, trap-seal primer fittings on inlet to floor drains that require trap-seal primer
connection.
1.
2.
J.
3.2
Exception: Fitting may be omitted if trap has trap-seal primer connection.
Size: Same as floor drain inlet.
Install escutcheons at wall, floor, and ceiling penetrations in exposed finished locations and
within cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding
pipe fittings.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow service and maintenance.
SANITARY WASTE
PIPING SPECIALTIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221319 - 3
3.3
PROTECTION
A.
Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris
and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.
B.
Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of each day or when work stops.
**END OF SECTION 221319**
SANITARY WASTE
PIPING SPECIALTIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
221319 - 4
SECTION 224000
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following conventional plumbing fixtures and related components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Faucets for lavatories and sinks.
Flushometers.
Toilet seats.
Fixture supports.
Water closets.
Lavatories.
Commercial sinks.
Section 221119 "Domestic Water Piping Specialties" for floor drains and specialty
fixtures not included in this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Accessible Fixture: Plumbing fixture that can be approached, entered, and used by people with
disabilities.
B.
Fitting: Device that controls flow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in
this Section include supplies and stops, faucets and spouts, drains and tailpieces, and traps and
waste pipes. Piping and general-duty valves are included where indicated.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: Include selected fixture and trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances,
equipment, and supports and indicate materials and finishes, dimensions, construction details,
and flow-control rates for each type of fixture indicated.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For plumbing fixtures to include in maintenance manuals.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
224000 - 1
1.6
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures, faucets, and other components of each category
through one source from a single manufacturer.
1.
Exception: If fixtures, faucets, or other components are not available from a single
manufacturer, obtain similar products from other manufacturers specified for that
category.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities"; Public Law 90-480, "Architectural Barriers Act"; and Public
Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act"; about plumbing fixtures for people with
disabilities.
D.
Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements in Public Law 102-486, "Energy Policy
Act," about water flow and consumption rates for plumbing fixtures.
E.
NSF Standards: Comply with NSF 61 Annex G, "Drinking Water System Components--Health
Effects," and NSF 372, "Drinking Water System Components – Lead Content", for fixture
materials that will be in contact with potable water.
F.
Select combinations of fixtures and trim, faucets, fittings, and other components that are
compatible.
G.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for plumbing
fixtures:
1.
2.
H.
Stainless-Steel Fixtures Other Than Service Sinks: ASME A112.19.3M.
Vitreous-China Fixtures: ASME A112.19.2M.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for lavatory
and sink faucets:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Backflow Protection Devices for Faucets with Hose-Thread Outlet: ASME A112.18.3M.
Faucets: ASME A112.18.1M.
Hose-Connection Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1011.
Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
Sensor-Actuated Faucets and Electrical Devices: UL 1951.
Supply and Drain Fittings: ASME A112.18.1M.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
224000 - 2
I.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous fittings:
1.
2.
3.
4.
J.
Comply with the following applicable standards and other requirements specified for
miscellaneous components:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.7
Atmospheric Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1001.
Brass and Copper Supplies: ASME A112.18.1M.
Manual-Operation Flushometers: ASSE 1037.
Tubular Brass Drainage Fittings and Piping: ASME A112.18.2M.
Floor Drains: ASME A112.21.1M.
Hose-Coupling Threads: ASME B1.20.7.
Off-Floor Fixture Supports: ASME A112.6.1M.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1.
Plastic Toilet Seats: ANSI Z124.5.
Supply and Drain Protective Shielding Guards: ICC A117.1.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate roughing-in and final plumbing fixture locations, and verify that fixtures can be
installed to comply with original design and referenced standards.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the
manufacturers specified in other Part 2 articles.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in
other Part 2 articles.
2.2
FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A.
Lavatory Support:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Type I: Lavatory carrier with exposed arms and tie rods.
Type II: Lavatory carrier with concealed arms and tie rod.
Type III: Lavatory carrier with hanger plate and tie rod.
Standard Fixture Support: Include steel uprights with feet.
Accessible Fixture Support: Include rectangular steel uprights.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
224000 - 3
2.3
WATER CLOSETS
A.
Water Closets, WC-1: Accessible, floor-mounting, floor-outlet, vitreous-china fixture designed
for flushometer valve operation.
1.
2.
Products:
Water Closet:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Flushometer Valve:
a.
b.
4.
Bowl Type: Elongated with siphon-jet design. Include bolt caps matching fixture.
Height: Accessible.
Design Consumption: 1.6 gal./flush.
Color: White.
Flushometer: Cast-brass body with corrosion-resistant internal components, non-holdopen feature, screwdriver check stop, vacuum breaker, and copper or brass tubing with
wall flange, and polished chrome-plated finish on exposed parts.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
7.
Bemis Mfg. Co.
Church Seat Co.
Olsonite Corp.
Sanderson Plumbing Products, Inc.; Beneke Industries, Ltd.
Style: Flushometer valve.
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
Zurn Industries, Inc., Flush Valve Operations; Model Z6000 AV-WS1.
No substitutions.
Toilet Seat:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
American Standard, Inc.
Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products.
Kohler Co.
U.S. Industries, Eljer Plumbingware Div.
Internal Design: Diaphragm operation.
Style: Exposed.
Inlet Size: NPS 1.
Trip Mechanism: Oscillating, brass lever-handle actuator, ADA compliant.
Consumption: Factory set or field-adjusted 1.6 gal./flush maximum per flush
cycle.
Tailpiece: NPS 1-1/2 with spud and standard length to top of bowl.
Toilet Seat: Solid plastic with bumpers and hardware, compatible with water closet.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Configuration: Open front without cover.
Size: Elongated.
Class: Extra-heavy-duty commercial.
Hinge Type: SC, self-sustaining, check.
Color: White.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
224000 - 4
2.4
LAVATORIES
A.
Lavatories, L-1: Accessible, wall-hanging, vitreous-china fixture with sensor faucet.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
American Standard Companies, Inc.
Crane Plumbing, L.L.C./Fiat Products.
Eljer.
Kohler Co.
Description: Accessible, wall-mounting, rectangular, vitreous-china fixture with sensoractuated faucet, mixing valve, and fitting insulation kits.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Type: With back.
Size: 20 by 18 inches rectangular.
Faucet Hole Punching: Three holes, 2-inch centers.
Faucet Hole Location: Top.
Color: White.
Faucet: Single inlet, cast-brass underbody with brass escutcheon, without pop-up
waste; electric, hard-wired, automatic sensor actuation; and center set for mounting
on fixture deck. Include the following faucet components:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
Aerator: 1.5 gpm with removal key.
Trim Plate: 4-inch
Operation: Single solenoid for tempered water.
Transformer(s): Hard wired; quantity as indicated.
Accessories: Junction box with connector board and mounting hardware.
Mixing Valve: Thermostatic, with 3/8 inch. compression connections and
inline checks.
Manufacturer:
a)
b)
g.
Fitting Insulation Kits: Molded, soft plastic covering for supplies and for drain
piping. Include manufacturer's standard fasteners, straps, and adhesives.
1)
Manufacturers:
a)
b)
h.
i.
j.
k.
Zurn Plumbing Products Group, Temp-Gard Operations; Model
Z6915-XL-HW6-CWB-TMV-1.
No substitutions.
McGuire Manufacturing Co., Inc.
TRUEBRO, Inc.
Supply Inlets: NPS 1/2.
Supply Stops: Manufacturer's standard brass, angle or straight, compression,
loose-key type, same size as supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser.
Supply Riser: NPS 3/8 rigid with NPS 1/4 straight, knob-end tailpiece.
Supply Insulation Kit: For supplies from wall to fixture with removable covering
for stops and handles.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
224000 - 5
l.
m.
n.
o.
2.5
Drain: Grid.
Drain Piping: NPS 1-1/4 chrome-plated, cast-brass P-trap with slip-joint inlet and
cleanout; NPS 1-1/4, 0.045-inch-thick tubular brass waste to wall; and wall
escutcheon.
Drain Insulation Kit: For drain piping from fixture to wall.
Fixture Support: Lavatory Type II, vertically adjustable.
SINKS
A.
Sink, S-1: Counter-mounting, self-rimming, stainless-steel fixture with single bowl and singlelever handle faucet.
1.
2.
Products:
Stainless-Steel Sink:
a.
b.
c.
d.
3.
Faucet:
a.
b.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
13.
14.
15.
16.
American Standard, Inc.; Model 4175.500
No substitutions.
Fixture Dimensions: One compartment, 22 inches by 19-1/2 inches overall; single bowl
18 inches long by 14 inches wide and 7-1/2 inches deep.
Fixture Stainless-Steel Thickness: 18 gage.
Fixture Faucet-Hole Spacing: 3 holes, centered and 4 inches each side of center.
Fixture Mounting: Counter, self-rimming.
Faucet Construction: Widespread with inlets on 8-inch centers, and cast-brass underbody
and brass escutcheon.
Faucet Mounting: Centered on fixture deck.
Faucet Components: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
11.
12.
Elkay Manufacturing Co.
Just Manufacturing Co.
Moen, Inc.
Sterling Plumbing Group, Inc.; Polar Stainless Products, Inc.
Fixture Operation: Manual.
Handle: Single-lever toggle.
Spout: Swing.
Spout Outlet: Manufacturer's standard aerator.
Spout-Outlet, Flow-Control Fitting: 2.2 gpm.
Supply Inlets: NPS 1/2 brass pipe or copper tubing.
Supply Stops: Manufacturer's standard brass, angle or straight, compression, loose-key
type, same size as supply inlet and with outlet matching supply riser.
Supply Shutoff Valves: NPS 1/2 ball valve.
Supply Risers: NPS 1/2 copper tubing.
Drain: 3-1/2-inch removable, stainless-steel crumb cup with NPS 1-1/2 tubular-brass
tailpiece.
Cast-Brass Trap: NPS 1-1/2 chrome-plated cast-brass trap with slip-joint inlet and
cleanout; NPS 1-1/2 pipe nipple to wall; and wall flange.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
224000 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine roughing-in for water soil and for waste piping systems and supports to verify actual
locations and sizes of piping connections and that locations and types of supports match those
indicated, before plumbing fixture installation. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data if
roughing-in data are not indicated.
B.
Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed.
C.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
FIXTURE INSTALLATION
A.
Assemble fixtures, trim, fittings, and other components according to manufacturers' written
instructions.
B.
For wall-hanging fixtures, install off-floor supports affixed to building substrate.
1.
2.
3.
Use carrier supports with waste fitting and seal for back-outlet fixtures.
Use carrier supports without waste fitting for fixtures with tubular waste piping.
Use chair-type carrier supports with rectangular steel uprights for accessible fixtures.
C.
Install back-outlet, wall-hanging fixtures onto waste fitting seals and attach to supports.
D.
Install floor-mounting fixtures on closet flanges or other attachments to piping or building
substrate.
E.
Install wall-hanging fixtures with tubular waste piping attached to supports.
F.
Install counter-mounting fixtures in and attached to casework.
G.
Install fixtures level and plumb according to manufacturers' written instructions and roughing-in
drawings.
H.
Install water-supply piping with stop on each supply to each fixture to be connected to water
distribution piping. Attach supplies to supports or substrate within pipe spaces behind fixtures.
Install stops in locations where they can be easily reached for operation.
1.
Exception: Use ball valve if stops are not specified with fixture. Refer to
Section 220523 "General-Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping" for general-duty valves.
I.
Install trap and tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be directly connected to
sanitary drainage system.
J.
Install tubular waste piping on drain outlet of each fixture to be indirectly connected to drainage
system.
K.
Install toilet seats on water closets.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
224000 - 7
L.
Install faucet-spout fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts if faucets are
not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters if required.
M.
Install traps on fixture outlets.
1.
2.
Exception: Omit trap on fixtures with integral traps.
Exception: Omit trap on indirect wastes, unless otherwise indicated.
N.
Install escutcheons at piping wall ceiling penetrations in exposed, finished locations and within
cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons if required to conceal protruding fittings.
Refer to Section 220500 "Common Work Results for Plumbing" for escutcheons.
O.
Seal joints between fixtures and walls, floors, and counters using sanitary-type, one-part,
mildew-resistant, silicone sealant.
Match sealant color to fixture color.
Refer to
Section 079200 "Joint Sealants" for sealant and installation requirements.
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 22 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Connect water supplies from water distribution piping to fixtures.
C.
Connect drain piping from fixtures to drainage piping.
D.
Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Connect fixtures with water supplies,
stops, risers, traps, and waste piping. Use size fittings required to match fixtures. Connect to
plumbing piping.
E.
Supply and Waste Connections to Fixtures and Equipment Specified in Other Sections:
Connect fixtures and equipment with water supplies, stops, risers, traps, and waste piping
specified. Use size fittings required to match fixtures and equipment. Connect to plumbing
piping.
F.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
G.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Verify that installed fixtures are categories and types specified for locations where installed.
B.
Check that fixtures are complete with trim, faucets, fittings, and other specified components.
C.
Inspect installed fixtures for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
224000 - 8
D.
Test installed fixtures after water systems are pressurized for proper operation. Replace
malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until units operate
properly.
E.
Install fresh batteries in sensor-operated mechanisms.
3.5
ADJUSTING
A.
Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning fixtures, fittings,
and controls.
B.
Adjust water pressure at faucets and flushometer valves to produce proper flow and stream.
C.
Replace washers and seals of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.
3.6
CLEANING
A.
Clean fixtures, faucets, and other fittings with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods
and materials. Do the following:
1.
2.
3.7
Remove faucet spouts and strainers, remove sediment and debris, and reinstall strainers
and spouts.
Remove sediment and debris from drains.
PROTECTION
A.
Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.
B.
Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities unless approved in writing by Owner.
**END OF SECTION 224000**
PLUMBING FIXTURES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
224000 - 9
SECTION 230500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
1.3
Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems.
Dielectric fittings.
Sleeves.
Escutcheons.
Grout.
HVAC demolition.
Equipment installation requirements common to equipment sections.
Painting and finishing.
Supports and anchorages.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,
pipe and duct chases, unheated spaces immediately below roof, spaces above ceilings,
unexcavated spaces, crawlspaces, and tunnels.
B.
Exposed, Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied
spaces and mechanical equipment rooms.
C.
Exposed, Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors or subject to outdoor ambient
temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include rooftop locations.
D.
Concealed, Interior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by
building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and chases.
E.
Concealed, Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions
and physical contact by building occupants but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures.
Examples include installations within unheated shelters.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230500 - 1
1.4
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural
Welding Code--Steel."
B.
Steel Pipe Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure
Vessel Code: Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."
1.
2.
C.
1.5
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
Electrical Characteristics for HVAC Equipment: Equipment of higher electrical characteristics
may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting
electrical services, circuit breakers, and conduit sizes are appropriately modified. If minimum
energy ratings or efficiencies are specified, equipment shall comply with requirements.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.6
Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping,
storage, and handling to prevent pipe end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and
moisture.
COORDINATION
A.
Arrange for pipe spaces, chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of
construction, to allow for HVAC installations.
B.
Coordinate installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place
concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PIPE, TUBE, AND FITTINGS
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for pipe, tube, and fitting materials and joining
methods.
B.
Pipe Threads: ASME B1.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings.
2.2
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Refer to individual Division 23 piping Sections for special joining materials not listed below.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230500 - 2
B.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
a.
b.
2.
Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125, cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges.
Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250, cast-iron and steel flanges.
AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch thick, unless otherwise indicated; and full-face
or ring type, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
E.
Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8, BCuP Series, copper-phosphorus alloys for general-duty
brazing, unless otherwise indicated; and AWS A5.8, BAg1, silver alloy for refrigerant piping,
unless otherwise indicated.
F.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall
thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
2.3
DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A.
Description: Combination fitting of copper alloy and ferrous materials with threaded, solderjoint, plain, or weld-neck end connections that match piping system materials.
B.
Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature.
C.
Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly, for 250-psig minimum working
pressure at 180 deg F.
D.
Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly, for 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure as required to suit system pressures.
E.
Dielectric-Flange Kits: Companion-flange assembly for field assembly. Include flanges, fullface- or ring-type neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic
washers, and steel backing washers.
1.
Separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts shall have 150- or 300-psig
minimum working pressure where required to suit system pressures.
F.
Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic
lining; threaded ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F .
G.
Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple with inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining;
plain, threaded, or grooved ends; and 300-psig minimum working pressure at 225 deg F .
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230500 - 3
2.4
SLEEVES
A.
Galvanized-Steel Sheet:
longitudinal joint.
B.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade B, Schedule 40, galvanized, plain ends.
2.5
0.0239-inch minimum thickness; round tube closed with welded
ESCUTCHEONS
A.
Description: Manufactured wall and ceiling escutcheons and floor plates, with an ID to closely
fit around pipe, tube, and insulation of insulated piping and an OD that completely covers
opening.
B.
One-Piece, Deep-Pattern Type: Deep-drawn, box-shaped brass with polished chrome-plated
finish.
C.
One-Piece, Cast-Brass Type: With set screw and chrome-plated finish.
D.
One-Piece, Stamped-Steel Type: With set screw or spring clips and chrome-plated finish.
2.6
GROUT
A.
Description: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, nonshrink and nonmetallic, dry hydraulic-cement grout.
1.
2.
3.
2.7
Characteristics:
Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, nonstaining,
nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi , 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory packaged.
noncorrosive,
TOUCHUP PAINT
A.
For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
C.
For Non-equipment Surfaces: Matching type and color of undamaged, existing adjacent finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HVAC DEMOLITION
A.
Refer to Section 024119 "Selective Structure Demolition" for general demolition requirements
and procedures.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230500 - 4
B.
Disconnect, demolish, and remove HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be
removed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
3.2
Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or
plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.
Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or
compatible piping material.
Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug
remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.
Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork
material.
Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment.
Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,
clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment
operational.
Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove
equipment and deliver to Owner.
If pipe, insulation, or equipment to remain is damaged in appearance or is unserviceable,
remove damaged or unserviceable portions and replace with new products of equal capacity and
quality.
PIPING SYSTEMS - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install piping according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections specifying
piping systems.
B.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction
loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless
deviations to layout are approved by Architect/Engineer.
C.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
D.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
E.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
F.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
G.
Install piping at indicated slopes.
H.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
I.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
J.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230500 - 5
K.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
L.
Install escutcheons for penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors according to the following:
1.
New Piping:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Piping with Fitting or Sleeve Protruding from Wall: One-piece, deep-pattern type.
Insulated Piping: One-piece, stamped-steel type with spring clips.
Bare Piping at Wall and Floor Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, castbrass type with polished chrome-plated finish.
Bare Piping at Ceiling Penetrations in Finished Spaces: One-piece, cast-brass type
with polished chrome-plated finish.
M.
Sleeves are not required for core-drilled holes.
N.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls and concrete floor and roof
slabs.
O.
Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls, gypsum-board partitions,
and concrete floor and roof slabs.
1.
Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces.
a.
2.
3.
Install sleeves in new walls and slabs as new walls and slabs are constructed.
Install sleeves that are large enough to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between
sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the following sleeve materials:
a.
b.
4.
Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or
other wet areas 2 inches above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings
below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring if ring is specified.
Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than NPS 6.
Steel Sheet Sleeves: For pipes NPS 6 and larger, penetrating gypsum-board
partitions.
Except for underground wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or
pipe insulation, using joint sealants appropriate for size, depth, and location of joint.
Refer to Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants" for materials and installation.
P.
Fire-Barrier Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings, and floors
at pipe penetrations. Seal pipe penetrations with firestop materials. Refer to Section 078413
"Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
Q.
Verify final equipment locations for roughing-in.
R.
Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections of these Specifications for roughing-in
requirements.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230500 - 6
3.3
PIPING JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Join pipe and fittings according to the following requirements and Division 23 Sections
specifying piping systems.
B.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
C.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
D.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
E.
Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," "Pipe and Tube"
Chapter, using copper-phosphorus brazing filler metal complying with AWS A5.8.
F.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
G.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12, using qualified processes and
welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
H.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
3.4
PIPING CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections according to the following, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
3.5
Install unions, in piping NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to each valve and at final connection
to each piece of equipment.
Install flanges, in piping NPS 2-1/2 and larger, adjacent to flanged valves and at final
connection to each piece of equipment.
Wet Piping Systems: Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping
materials of dissimilar metals.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION - COMMON REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install equipment to allow maximum possible headroom unless specific mounting heights are
not indicated.
B.
Install equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and
components in exposed interior spaces, unless otherwise indicated.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230500 - 7
C.
Install HVAC equipment to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of
components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference to other
installations. Extend grease fittings to accessible locations.
D.
Install equipment to allow right of way for piping installed at required slope.
3.6
PAINTING
A.
3.7
Damage and Touchup: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and
procedures to match original factory finish.
ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGES
A.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor HVAC materials and equipment.
B.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1.
3.8
GROUTING
A.
Mix and install grout for HVAC equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment
base plates, and anchors.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms as required for placement of grout.
D.
Avoid air entrapment during placement of grout.
E.
Place grout, completely filling equipment bases.
F.
Place grout on concrete bases and provide smooth bearing surface for equipment.
G.
Place grout around anchors.
H.
Cure placed grout.
**END OF SECTION 230500**
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230500 - 8
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 230513
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Section includes general requirements for single-phase and polyphase, general-purpose,
horizontal, small and medium, squirrel-cage induction motors for use on ac power systems up to
600 V and installed at equipment manufacturer's factory or shipped separately by equipment
manufacturer for field installation.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate features of motors, installed units, and accessory devices to be compatible with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Motor controllers.
Torque, speed, and horsepower requirements of the load.
Ratings and characteristics of supply circuit and required control sequence.
Ambient and environmental conditions of installation location.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
A.
Comply with NEMA MG 1 unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Comply with IEEE 841 for severe-duty motors.
2.2
MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS
A.
Duty: Continuous duty at ambient temperature of 40 deg C and at altitude of 3300 feet above
sea level.
B.
Capacity and Torque Characteristics: Sufficient to start, accelerate, and operate connected loads
at designated speeds, at installed altitude and environment, with indicated operating sequence,
and without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230513 - 1
2.3
POLYPHASE MOTORS
A.
Description: NEMA MG 1, Design B, medium induction motor.
B.
Efficiency: Energy efficient, as defined in NEMA MG 1.
C.
Service Factor: 1.15.
D.
Multispeed Motors: Variable torque.
1.
2.
For motors with 2:1 speed ratio, consequent pole, single winding.
For motors with other than 2:1 speed ratio, separate winding for each speed.
E.
Rotor: Random-wound, squirrel cage.
F.
Bearings: Regreasable, shielded, antifriction ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading.
G.
Temperature Rise: Match insulation rating.
H.
Insulation: Class F.
I.
Code Letter Designation:
1.
2.
Motors 15 HP and Larger: NEMA starting Code F or Code G.
Motors Smaller than 15 HP: Manufacturer's standard starting characteristic.
J.
Enclosure Material: Cast iron for motor frame sizes 324T and larger; rolled steel for motor
frame sizes smaller than 324T.
K.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
2.4
POLYPHASE MOTORS WITH ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Motors Used with Reduced-Voltage and Multispeed Controllers: Match wiring connection
requirements for controller with required motor leads. Provide terminals in motor terminal box,
suited to control method.
B.
Motors Used with Variable Frequency Controllers: Inverter-duty rated with characteristics and
features coordinated with and approved by controller manufacturer.
1.
2.
3.
Windings: Copper magnet wire with moisture-resistant insulation varnish, designed and
tested to resist transient spikes, high frequencies, and short time rise pulses produced by
pulse-width modulated inverters.
Inverter-Duty Motors:
Class F temperature rise; Class H insulation; meeting
requirements of NEMA MG 1, Part 31, Standard.
Thermal Protection: Comply with NEMA MG 1 requirements for thermally protected
motors.
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230513 - 2
4.
Bearing Protection: Provide factory-installed shaft grounding rings for motors used with
variable-frequency controllers for protection against electrical bearing damage. Field
install per manufacturer's recommendations for motors where factory-installed shaft
grounding rings are unavailable.
a.
C.
2.5
Product: AEGIS™; SGR Series.
Severe-Duty Motors: Comply with IEEE 841, with 1.15 minimum service factor.
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS
A.
Motors larger than 1/20 hp shall be one of the following, to suit starting torque and
requirements of specific motor application:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Permanent-split capacitor.
Split phase.
Capacitor start, inductor run.
Capacitor start, capacitor run.
B.
Multispeed Motors: Variable-torque, permanent-split-capacitor type.
C.
Bearings: Prelubricated, antifriction ball bearings or sleeve bearings suitable for radial and
thrust loading.
D.
Motors 1/20 HP and Smaller: Shaded-pole type.
E.
Thermal Protection: Internal protection to automatically open power supply circuit to motor
when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to temperature rating of motor
insulation. Thermal-protection device shall automatically reset when motor temperature returns
to normal range.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)
**END OF SECTION 230513**
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS
FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230513 - 3
SECTION 230519
METERS AND GAGES FOR HVAC PIPING
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
1.3
Test plugs.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TEST PLUGS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Sisco Manufacturing Company, Inc.
Trerice, H. O. Co.
Watts Regulator Co.; a div. of Watts Water Technologies, Inc.
Weiss Instruments, Inc.
B.
Description: Test-station fitting made for insertion into piping tee fitting.
C.
Body: Brass or stainless steel with core inserts and gasketed and threaded cap. Include
extended stem on units to be installed in insulated piping.
D.
Thread Size: NPS 1/4 or NPS 1/2, ASME B1.20.1 pipe thread.
E.
Minimum Pressure and Temperature Rating: 500 psig at 200 deg F.
F.
Core Inserts: Chlorosulfonated polyethylene synthetic or EPDM self-sealing rubber.
METERS AND GAGES
FOR HVAC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230519 - 1
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install test plugs in piping tees.
**END OF SECTION 230519**
METERS AND GAGES
FOR HVAC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230519 - 2
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 230523
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
FOR HVAC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Bronze ball valves.
Division 23 HVAC piping Sections for specialty valves applicable to those Sections only.
DEFINITIONS
A.
CWP: Cold working pressure.
B.
SWP: Steam working pressure.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For each type of valve indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations for Valves: Obtain each type of valve from single source from single
manufacturer.
B.
ASME Compliance:
1.
2.
3.
ASME B16.10 and ASME B16.34 for ferrous valve dimensions and design criteria.
ASME B31.1 for power piping valves.
ASME B31.9 for building services piping valves.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
FOR HVAC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230523 - 1
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Prepare valves for shipping as follows:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion.
Protect threads and weld ends.
Set ball valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces.
Use the following precautions during storage:
1.
2.
Maintain valve end protection.
Store valves indoors and maintain at higher than ambient dew point temperature. If
outdoor storage is necessary, store valves off the ground in watertight enclosures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVES
A.
Refer to HVAC valve schedule articles for applications of valves.
B.
Valve Pressure and Temperature Ratings: Not less than indicated and as required for system
pressures and temperatures.
C.
Valve Sizes: Same as upstream piping unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Valve Actuator Types:
1.
E.
Valves in Insulated Piping: With 2-inch stem extensions and the following features:
1.
F.
Ball Valves: With extended operating handle of non-thermal-conductive material, and
protective sleeve that allows operation of valve without breaking the vapor seal or
disturbing insulation.
Valve-End Connections:
1.
2.
2.2
Handlever: For quarter-turn valves NPS 6 and smaller.
Solder Joint: With sockets according to ASME B16.18.
Threaded: With threads according to ASME B1.20.1.
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Conbraco Industries, Inc.; Apollo Valves.
Hammond Valve.
Milwaukee Valve Company.
NIBCO INC.
Red-White Valve Corporation.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
FOR HVAC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230523 - 2
2.3
BRONZE BALL VALVES
A.
Two- or Three-Piece, Full- or Regular-Port, Bronze Ball Valves with Bronze Trim:
1.
Description:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
Standard: MSS SP-110.
SWP Rating: 150 psig.
CWP Rating: 600 psig.
Body Design: Two or three piece.
Body Material: Bronze.
Ends: Threaded.
Seats: PTFE or TFE.
Stem: Bronze.
Ball: Chrome-plated brass.
Port: Full or regular as indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion. Remove
special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and
handling.
B.
Operate valves in positions from fully open to fully closed. Examine guides and seats made
accessible by such operations.
C.
Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.
D.
Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.
3.2
VALVE INSTALLATION
A.
Install valves with unions at each piece of equipment arranged to allow service, maintenance,
and equipment removal without system shutdown.
B.
Locate valves for easy access and provide separate support where necessary.
C.
Install valves in horizontal piping with stem at or above center of pipe.
D.
Install valves in position to allow full stem movement.
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
FOR HVAC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230523 - 3
3.3
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
If valve applications are not indicated, use the following:
1.
2.
Shutoff Service: Ball (full port) valves.
Throttling Service except Steam: Ball (regular port) valves.
B.
If valves with specified SWP classes or CWP ratings are not available, the same types of valves
with higher SWP classes or CWP ratings may be substituted.
C.
Select valves with the following end connections:
1.
3.4
For Copper Tubing, NPS 2 and Smaller: Threaded ends except where solder-joint valveend option is indicated in valve schedules below.
HEATING-WATER VALVE SCHEDULE
A.
Pipe NPS 2 and Smaller:
1.
Ball Valves: Two or three piece, full or regular port, bronze with bronze trim.
a.
b.
Full port for shutoff service.
Regular port for throttling service.
**END OF SECTION 230523**
GENERAL-DUTY VALVES
FOR HVAC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230523 - 4
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 230529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Metal pipe hangers and supports.
Trapeze pipe hangers.
Metal framing systems.
Thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Fastener systems.
Equipment supports.
Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct hangers and supports.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
MSS: Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Design:
Design trapeze pipe hangers and equipment supports, including
comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance
requirements and design criteria indicated.
B.
Structural Performance: Hangers and supports for HVAC piping and equipment shall withstand
the effects of gravity loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according
to ASCE/SEI 7.
1.
2.
Design supports for multiple pipes, including pipe stands, capable of supporting
combined weight of supported systems, system contents, and test water.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of
supported equipment and connected systems and components.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230529 - 1
1.5
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Structural Steel Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Pipe Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and operators according to ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
METAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Carbon-Steel Pipe Hangers and Supports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Copper Pipe Hangers:
1.
2.
2.2
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, factory-fabricated components.
Galvanized Metallic Coatings: Pregalvanized or hot dipped.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Plastic coating, jacket, or liner.
Padded Hangers: Hanger with fiberglass or other pipe insulation pad or cushion to
support bearing surface of piping.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
Description: MSS SP-58, Types 1 through 58, copper-coated-steel, factory-fabricated
components.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of copper-coated steel.
TRAPEZE PIPE HANGERS
A.
2.3
Description: MSS SP-69, Type 59, shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made from
structural carbon-steel shapes with MSS SP-58 carbon-steel hanger rods, nuts, saddles, and Ubolts.
METAL FRAMING SYSTEMS
A.
Metal Framing Systems:
1.
2.
3.
Description: Shop- or field-fabricated pipe-support assembly made of steel channels,
accessories, fittings, and other components for supporting multiple parallel pipes.
Standard: Comply with MFMA-4.
Channels: Continuous slotted steel channel with in-turned lips.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230529 - 2
4.
5.
6.
2.4
Channel Nuts: Formed or stamped steel nuts or other devices designed to fit into channel
slot and, when tightened, prevent slipping along channel.
Hanger Rods: Continuous-thread rod, nuts, and washer made of carbon steel.
Coating: Zinc, paint, or PVC.
THERMAL-HANGER SHIELD INSERTS
A.
Insulation-Insert Material: Water-repellent treated, ASTM C 533, Type I calcium silicate with
100-psig, ASTM C 552, Type II cellular glass with 100-psig, or ASTM C 591, Type VI,
Grade 1 polyisocyanurate with 125-psig minimum compressive strength.
B.
For Trapeze or Clamped Systems: Insert and shield shall cover entire circumference of pipe.
C.
For Clevis Hangers: Insert and shield shall cover lower 180 degrees of pipe.
D.
Insert Length: Extend 2 inches beyond sheet metal shield.
2.5
FASTENER SYSTEMS
A.
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement concrete
with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building
materials where used.
B.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated or stainless-steel anchors, for
use in hardened portland cement concrete; with pull-out, tension, and shear capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
2.6
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
2.7
Description: Welded, shop- or field-fabricated equipment support made from structural carbonsteel shapes.
MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS
A.
Structural Steel:
galvanized.
B.
Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-mixed and -packaged, dry, hydraulic-cement, nonshrink and
nonmetallic grout; suitable for interior and exterior applications.
1.
2.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
Properties: Nonstaining, noncorrosive, and nongaseous.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230529 - 3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Metal Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Install hangers,
supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from the building
structure.
B.
Metal Trapeze Pipe-Hanger Installation: Comply with MSS SP-69 and MSS SP-89. Arrange
for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping, and support together on field-fabricated
trapeze pipe hangers.
1.
2.
3.
Pipes of Various Sizes: Support together and space trapezes for smallest pipe size or
install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified for individual pipe
hangers.
Field fabricate from ASTM A 36/A 36M, carbon-steel shapes selected for loads being
supported. Weld steel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
Do not rest pipe directly on base of trapeze.
C.
Metal Framing System Installation: Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of piping, and
support together on field-assembled metal framing systems.
D.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Installation: Install in pipe hanger or shield for insulated piping.
E.
Fastener System Installation:
1.
2.
Install powder-actuated fasteners for use in lightweight concrete or concrete slabs less
than 4 inches thick in concrete after concrete is placed and completely cured. Use
operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer. Install fasteners
according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual.
Install mechanical-expansion anchors in concrete after concrete is placed and completely
cured. Install fasteners according to manufacturer's written instructions.
F.
Install hangers and supports complete with necessary attachments, inserts, bolts, rods, nuts,
washers, and other accessories.
G.
Equipment Support Installation: Fabricate from welded-structural-steel shapes.
H.
Install hangers and supports to allow controlled thermal and seismic movement of piping
systems, to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate action of
expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.
I.
Install lateral bracing with pipe hangers and supports to prevent swaying.
J.
Install building attachments within concrete slabs or attach to structural steel. Install additional
attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, and strainers, NPS 2-1/2 and larger
and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed; fasten
inserts to forms and install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230529 - 4
K.
Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loads and stresses
from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.
L.
Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and to not exceed
maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services piping.
M.
Insulated Piping:
1.
Attach clamps and spacers to piping.
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 39, protection saddles on piping 2-1/2 inches and larger if
insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with insulation that
matches adjoining insulation.
Install MSS SP-58, Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier and on
piping 2 inches. Shields shall span an arc of 180 degrees.
Shield Dimensions for Pipe: Not less than the following:
a.
5.
6.
7.
3.2
Piping Operating above Ambient Air Temperature: Clamp may project through
insulation.
Piping Operating below Ambient Air Temperature: Use thermal-hanger shield
insert with clamp sized to match OD of insert.
Do not exceed pipe stress limits allowed by ASME B31.9 for building services
piping.
NPS 1/4 to NPS 3-1/2: 12 inches long and 0.048 inch thick.
Hot Pipes NPS 1-1/4 through NPS 2through: Include thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Cold Pipes NPS 1-1/4and Larger: Include thermal-hanger shield inserts.
Insert Material: 4 inches longer than length of protective shield. Insert thickness same as
adjoining insulation.
EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
A.
Fabricate structural-steel stands to suspend equipment from structure overhead or to support
equipment above floor.
B.
Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and make bearing surface smooth.
C.
Provide lateral bracing, to prevent swaying, for equipment supports.
3.3
METAL FABRICATIONS
A.
Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for trapeze pipe hangers and equipment
supports.
B.
Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field weld connections that cannot be
shop welded because of shipping size limitations.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230529 - 5
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M procedures for shielded, metal arc welding;
appearance and quality of welds; and methods used in correcting welding work; and with the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.4
Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion
resistance of base metals.
Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.
Remove welding flux immediately.
Finish welds at exposed connections so no roughness shows after finishing and so
contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.
ADJUSTING
A.
Hanger Adjustments: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve
indicated slope of pipe.
B.
Trim excess length of continuous-thread hanger and support rods to 1-1/2 inches.
3.5
PAINTING
A.
Touchup: Clean field welds and abraded areas of shop paint. Paint exposed areas immediately
after erecting hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for shop painting. Comply
with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces.
1.
B.
3.6
Apply paint by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0 mils.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
HANGER AND SUPPORT SCHEDULE
A.
Specific hanger and support requirements are in Sections specifying piping systems and
equipment.
B.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not specified in
piping system Sections.
C.
Use hangers and supports with galvanized metallic coatings for piping and equipment that will
not have field-applied finish.
D.
Use nonmetallic coatings on attachments for electrolytic protection where attachments are in
direct contact with copper tubing.
E.
Use carbon-steel pipe hangers and supports, metal trapeze pipe hangers, and metal framing
systems and attachments for general service applications.
F.
Use copper-plated pipe hangers and copper or stainless-steel attachments for copper piping and
tubing.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230529 - 6
G.
Use padded hangers for piping that is subject to scratching.
H.
Use thermal-hanger shield inserts for insulated piping and tubing.
I.
Horizontal-Piping Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in
piping system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Adjustable, Steel Clevis Hangers (MSS Type 1): For suspension of noninsulated or
insulated, stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Yoke-Type Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 2): For suspension of up to 1050 deg F, pipes
NPS 4 to NPS 24, requiring up to 4 inches of insulation.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel, Double-Bolt Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 3): For suspension of
pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 36, requiring clamp flexibility and up to 4 inches of insulation.
Steel Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 4): For suspension of cold and hot pipes NPS 1/2 to
NPS 24 if little or no insulation is required.
Pipe Hangers (MSS Type 5): For suspension of pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 4, to allow offcenter closure for hanger installation before pipe erection.
Adjustable, Swivel Split- or Solid-Ring Hangers (MSS Type 6): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/4 to NPS 8.
Adjustable, Steel Band Hangers (MSS Type 7): For suspension of noninsulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable Band Hangers (MSS Type 9): For suspension of noninsulated, stationary
pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Adjustable, Swivel-Ring Band Hangers (MSS Type 10): For suspension of noninsulated,
stationary pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 8.
Split Pipe Ring with or without Turnbuckle Hangers (MSS Type 11): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 8.
Extension Hinged or Two-Bolt Split Pipe Clamps (MSS Type 12): For suspension of
noninsulated, stationary pipes NPS 3/8 to NPS 3.
U-Bolts (MSS Type 24): For support of heavy pipes NPS 1/2 to NPS 30.
Clips (MSS Type 26): For support of insulated pipes not subject to expansion or
contraction.
Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 36): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with steelpipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate.
Pipe Stanchion Saddles (MSS Type 37): For support of pipes NPS 4 to NPS 36, with
steel-pipe base stanchion support and cast-iron floor flange or carbon-steel plate, and
with U-bolt to retain pipe.
Adjustable Pipe Saddle Supports (MSS Type 38): For stanchion-type support for pipes
NPS 2-1/2 to NPS 36 if vertical adjustment is required, with steel-pipe base stanchion
support and cast-iron floor flange.
Single-Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 41): For suspension of pipes NPS 1 to NPS 30, from two
rods if longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur.
Adjustable Roller Hangers (MSS Type 43): For suspension of pipes NPS 2-1/2 to
NPS 24, from single rod if horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction
might occur.
Complete Pipe Rolls (MSS Type 44): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 42 if
longitudinal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur but vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
Pipe Roll and Plate Units (MSS Type 45): For support of pipes NPS 2 to NPS 24 if small
horizontal movement caused by expansion and contraction might occur and vertical
adjustment is not necessary.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230529 - 7
21.
J.
Vertical-Piping Clamps: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
K.
Extension Pipe or Riser Clamps (MSS Type 8): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4 to
NPS 24.
Carbon- or Alloy-Steel Riser Clamps (MSS Type 42): For support of pipe risers NPS 3/4
to NPS 24 if longer ends are required for riser clamps.
Hanger-Rod Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
L.
Adjustable Pipe Roll and Base Units (MSS Type 46): For support of pipes NPS 2 to
NPS 30 if vertical and lateral adjustment during installation might be required in addition
to expansion and contraction.
Steel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 13): For adjustment up to 6 inches for heavy loads.
Steel Clevises (MSS Type 14): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Swivel Turnbuckles (MSS Type 15): For use with MSS Type 11, split pipe rings.
Malleable-Iron Sockets (MSS Type 16): For attaching hanger rods to various types of
building attachments.
Steel Weldless Eye Nuts (MSS Type 17): For 120 to 450 deg F piping installations.
Building Attachments: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Steel or Malleable Concrete Inserts (MSS Type 18): For upper attachment to suspend
pipe hangers from concrete ceiling.
Top-Beam C-Clamps (MSS Type 19) with Retaining Clip: For use under roof
installations with bar-joist construction, to attach to top flange of structural shape.
Side-Beam or Channel Clamps (MSS Type 20): For attaching to bottom flange of beams,
channels, or angles.
Center-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 21): For attaching to center of bottom flange of beams.
Welded Beam Attachments (MSS Type 22): For attaching to bottom of beams if loads
are considerable and rod sizes are large.
C-Clamps (MSS Type 23) with Retaining Clip: For structural shapes.
Top-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 25): For top of beams if hanger rod is required tangent to
flange edge.
Side-Beam Clamps (MSS Type 27): For bottom of steel I-beams.
Steel-Beam Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 28): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads.
Linked-Steel Clamps with Eye Nuts (MSS Type 29): For attaching to bottom of steel Ibeams for heavy loads, with link extensions.
Malleable-Beam Clamps with Extension Pieces (MSS Type 30): For attaching to
structural steel.
Welded-Steel Brackets: For support of pipes from below or for suspending from above
by using clip and rod. Use one of the following for indicated loads:
a.
b.
c.
Light (MSS Type 31): 750 lb.
Medium (MSS Type 32): 1500 lb.
Heavy (MSS Type 33): 3000 lb.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230529 - 8
13.
14.
15.
M.
Saddles and Shields: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping system
Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
N.
Side-Beam Brackets (MSS Type 34): For sides of steel or wooden beams.
Plate Lugs (MSS Type 57): For attaching to steel beams if flexibility at beam is required.
Horizontal Travelers (MSS Type 58): For supporting piping systems subject to linear
horizontal movement where headroom is limited.
Steel-Pipe-Covering Protection Saddles (MSS Type 39): To fill interior voids with
insulation that matches adjoining insulation.
Protection Shields (MSS Type 40): Of length recommended in writing by manufacturer
to prevent crushing insulation.
Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: For supporting insulated pipe.
Spring Hangers and Supports: Unless otherwise indicated and except as specified in piping
system Sections, install the following types:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Restraint-Control Devices (MSS Type 47): Where indicated to control piping movement.
Spring Cushions (MSS Type 48): For light loads if vertical movement does not exceed
1-1/4 inches.
Spring-Cushion Roll Hangers (MSS Type 49): For equipping Type 41, roll hanger with
springs.
Spring Sway Braces (MSS Type 50): To retard sway, shock, vibration, or thermal
expansion in piping systems.
Variable-Spring Hangers (MSS Type 51): Preset to indicated load and limit variability
factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from hanger.
Variable-Spring Base Supports (MSS Type 52): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from
base support.
Variable-Spring Trapeze Hangers (MSS Type 53): Preset to indicated load and limit
variability factor to 25 percent to allow expansion and contraction of piping system from
trapeze support.
Constant Supports: For critical piping stress and if necessary to avoid transfer of stress
from one support to another support, critical terminal, or connected equipment. Include
auxiliary stops for erection, hydrostatic test, and load-adjustment capability. These
supports include the following types:
a.
b.
c.
Horizontal (MSS Type 54): Mounted horizontally.
Vertical (MSS Type 55): Mounted vertically.
Trapeze (MSS Type 56): Two vertical-type supports and one trapeze member.
O.
Comply with MSS SP-69 for trapeze pipe-hanger selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
P.
Comply with MFMA-103 for metal framing system selections and applications that are not
specified in piping system Sections.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230529 - 9
Q.
Use powder-actuated fasteners or mechanical-expansion anchors instead of building
attachments where required in concrete construction.
**END OF SECTION 230529**
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230529 - 10
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 230553
IDENTIFICATION FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
1.3
Equipment labels.
Pipe labels.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with completion of covering and painting of
surfaces where devices are to be applied.
B.
Coordinate installation of identifying devices with locations of access panels and doors.
C.
Install identifying devices before installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT LABELS
A.
Metal Labels for Equipment:
1.
2.
3.
Material and Thickness: Brass, 0.032-inch; stainless steel, 0.025-inch; aluminum, 0.032inch; or anodized aluminum, 0.032-inch minimum thickness, and having predrilled or
stamped holes for attachment hardware.
Minimum Label Size: Length and width vary for required label content, but not less than
2-1/2 by 3/4 inch.
Minimum Letter Size: 1/4 inch for name of units if viewing distance is less than
24 inches, 1/2 inch for viewing distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger
IDENTIFICATION FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230553 - 1
4.
5.
lettering for greater viewing distances. Include secondary lettering two-thirds to threefourths the size of principal lettering.
Fasteners: Stainless-steel rivets or self-tapping screws.
Adhesive: Contact-type permanent adhesive, compatible with label and with substrate.
B.
Label Content: Include equipment's Drawing designation or unique equipment number,
Drawing numbers where equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the
Specification Section number and title where equipment is specified.
C.
Equipment Label Schedule: For each item of equipment to be labeled, on 8-1/2-by-11-inch
bond paper. Tabulate equipment identification number and identify Drawing numbers where
equipment is indicated (plans, details, and schedules), plus the Specification Section number
and title where equipment is specified. Equipment schedule shall be included in operation and
maintenance data.
2.2
PIPE LABELS
A.
General Requirements for Manufactured Pipe Labels: Preprinted, color-coded, with lettering
indicating service, and showing flow direction.
B.
Pretensioned Pipe Labels: Precoiled, semirigid plastic formed to partially cover circumference
of pipe and to attach to pipe without fasteners or adhesive.
C.
Self-Adhesive Pipe Labels: Printed plastic with contact-type, permanent-adhesive backing.
D.
Pipe Label Contents: Include identification of piping service using same designations or
abbreviations as used on Drawings, pipe size, and an arrow indicating flow direction.
1.
2.
Flow-Direction Arrows: Integral with piping system service lettering to accommodate
both directions, or as separate unit on each pipe label to indicate flow direction.
Lettering Size: At least 1-1/2 inches high.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
A.
3.2
Clean piping and equipment surfaces of substances that could impair bond of identification
devices, including dirt, oil, grease, release agents, and incompatible primers, paints, and
encapsulants.
EQUIPMENT LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Install or permanently fasten labels on each major item of mechanical equipment.
B.
Locate equipment labels where accessible and visible.
IDENTIFICATION FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230553 - 2
3.3
PIPE LABEL INSTALLATION
A.
Locate pipe labels where piping is exposed or above accessible ceilings in finished spaces;
machine rooms; accessible maintenance spaces such as shafts, tunnels, and plenums; and
exterior exposed locations as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
B.
Near each valve and control device.
Near each branch connection, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units.
Where flow pattern is not obvious, mark each pipe at branch.
Near penetrations through walls, floors, ceilings, and inaccessible enclosures.
At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed
piping.
Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.
Spaced at maximum intervals of 50 feet along each run. Reduce intervals to 25 feet in
areas of congested piping and equipment.
On piping above removable acoustical ceilings. Omit intermediately spaced labels.
Pipe Label Color Schedule:
1.
Heating Water Piping:
a.
b.
Background Color: Yellow.
Letter Color: Black.
**END OF SECTION 230553**
IDENTIFICATION FOR
HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230553 - 3
SECTION 230593
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
FOR HVAC
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes TAB to produce design objectives for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Air systems.
Hydronic piping systems.
Existing systems TAB.
Verifying that automatic control devices are functioning properly.
Reporting results of activities and procedures specified in this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
Adjust: To regulate fluid flow rate and air patterns at the terminal equipment, such as to reduce
fan speed or adjust a damper.
B.
Balance: To proportion flows within the distribution system, including submains, branches, and
terminals, according to indicated quantities.
C.
Barrier or Boundary: Construction, either vertical or horizontal, such as walls, floors, and
ceilings that are designed and constructed to restrict the movement of airflow, smoke, odors,
and other pollutants.
D.
Draft: A current of air, when referring to localized effect caused by one or more factors of high
air velocity, low ambient temperature, or direction of airflow, whereby more heat is withdrawn
from a person's skin than is normally dissipated.
E.
Procedure: An approach to and execution of a sequence of work operations to yield repeatable
results.
F.
Report Forms: Test data sheets for recording test data in logical order.
G.
Static Head: The pressure due to the weight of the fluid above the point of measurement. In a
closed system, static head is equal on both sides of the pump.
H.
Suction Head: The height of fluid surface above the centerline of the pump on the suction side.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 1
I.
System Effect: A phenomenon that can create undesired or unpredicted conditions that cause
reduced capacities in all or part of a system.
J.
System Effect Factors: Allowances used to calculate a reduction of the performance ratings of a
fan when installed under conditions different from those presented when the fan was
performance tested.
K.
TAB: Testing, adjusting, and balancing.
L.
Terminal: A point where the controlled medium, such as fluid or energy, enters or leaves the
distribution system.
M.
Test: A procedure to determine quantitative performance of systems or equipment.
N.
Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing (TAB) Firm: The entity responsible for performing and
reporting TAB procedures.
1.4
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: Submit two copies of evidence that TAB firm and this Project's TAB team
members meet the qualifications specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
B.
Contract Documents Examination Report: Submit two copies of the Contract Documents
review report as specified in Part 3.
C.
Strategies and Procedures Plan: Submit two copies of TAB strategies and step-by-step
procedures as specified in Part 3 "Preparation" Article. Include a complete set of report forms
intended for use on this Project.
D.
Certified TAB Reports: Submit two copies of reports prepared, as specified in this Section, on
approved forms certified by TAB firm.
E.
Warranties specified in this Section.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
TAB Firm Qualifications: Engage a TAB firm certified by either AABC or NEBB.
B.
TAB Conference: Meet with Owner's and Architect's representatives on approval of TAB
strategies and procedures plan to develop a mutual understanding of the details. Ensure the
participation of TAB team members, equipment manufacturers' authorized service
representatives, HVAC controls installers, and other support personnel. Provide seven days'
advance notice of scheduled meeting time and location.
1.
Agenda Items: Include at least the following:
a.
b.
c.
Submittal distribution requirements.
The Contract Documents examination report.
TAB plan.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 2
d.
e.
f.
C.
Work schedule and Project-site access requirements.
Coordination and cooperation of trades and subcontractors.
Coordination of documentation and communication flow.
Certification of TAB Reports: Certify TAB field data reports. This certification includes the
following:
1.
2.
Review field data reports to validate accuracy of data and to prepare certified TAB
reports.
Certify that TAB team complied with approved TAB plan and the procedures specified
and referenced in this Specification.
D.
TAB Report Forms: Use standard forms from AABC's "National Standards for Testing and
Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural
Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems."
E.
Instrumentation Type, Quantity, and Accuracy: As described in AABC's "National Standards
for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems and NEBB's
"Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Environmental Systems,"
Section II, "Required Instrumentation for NEBB Certification."
F.
Instrumentation Calibration: Calibrate instruments at least every six months or more frequently
if required by instrument manufacturer.
1.
1.6
Keep an updated record of instrument calibration that indicates date of calibration and the
name of party performing instrument calibration.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
1.7
Partial Owner Occupancy: Owner may occupy completed areas of building before Substantial
Completion. Cooperate with Owner during TAB operations to minimize conflicts with Owner's
operations.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate the efforts of factory-authorized service representatives for systems and equipment,
HVAC controls installers, and other mechanics to operate HVAC systems and equipment to
support and assist TAB activities.
B.
Notice: Provide seven days' advance notice for each test. Include scheduled test dates and
times.
C.
Perform TAB after leakage and pressure tests on air and water distribution systems have been
satisfactorily completed.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 3
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Special Guarantee: Provide a guarantee on AABC or NEBB forms stating that either AABC or
NEBB will assist in completing requirements of the Contract Documents if TAB firm fails to
comply with the Contract Documents. Guarantee shall include the following provisions:
1.
2.
The certified TAB firm has tested and balanced systems according to the Contract
Documents.
Systems are balanced to optimum performance capabilities within design and installation
limits.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine the Contract Documents to become familiar with Project requirements and to discover
conditions in systems' designs that may preclude proper TAB of systems and equipment.
B.
Examine approved submittal data of HVAC systems and equipment.
C.
Examine design data, including HVAC system descriptions, statements of design assumptions
for environmental conditions and systems' output, and statements of philosophies and
assumptions about HVAC system and equipment controls.
D.
Examine equipment performance data including fan and pump curves. Relate performance data
to Project conditions and requirements, including system effects that can create undesired or
unpredicted conditions that cause reduced capacities in all or part of a system. Calculate system
effect factors to reduce performance ratings of HVAC equipment when installed under
conditions different from those presented when the equipment was performance tested at the
factory. To calculate system effects for air systems, use tables and charts found in AMCA 201,
"Fans and Systems," Sections 7 through 10; or in SMACNA's "HVAC Systems--Duct Design,"
Sections 5 and 6. Compare this data with the design data and installed conditions.
E.
Examine system and equipment installations to verify that they are complete and that testing,
cleaning, adjusting, and commissioning specified in individual Sections have been performed.
F.
Examine system and equipment test reports.
G.
Examine HVAC system and equipment installations to verify that indicated balancing devices,
such as test ports, gage cocks, thermometer wells, flow-control devices, balancing valves and
fittings, and manual volume dampers, are properly installed, and that their locations are
accessible and appropriate for effective balancing and for efficient system and equipment
operation.
H.
Examine systems for functional deficiencies that cannot be corrected by adjusting and
balancing.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 4
I.
Examine HVAC equipment to ensure that clean filters have been installed, bearings are greased,
belts are aligned and tight, and equipment with functioning controls is ready for operation.
J.
Examine terminal units, such as variable-air-volume boxes, to verify that they are accessible
and their controls are connected and functioning.
K.
Examine plenum used for supply air to verify that they are airtight.
penetrations and other holes are sealed.
L.
Examine strainers for clean screens and proper perforations.
M.
Examine three-way valves for proper installation for their intended function of diverting or
mixing fluid flows.
N.
Examine heat-transfer coils for correct piping connections and for clean and straight fins.
O.
Examine system pumps to ensure absence of entrained air in the suction piping.
P.
Examine equipment for installation and for properly operating safety interlocks and controls.
Q.
Examine automatic temperature system components to verify the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
R.
3.2
Verify that pipe
Dampers, valves, and other controlled devices are operated by the intended controller.
Dampers and valves are in the position indicated by the controller.
Integrity of valves and dampers for free and full operation and for tightness of fully
closed and fully open positions. This includes dampers in multizone units, mixing boxes,
and variable-air-volume terminals.
Automatic modulating and shutoff valves, including two-way valves and three-way
mixing and diverting valves, are properly connected.
Thermostats and humidistats are located to avoid adverse effects of sunlight, drafts, and
cold walls.
Sensors are located to sense only the intended conditions.
Sequence of operation for control modes is according to the Contract Documents.
Controller set points are set at indicated values.
Interlocked systems are operating.
Changeover from heating to cooling mode occurs according to indicated values.
Report deficiencies discovered before and during performance of TAB procedures. Observe
and record system reactions to changes in conditions. Record default set points if different from
indicated values.
PREPARATION
A.
Prepare a TAB plan that includes strategies and step-by-step procedures.
B.
Complete system readiness checks and prepare system readiness reports. Verify the following:
1.
2.
3.
Permanent electrical power wiring is complete.
Hydronic systems are filled, clean, and free of air.
Automatic temperature-control systems are operational.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 5
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
3.3
Equipment and duct access doors are securely closed.
Balance, smoke, and fire dampers are open.
Isolating and balancing valves are open and control valves are operational.
Ceilings are installed in critical areas where air-pattern adjustments are required and
access to balancing devices is provided.
Windows and doors can be closed so indicated conditions for system operations can be
met.
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR TESTING AND BALANCING
A.
Perform testing and balancing procedures on each system according to the procedures contained
in AABC's "National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating, and Air
Conditioning Systems" or NEBB's "Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
of Environmental Systems" and this Section.
B.
Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to the
minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After testing and
balancing, close probe holes and patch insulation with new materials identical to those removed.
Restore vapor barrier and finish according to insulation Specifications for this Project.
C.
Mark equipment and balancing device settings with paint or other suitable, permanent
identification material, including damper-control positions, valve position indicators, fan-speedcontrol levers, and similar controls and devices, to show final settings.
D.
Take and report testing and balancing measurements in inch-pound (IP) units.
3.4
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR BALANCING AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports for both fans and outlets. Obtain manufacturer's outlet factors and
recommended testing procedures. Crosscheck the summation of required outlet volumes with
required fan volumes.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" duct layouts.
C.
For variable-air-volume systems, develop a plan to simulate diversity.
D.
Determine the best locations in main and branch ducts for accurate duct airflow measurements.
E.
Check airflow patterns from the outside-air louvers and dampers and the return- and exhaust-air
dampers, through the supply-fan discharge and mixing dampers.
F.
Locate start-stop and disconnect switches, electrical interlocks, and motor starters.
G.
Verify that motor starters are equipped with properly sized thermal protection.
H.
Check dampers for proper position to achieve desired airflow path.
I.
Check for airflow blockages.
J.
Check for proper sealing of air-handling unit components.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 6
K.
3.5
Check for proper sealing of air duct system.
PROCEDURES FOR CONSTANT-VOLUME AIR SYSTEMS
A.
Adjust fans to deliver total indicated airflows within the maximum allowable fan speed listed by
fan manufacturer.
1.
Measure fan static pressures to determine actual static pressure as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Measure static pressure across each component that makes up an air-handling unit,
rooftop unit, and other air-handling and -treating equipment.
a.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Measure outlet static pressure as far downstream from the fan as practicable and
upstream from restrictions in ducts such as elbows and transitions.
Measure static pressure directly at the fan outlet or through the flexible connection.
Measure inlet static pressure of single-inlet fans in the inlet duct as near the fan as
possible, upstream from flexible connection and downstream from duct
restrictions.
Measure inlet static pressure of double-inlet fans through the wall of the plenum
that houses the fan.
Simulate dirty filter operation and record the point at which maintenance personnel
must change filters.
Measure static pressures entering and leaving other devices such as sound traps, heat
recovery equipment, and air washers, under final balanced conditions.
Compare design data with installed conditions to determine variations in design static
pressures versus actual static pressures. Compare actual system effect factors with
calculated system effect factors to identify where variations occur. Recommend
corrective action to align design and actual conditions.
Make required adjustments to pulley sizes to accommodate fan-speed changes.
Do not make fan-speed adjustments that result in motor overload. Consult equipment
manufacturers about fan-speed safety factors. Modulate dampers and measure fan-motor
amperage to ensure that no overload will occur. Measure amperage in full cooling, full
heating, economizer, and any other operating modes to determine the maximum required
brake horsepower.
Adjust volume dampers for main duct, submain ducts, and major branch ducts to indicated
airflows within specified tolerances.
1.
Measure static pressure at a point downstream from the balancing damper and adjust
volume dampers until the proper static pressure is achieved.
a.
2.
Where sufficient space in submain and branch ducts is unavailable for Pitot-tube
traverse measurements, measure airflow at terminal outlets and inlets and calculate
the total airflow for that zone.
Remeasure each submain and branch duct after all have been adjusted. Continue to
adjust submain and branch ducts to indicated airflows within specified tolerances.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 7
C.
Measure terminal outlets and inlets without making adjustments.
1.
D.
Adjust terminal outlets and inlets for each space to indicated airflows within specified
tolerances of indicated values. Make adjustments using volume dampers rather than extractors
and the dampers at air terminals.
1.
2.
3.6
Measure terminal outlets using a direct-reading hood or outlet manufacturer's written
instructions and calculating factors.
Adjust each outlet in same room or space to within specified tolerances of indicated
quantities without generating noise levels above the limitations prescribed by the
Contract Documents.
Adjust patterns of adjustable outlets for proper distribution without drafts.
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-AIR-VOLUME SYSTEMS
A.
Compensating for Diversity: When the total airflow of all terminal units is more than the
indicated airflow of the fan, place a selected number of terminal units at a maximum set-point
airflow condition until the total airflow of the terminal units equals the indicated airflow of the
fan. Select the reduced airflow terminal units so they are distributed evenly among the branch
ducts.
B.
Pressure-Independent, Variable-Air-Volume Systems: After the fan systems have been
adjusted, adjust the variable-air-volume systems as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Set outside-air dampers at minimum, and return- and exhaust-air dampers at a position
that simulates full-cooling load.
Select the terminal unit that is most critical to the supply-fan airflow and static pressure.
Measure static pressure. Adjust system static pressure so the entering static pressure for
the critical terminal unit is not less than the sum of terminal-unit manufacturer's
recommended minimum inlet static pressure plus the static pressure needed to overcome
terminal-unit discharge system losses.
Measure total system airflow. Adjust to within indicated airflow.
Set terminal units at maximum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed maximum airflow. Use terminal-unit manufacturer's written instructions to
make this adjustment. When total airflow is correct, balance the air outlets downstream
from terminal units as described for constant-volume air systems.
Set terminal units at minimum airflow and adjust controller or regulator to deliver the
designed minimum airflow. Check air outlets for a proportional reduction in airflow as
described for constant-volume air systems.
a.
6.
7.
8.
If air outlets are out of balance at minimum airflow, report the condition but leave
outlets balanced for maximum airflow.
Remeasure the return airflow to the fan while operating at maximum return airflow and
minimum outside airflow. Adjust the fan and balance the return-air ducts and inlets as
described for constant-volume air systems.
Measure static pressure at the most critical terminal unit and adjust the static-pressure
controller at the main supply-air sensing station to ensure that adequate static pressure is
maintained at the most critical unit.
Record the final fan performance data.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 8
3.7
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
Prepare test reports with pertinent design data and number in sequence starting at main to end of
system.
B.
Prepare schematic diagrams of systems' "as-built" piping layouts.
C.
Prepare hydronic systems for testing and balancing according to the following, in addition to the
general preparation procedures specified above:
1.
2.
3.
3.8
Open all manual valves for maximum flow.
Set system controls so automatic valves are wide open to heat exchangers.
Check air vents for a forceful liquid flow exiting from vents when manually operated.
PROCEDURES FOR HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
Set calibrated balancing valves, if installed, at calculated presettings.
B.
Measure flow at all stations and adjust, where necessary, to obtain first balance.
1.
System components that have Cv rating or an accurately cataloged flow-pressure-drop
relationship may be used as a flow-indicating device.
C.
Measure flow at main balancing station and set main balancing device to achieve flow that is 5
percent greater than indicated flow.
D.
Adjust balancing stations to within specified tolerances of indicated flow rate as follows:
1.
2.
3.
3.9
Determine the balancing station with the highest percentage over indicated flow.
Adjust each station in turn, beginning with the station with the highest percentage over
indicated flow and proceeding to the station with lowest percentage over indicated flow.
Record settings and mark balancing devices.
PROCEDURES FOR VARIABLE-FLOW HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
A.
3.10
A.
Balance systems with automatic 2- and 3-way control valves by setting systems at maximum
flow through heat-exchange terminals and proceed as specified above for hydronic systems.
PROCEDURES FOR MOTORS
Motors, 1/2 HP and Larger: Test at final balanced conditions and record the following data:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Manufacturer, model, and serial numbers.
Motor horsepower rating.
Motor rpm.
Efficiency rating.
Nameplate and measured voltage, each phase.
Nameplate and measured amperage, each phase.
Starter thermal-protection-element rating.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 9
3.11
A.
PROCEDURES FOR HEAT-TRANSFER COILS
Water Coils: Measure the following data for each coil:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.12
A.
PROCEDURES FOR TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING EXISTING SYSTEMS
Perform a preconstruction inspection of existing equipment that is to remain and be reused.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Measure and record the operating speed, airflow, and static pressure of each fan.
Measure motor voltage and amperage. Compare the values to motor nameplate
information.
Check the condition of filters.
Check the condition of coils.
Check bearings and other lubricated parts for proper lubrication.
Report on the operating condition of the equipment and the results of the measurements
taken. Report deficiencies.
Before performing testing and balancing of existing systems, inspect existing equipment that is
to remain and be reused to verify that existing equipment has been cleaned and refurbished.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Entering- and leaving-water temperature.
Water flow rate.
Water pressure drop.
Dry-bulb temperature of entering and leaving air.
Airflow.
Air pressure drop.
New filters are installed.
Coils are clean and fins combed.
Fans are clean.
Bearings and other parts are properly lubricated.
Deficiencies noted in the preconstruction report are corrected.
Perform testing and balancing of existing systems to the extent that existing systems are
affected by the renovation work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Compare the indicated airflow of the renovated work to the measured fan airflows and
determine the new fan, speed, filter, and coil face velocity.
Verify that the indicated airflows of the renovated work result in filter and coil face
velocities and fan speeds that are within the acceptable limits defined by equipment
manufacturer.
If calculations increase or decrease the airflow and water flow rates by more than 5
percent, make equipment adjustments to achieve the calculated airflow and water flow
rates. If 5 percent or less, equipment adjustments are not required.
Air balance each air outlet.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 10
3.13
A.
TOLERANCES
Set HVAC system airflow and water flow rates within the following tolerances:
1.
2.
3.
3.14
Supply, Return, and Exhaust Fans and Equipment with Fans: 0 to plus 10 percent.
Air Outlets and Inlets: Plus or minus 10 percent.
Heating-Water Flow Rate: Plus or minus 10 percent.
REPORTING
A.
Initial Construction-Phase Report: Based on examination of the Contract Documents as
specified in "Examination" Article, prepare a report on the adequacy of design for systems'
balancing devices. Recommend changes and additions to systems' balancing devices to
facilitate proper performance measuring and balancing. Recommend changes and additions to
HVAC systems and general construction to allow access for performance measuring and
balancing devices.
B.
Status Reports: As Work progresses, prepare reports to describe completed procedures,
procedures in progress, and scheduled procedures. Include a list of deficiencies and problems
found in systems being tested and balanced. Prepare a separate report for each system and each
building floor for systems serving multiple floors.
3.15
FINAL REPORT
A.
General: Typewritten, or computer printout in letter-quality font, on standard bond paper, in
three-ring binder, tabulated and divided into sections by tested and balanced systems.
B.
Include a certification sheet in front of binder signed and sealed by the certified testing and
balancing engineer.
1.
C.
Final Report Contents: In addition to certified field report data, include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Include a list of instruments used for procedures, along with proof of calibration.
Fan curves.
Manufacturers' test data.
Field test reports prepared by system and equipment installers.
Other information relative to equipment performance, but do not include Shop Drawings
and Product Data.
General Report Data: In addition to form titles and entries, include the following data in the
final report, as applicable:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Title page.
Name and address of TAB firm.
Project name.
Project location.
Architect's name and address.
Engineer's name and address.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 11
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Contractor's name and address.
Report date.
Signature of TAB firm who certifies the report.
Table of Contents with the total number of pages defined for each section of the report.
Number each page in the report.
Summary of contents including the following:
a.
b.
c.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Nomenclature sheets for each item of equipment.
Data for terminal units, including manufacturer, type size, and fittings.
Notes to explain why certain final data in the body of reports varies from indicated
values.
Test conditions for fans and pump performance forms including the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
E.
Settings for outside-, return-, and exhaust-air dampers.
Conditions of filters.
Cooling coil, wet- and dry-bulb conditions.
Face and bypass damper settings at coils.
Fan drive settings including settings and percentage of maximum pitch diameter.
Inlet vane settings for variable-air-volume systems.
Settings for supply-air, static-pressure controller.
Other system operating conditions that affect performance.
System Diagrams: Include schematic layouts of air and hydronic distribution systems. Present
each system with single-line diagram and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
F.
Indicated versus final performance.
Notable characteristics of systems.
Description of system operation sequence.
Quantities of outside, supply, return, and exhaust airflows.
Water and steam flow rates.
Duct, outlet, and inlet sizes.
Pipe and valve sizes and locations.
Terminal units.
Balancing stations.
Position of balancing devices.
Fan Test Reports: For supply, return, and exhaust fans, include the following:
1.
Fan Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
System identification.
Location.
Make and type.
Model number and size.
Manufacturer's serial number.
Arrangement and class.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 12
2.
Motor Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
3.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
G.
Total airflow rate in cfm.
Total system static pressure in inches wg.
Fan rpm.
Discharge static pressure in inches wg.
Suction static pressure in inches wg.
Round, Flat-Oval, and Rectangular Duct Traverse Reports: Include a diagram with a grid
representing the duct cross-section and record the following:
1.
Report Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
H.
Make and frame type and size.
Horsepower and rpm.
Volts, phase, and hertz.
Full-load amperage and service factor.
Sheave make, size in inches, and bore.
Sheave dimensions, center-to-center, and amount of adjustments in inches.
Number of belts, make, and size.
System and air-handling unit number.
Location and zone.
Traverse air temperature in deg F.
Duct static pressure in inches wg.
Duct size in inches.
Duct area in sq. ft.
Indicated airflow rate in cfm.
Indicated velocity in fpm.
Actual airflow rate in cfm.
Actual average velocity in fpm.
Barometric pressure in psig.
Air-Terminal-Device Reports:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
System and air-handling unit identification.
Location and zone.
Test apparatus used.
Area served.
Air-terminal-device make.
Air-terminal-device number from system diagram.
Air-terminal-device type and model number.
Air-terminal-device size.
Air-terminal-device effective area in sq. ft.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 13
2.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
I.
System-Coil Reports: For reheat coils and water coils of terminal units, include the following:
1.
Unit Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
Report Data:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
A.
Airflow rate in cfm.
Entering-water temperature in deg F.
Leaving-water temperature in deg F.
Water pressure drop in feet of head or psig.
Entering-air temperature in deg F.
Leaving-air temperature in deg F.
Instrument Calibration Reports:
1.
3.16
System and air-handling unit identification.
Location and zone.
Room or riser served.
Coil make and size.
Flowmeter type.
Test Data (Indicated and Actual Values):
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
J.
Airflow rate in cfm.
Air velocity in fpm.
Preliminary airflow rate as needed in cfm.
Preliminary velocity as needed in fpm.
Final airflow rate in cfm.
Final velocity in fpm.
Space temperature in deg F.
Instrument type and make.
Serial number.
Application.
Dates of use.
Dates of calibration.
INSPECTIONS
Initial Inspection:
1.
2.
After testing and balancing are complete, operate each system and randomly check
measurements to verify that the system is operating according to the final test and balance
readings documented in the Final Report.
Randomly check the following for each system:
a.
b.
Measure airflow of at least 10 percent of air outlets.
Measure water flow of at least 5 percent of terminals.
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 14
c.
d.
e.
B.
Final Inspection:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
3.17
Measure room temperature at each thermostat/temperature sensor. Compare the
reading to the set point.
Verify that balancing devices are marked with final balance position.
Note deviations to the Contract Documents in the Final Report.
After initial inspection is complete and evidence by random checks verifies that testing
and balancing are complete and accurately documented in the final report, request that a
final inspection be made by Owner or Owners representative.
TAB firm test and balance engineer shall conduct the inspection in the presence of Owner
or Owners representative.
Owner or Owners representative shall randomly select measurements documented in the
final report to be rechecked. The rechecking shall be limited to either 10 percent of the
total measurements recorded, or the extent of measurements that can be accomplished in
a normal 8-hour business day.
If the rechecks yield measurements that differ from the measurements documented in the
final report by more than the tolerances allowed, the measurements shall be noted as
"FAILED."
If the number of "FAILED" measurements is greater than 10 percent of the total
measurements checked during the final inspection, the testing and balancing shall be
considered incomplete and shall be rejected.
TAB firm shall recheck all measurements and make adjustments. Revise the final report
and balancing device settings to include all changes and resubmit the final report.
Request a second final inspection. If the second final inspection also fails, Owner shall
contract the services of another TAB firm to complete the testing and balancing in
accordance with the Contract Documents and deduct the cost of the services from the
final payment.
ADDITIONAL TESTS
A.
Within 90 days of completing TAB, perform additional testing and balancing to verify that
balanced conditions are being maintained throughout and to correct unusual conditions.
B.
Seasonal Periods: If initial TAB procedures were not performed during near-peak summer and
winter conditions, perform additional testing, inspecting, and adjusting during near-peak
summer and winter conditions.
**END OF SECTION 230593**
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230593 - 15
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 230713
DUCT INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following duct services:
1.
2.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Indoor, concealed supply air.
Indoor, concealed exhaust air within 10 feet of building exterior wall.
Section 230719 "HVAC Piping Insulation."
Section 233113 "Metal Ducts" for duct liners.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory- and field-applied if any).
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes,
and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
1.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
DUCT INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230713 - 1
2.
1.6
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
COORDINATION
A.
1.8
Coordinate clearance requirements with duct Installer for duct insulation application. Establish
and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied jackets and
finishes and for space required for maintenance.
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin
on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Duct Insulation Schedule, General" and "Indoor Duct and
Plenum Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 553, Type II and ASTM C 1290, Type III with factory-applied FSK
jacket. Factory-applied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
DUCT INSULATION
CertainTeed Corp.; SoftTouch Duct Wrap.
Johns Manville; Microlite.
Knauf Insulation; Friendly Feel Duct Wrap.
Owens Corning; SOFTR All-Service Duct Wrap.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230713 - 2
2.2
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
C.
FSK Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation
jacket lap seams and joints.
2.3
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
B.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below ambient services.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.4
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry
film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
Color: White.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight.
Color: White.
SEALANTS
A.
FSK Jacket Flashing Sealants:
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.5
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: Aluminum.
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
FSK Jacket: Aluminum-foil, fiberglass-reinforced scrim with kraft-paper backing;
complying with ASTM C 1136, Type II.
DUCT INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230713 - 3
2.6
TAPES
A.
FSK Tape: Foil-face, vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive;
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.7
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 6.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
FSK Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of FSK tape.
SECUREMENTS
A.
Bands:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015
inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept
metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
Insulation Pins and Hangers:
1.
Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully annealed for
capacitor-discharge welding, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
2.
Cupped-Head, Capacitor-Discharge-Weld Pins: Copper- or zinc-coated steel pin, fully
annealed for capacitor-discharge welding, length to suit depth of insulation indicated with
integral 1-1/2-inch galvanized carbon-steel washer.
3.
Metal, Adhesively Attached, Perforated-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to
projecting spindle that is capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in
position indicated when self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following
requirements:
a.
b.
c.
DUCT INSULATION
Baseplate: Perforated, galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches
square.
Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
Adhesive: Recommended by hanger manufacturer. Product with demonstrated
capability to bond insulation hanger securely to substrates indicated without
damaging insulation, hangers, and substrates.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230713 - 4
4.
Self-Sticking-Base Insulation Hangers: Baseplate welded to projecting spindle that is
capable of holding insulation, of thickness indicated, securely in position indicated when
self-locking washer is in place. Comply with the following requirements:
a.
b.
c.
5.
Insulation-Retaining Washers: Self-locking washers formed from 0.016-inch-thick,
galvanized-steel sheet, with beveled edge sized as required to hold insulation securely in
place but not less than 1-1/2 inches in diameter.
a.
C.
Baseplate: Galvanized carbon-steel sheet, 0.030 inch thick by 2 inches square.
Spindle: Copper- or zinc-coated, low-carbon steel, fully annealed, 0.106-inchdiameter shank, length to suit depth of insulation indicated.
Adhesive-backed base with a peel-off protective cover.
Protect ends with capped self-locking washers incorporating a spring steel insert to
ensure permanent retention of cap in exposed locations.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
3.3
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of ducts and fittings.
B.
Install insulation materials, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required for
each item of duct system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
DUCT INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230713 - 5
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
F.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
G.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
H.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
I.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
J.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
K.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Clean and dry surface to receive
self-sealing lap. Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a.
4.
5.
For below ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to duct flanges and fittings.
L.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
M.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
N.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
DUCT INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230713 - 6
3.4
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
B.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations: Terminate insulation at
fire damper sleeves for fire-rated wall and partition penetrations. Externally insulate damper
sleeves to match adjacent insulation and overlap duct insulation at least 2 inches.
3.5
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A.
Blanket Insulation Installation on Ducts and Plenums: Secure with adhesive and insulation
pins.
1.
2.
3.
Apply adhesives according to manufacturer's recommended coverage rates per unit area,
for 100 percent coverage of duct and plenum surfaces.
Apply adhesive to entire circumference of ducts and to all surfaces of fittings and
transitions.
Install either capacitor-discharge-weld pins and speed washers or cupped-head, capacitordischarge-weld pins on sides and bottom of horizontal ducts and sides of vertical ducts as
follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
4.
On duct sides with dimensions 18 inches and smaller, place pins along longitudinal
centerline of duct. Space 3 inches maximum from insulation end joints, and 16
inches o.c.
On duct sides with dimensions larger than 18 inches, place pins 16 inches o.c. each
way, and 3 inches maximum from insulation joints. Install additional pins to hold
insulation tightly against surface at cross bracing.
Pins may be omitted from top surface of horizontal, rectangular ducts and plenums.
Do not overcompress insulation during installation.
Impale insulation over pins and attach speed washers.
Cut excess portion of pins extending beyond speed washers or bend parallel with
insulation surface. Cover exposed pins and washers with tape matching insulation
facing.
For ducts and plenums with surface temperatures below ambient, install a continuous
unbroken vapor barrier. Create a facing lap for longitudinal seams and end joints with
insulation by removing 2 inches from one edge and one end of insulation segment.
Secure laps to adjacent insulation section with 1/2-inch outward-clinching staples, 1 inch
o.c. Install vapor barrier consisting of factory- or field-applied jacket, adhesive, vaporbarrier mastic, and sealant at joints, seams, and protrusions.
a.
b.
DUCT INSULATION
Repair punctures, tears, and penetrations with tape or mastic to maintain vaporbarrier seal.
Install vapor stops for ductwork and plenums operating below 50 deg F at 18-foot
intervals. Vapor stops shall consist of vapor-barrier mastic applied in a Z-shaped
pattern over insulation face, along butt end of insulation, and over the surface.
Cover insulation face and surface to be insulated a width equal to two times the
insulation thickness, but not less than 3 inches.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230713 - 7
5.
6.
7.
3.6
Overlap unfaced blankets a minimum of 2 inches on longitudinal seams and end joints.
At end joints, secure with steel bands spaced a maximum of 18 inches o.c.
Install insulation on rectangular duct elbows and transitions with a full insulation section
for each surface. Install insulation on round and flat-oval duct elbows with individually
mitered gores cut to fit the elbow.
Insulate duct stiffeners, hangers, and flanges that protrude beyond insulation surface with
6-inch-wide strips of same material used to insulate duct. Secure on alternating sides of
stiffener, hanger, and flange with pins spaced 6 inches o.c.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
C.
3.7
Inspect ductwork, randomly selected by Architect, by removing field-applied jacket and
insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent of inspection shall be
limited to two location(s) for each duct system defined in the "Duct Insulation Schedule,
General" Article.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
DUCT INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Plenums and Ducts Requiring Insulation:
1.
2.
B.
Indoor, concealed supply air (including primary air at or below a design supply air
temperature of 60 deg F).
Indoor, concealed exhaust air within 10 feet of building exterior wall.
Items Not Insulated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Fibrous-glass ducts.
Metal ducts with duct liner of sufficient thickness to comply with energy code and
ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
Factory-insulated flexible ducts.
Factory-insulated plenums and casings.
Flexible connectors.
Vibration-control devices.
Factory-insulated access panels and doors.
DUCT INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230713 - 8
3.8
INDOOR DUCT AND PLENUM INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Insulation materials and thicknesses are identified below. If more than one material is listed for
a duct system, selection from materials listed is Contractor's option.
B.
Concealed, supply-air duct (including primary air at or below a design supply air temperature of
60 deg F) insulation shall be the following:
1.
C.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 1-1/2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
Concealed, exhaust-air duct and plenum insulation within 10 feet of building exterior wall shall
be the following:
1.
Mineral-Fiber Blanket: 2 inches thick and 0.75-lb/cu. ft. nominal density.
**END OF SECTION 230713**
DUCT INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230713 - 9
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 230719
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section includes insulating the following HVAC piping systems:
1.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Heating hot-water piping.
Section 230713 "Duct Insulation."
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include thermal conductivity, water-vapor
permeance thickness, and jackets (both factory and field applied if any).
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Skilled mechanics who have successfully completed an apprenticeship
program or another craft training program certified by the Department of Labor, Bureau of
Apprenticeship and Training.
B.
Surface-Burning Characteristics: For insulation and related materials, as determined by testing
identical products according to ASTM E 84, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to
authorities having jurisdiction. Factory label insulation and jacket materials and adhesive,
mastic, tapes, and cement material containers, with appropriate markings of applicable testing
agency.
1.
2.
Insulation Installed Indoors: Flame-spread index of 25 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 50 or less.
Insulation Installed Outdoors: Flame-spread index of 75 or less, and smoke-developed
index of 150 or less.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230719 - 1
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Packaging: Insulation material containers shall be marked by manufacturer with appropriate
ASTM standard designation, type and grade, and maximum use temperature.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate sizes and locations of supports, hangers, and insulation shields specified in
Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
B.
Coordinate clearance requirements with piping Installer for piping insulation application.
Establish and maintain clearance requirements for installation of insulation and field-applied
jackets and finishes and for space required for maintenance.
1.8
SCHEDULING
A.
Schedule insulation application after pressure testing systems. Insulation application may begin
on segments that have satisfactory test results.
B.
Complete installation and concealment of plastic materials as rapidly as possible in each area of
construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
INSULATION MATERIALS
A.
Comply with requirements in "Piping Insulation Schedule, General," and "Indoor Piping
Insulation Schedule" articles for where insulating materials shall be applied.
B.
Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
C.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe Insulation:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
2.2
Johns Manville; Micro-Lok.
Knauf Insulation; 1000-Degree Pipe Insulation.
Owens Corning; Fiberglas Pipe Insulation.
Type I, 850 deg F Materials: Mineral or glass fibers bonded with a thermosetting resin.
Comply with ASTM C 547, Type I, Grade A, with factory-applied ASJ-SSL. Factoryapplied jacket requirements are specified in "Factory-Applied Jackets" Article.
INSULATING CEMENTS
A.
Mineral-Fiber Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 195.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230719 - 2
B.
Expanded or Exfoliated Vermiculite Insulating Cement: Comply with ASTM C 196.
C.
Mineral-Fiber, Hydraulic-Setting Insulating and Finishing Cement: Comply with ASTM C 449.
2.3
ADHESIVES
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates and for bonding
insulation to itself and to surfaces to be insulated unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Mineral-Fiber Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A.
1.
C.
ASJ Jacket Adhesive: Comply with MIL-A-3316C, Class 2, Grade A for bonding insulation
jacket lap seams and joints.
1.
2.4
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
MASTICS
A.
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates; comply with
MIL-PRF-19565C, Type II.
1.
B.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM E 96/E 96M, Procedure B, 0.013 perm at 43-mil dry
film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 58 percent by volume and 70 percent by weight.
Color: White.
Vapor-Barrier Mastic: Solvent based; suitable for indoor use on below-ambient services.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
For indoor applications, use mastics that have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 0.05 perm at 35-mil dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: 0 to 180 deg F.
Solids Content: ASTM D 1644, 44 percent by volume and 62 percent by weight.
Color: White.
Breather Mastic: Water based; suitable for indoor and outdoor use on above-ambient services.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Water-Vapor Permeance: ASTM F 1249, 1.8 perms at 0.0625-inch dry film thickness.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 180 deg F.
Solids Content: 60 percent by volume and 66 percent by weight.
Color: White.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230719 - 3
2.5
SEALANTS
A.
Joint Sealants:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
ASJ Flashing Sealants:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.6
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Permanently flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 100 to plus 300 deg F.
Color: White or gray.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Materials shall be compatible with insulation materials, jackets, and substrates.
Fire- and water-resistant, flexible, elastomeric sealant.
Service Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 250 deg F.
Color: White.
For indoor applications, sealants shall have a VOC content of 420 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
FACTORY-APPLIED JACKETS
A.
Insulation system schedules indicate factory-applied jackets on various applications. When
factory-applied jackets are indicated, comply with the following:
1.
2.7
ASJ-SSL: ASJ with self-sealing, pressure-sensitive, acrylic-based adhesive covered by a
removable protective strip; complying with ASTM C 1136, Type I.
FIELD-APPLIED FABRIC-REINFORCING MESH
A.
Woven Glass-Fiber Fabric: Approximately 2 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. in. for covering pipe and pipe fittings.
B.
Woven Polyester Fabric: Approximately 1 oz./sq. yd. with a thread count of 10 strands by 10
strands/sq. in., in a Leno weave, for pipe.
2.8
TAPES
A.
ASJ Tape: White vapor-retarder tape matching factory-applied jacket with acrylic adhesive,
complying with ASTM C 1136.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Width: 3 inches.
Thickness: 11.5 mils.
Adhesion: 90 ounces force/inch in width.
Elongation: 2 percent.
Tensile Strength: 40 lbf/inch in width.
ASJ Tape Disks and Squares: Precut disks or squares of ASJ tape.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230719 - 4
2.9
SECUREMENTS
A.
Bands:
1.
2.
3.
Stainless Steel: ASTM A 167 or ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304 or Type 316; 0.015
inch thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
Aluminum: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, 3005, 3105, or 5005; Temper H-14, 0.020 inch
thick, 1/2 inch wide with wing seal or closed seal.
Springs: Twin spring set constructed of stainless steel with ends flat and slotted to accept
metal bands. Spring size determined by manufacturer for application.
B.
Staples: Outward-clinching insulation staples, nominal 3/4-inch-wide, stainless steel or Monel.
C.
Wire: 0.062-inch soft-annealed, stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances
and other conditions affecting performance of insulation application.
1.
2.
3.
3.2
Verify that systems to be insulated have been tested and are free of defects.
Verify that surfaces to be insulated are clean and dry.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
PREPARATION
A.
Surface Preparation: Clean and dry surfaces to receive insulation. Remove materials that will
adversely affect insulation application.
B.
Mix insulating cements with clean potable water.
3.3
GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A.
Install insulation materials, accessories, and finishes with smooth, straight, and even surfaces;
free of voids throughout the length of piping including fittings, valves, and specialties.
B.
Install insulation materials, forms, vapor barriers or retarders, jackets, and thicknesses required
for each item of pipe system as specified in insulation system schedules.
C.
Install accessories compatible with insulation materials and suitable for the service. Install
accessories that do not corrode, soften, or otherwise attack insulation or jacket in either wet or
dry state.
D.
Install insulation with longitudinal seams at top and bottom of horizontal runs.
E.
Install multiple layers of insulation with longitudinal and end seams staggered.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230719 - 5
F.
Do not weld brackets, clips, or other attachment devices to piping, fittings, and specialties.
G.
Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing.
H.
Install insulation with tight longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond seams and joints with
adhesive recommended by insulation material manufacturer.
I.
Install insulation with least number of joints practical.
J.
Where vapor barrier is indicated, seal joints, seams, and penetrations in insulation at hangers,
supports, anchors, and other projections with vapor-barrier mastic.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Install insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments.
For insulation application where vapor barriers are indicated, extend insulation on anchor
legs from point of attachment to supported item to point of attachment to structure. Taper
and seal ends at attachment to structure with vapor-barrier mastic.
Install insert materials and install insulation to tightly join the insert. Seal insulation to
insulation inserts with adhesive or sealing compound recommended by insulation
material manufacturer.
Cover inserts with jacket material matching adjacent pipe insulation. Install shields over
jacket, arranged to protect jacket from tear or puncture by hanger, support, and shield.
K.
Apply adhesives, mastics, and sealants at manufacturer's recommended coverage rate and wet
and dry film thicknesses.
L.
Install insulation with factory-applied jackets as follows:
1.
2.
3.
Draw jacket tight and smooth.
Cover circumferential joints with 3-inch-wide strips, of same material as insulation
jacket. Secure strips with adhesive and outward clinching staples along both edges of
strip, spaced 4 inches o.c.
Overlap jacket longitudinal seams at least 1-1/2 inches. Install insulation with
longitudinal seams at bottom of pipe. Clean and dry surface to receive self-sealing lap.
Staple laps with outward clinching staples along edge at 2 inches o.c.
a.
4.
5.
For below-ambient services, apply vapor-barrier mastic over staples.
Cover joints and seams with tape, according to insulation material manufacturer's written
instructions, to maintain vapor seal.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, apply vapor-barrier mastic on seams and joints and at
ends adjacent to pipe flanges and fittings.
M.
Cut insulation in a manner to avoid compressing insulation more than 75 percent of its nominal
thickness.
N.
Finish installation with systems at operating conditions. Repair joint separations and cracking
due to thermal movement.
O.
Repair damaged insulation facings by applying same facing material over damaged areas.
Extend patches at least 4 inches beyond damaged areas. Adhere, staple, and seal patches similar
to butt joints.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230719 - 6
P.
For above-ambient services, do not install insulation to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
3.4
Vibration-control devices.
Testing agency labels and stamps.
Nameplates and data plates.
Manholes.
Handholes.
Cleanouts.
PENETRATIONS
A.
Insulation Installation at Interior Wall and Partition Penetrations (That Are Not Fire Rated):
Install insulation continuously through walls and partitions.
B.
Insulation Installation at Fire-Rated Wall and Partition Penetrations:
continuously through penetrations of fire-rated walls and partitions.
3.5
Install insulation
GENERAL PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION
A.
Requirements in this article generally apply to all insulation materials except where more
specific requirements are specified in various pipe insulation material installation articles.
B.
Insulation Installation on Fittings, Valves, Strainers, Flanges, and Unions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Install insulation over fittings, valves, strainers, flanges, unions, and other specialties with
continuous thermal and vapor-retarder integrity unless otherwise indicated.
Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from
same material and density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly
against adjoining piece and bonded with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular
surfaces with insulating cement finished to a smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is
uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.
Insulate tee fittings with preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Cut sectional pipe insulation to fit. Butt
each section closely to the next and hold in place with tie wire. Bond pieces with
adhesive.
Insulate valves using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. For valves, insulate up to and including the bonnets,
valve stuffing-box studs, bolts, and nuts. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with
insulating cement.
Insulate strainers using preformed fitting insulation or sectional pipe insulation of same
material, density, and thickness as used for adjacent pipe. Overlap adjoining pipe
insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe insulation, or one pipe
diameter, whichever is thicker. Fill joints, seams, and irregular surfaces with insulating
cement. Insulate strainers so strainer basket flange or plug can be easily removed and
replaced without damaging the insulation and jacket. Provide a removable reusable
insulation cover. For below-ambient services, provide a design that maintains vapor
barrier.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230719 - 7
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
3.6
Insulate flanges and unions using a section of oversized preformed pipe insulation.
Overlap adjoining pipe insulation by not less than two times the thickness of pipe
insulation, or one pipe diameter, whichever is thicker.
Cover segmented insulated surfaces with a layer of finishing cement and coat with a
mastic. Install vapor-barrier mastic for below-ambient services and a breather mastic for
above-ambient services. Reinforce the mastic with fabric-reinforcing mesh. Trowel the
mastic to a smooth and well-shaped contour.
For services not specified to receive a field-applied jacket except for flexible elastomeric
and polyolefin, install fitted PVC cover over elbows, tees, strainers, valves, flanges, and
unions. Terminate ends with PVC end caps. Tape PVC covers to adjoining insulation
facing using PVC tape.
Stencil or label the outside insulation jacket of each union with the word "union." Match
size and color of pipe labels.
Insulate instrument connections for thermometers, pressure gages, pressure temperature taps,
test connections, flow meters, sensors, switches, and transmitters on insulated pipes. Shape
insulation at these connections by tapering it to and around the connection with insulating
cement and finish with finishing cement, mastic, and flashing sealant.
INSTALLATION OF MINERAL-FIBER INSULATION
A.
Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Flanges:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Secure each layer of preformed pipe insulation to pipe with wire or bands and tighten
bands without deforming insulation materials.
Where vapor barriers are indicated, seal longitudinal seams, end joints, and protrusions
with vapor-barrier mastic and joint sealant.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on above-ambient surfaces, secure laps with
outward-clinched staples at 6 inches o.c.
For insulation with factory-applied jackets on below-ambient surfaces, do not staple
longitudinal tabs. Instead, secure tabs with additional adhesive as recommended by
insulation material manufacturer and seal with vapor-barrier mastic and flashing sealant.
Install preformed pipe insulation to outer diameter of pipe flange.
Make width of insulation section same as overall width of flange and bolts, plus twice the
thickness of pipe insulation.
Fill voids between inner circumference of flange insulation and outer circumference of
adjacent straight pipe segments with mineral-fiber blanket insulation.
Install jacket material with manufacturer's recommended adhesive, overlap seams at least
1 inch, and seal joints with flashing sealant.
Insulation Installation on Pipe Fittings and Elbows:
1.
2.
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
When preformed insulation elbows and fittings are not available, install mitered sections
of pipe insulation, to a thickness equal to adjoining pipe insulation. Secure insulation
materials with wire or bands.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230719 - 8
D.
Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.7
Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe insulation when
available.
When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe insulation to
valve body.
Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation without
disturbing insulation.
Install insulation to flanges as specified for flange insulation application.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform tests and inspections.
B.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
C.
3.8
Inspect pipe, fittings, strainers, and valves, randomly selected by Architect, by removing
field-applied jacket and insulation in layers in reverse order of their installation. Extent
of inspection shall be limited to three locations of straight pipe, three locations of
threaded fittings, three locations of welded fittings, two locations of threaded strainers,
two locations of welded strainers, three locations of threaded valves, and three locations
of flanged valves for each pipe service defined in the "Piping Insulation Schedule,
General" Article.
All insulation applications will be considered defective Work if sample inspection reveals
noncompliance with requirements.
PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE, GENERAL
A.
Acceptable preformed pipe and tubular insulation materials and thicknesses are identified for
each piping system and pipe size range.
B.
Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated, do not install insulation on the following:
1.
2.
3.
3.9
Drainage piping located in crawl spaces.
Underground piping.
Chrome-plated pipes and fittings unless there is a potential for personnel injury.
INDOOR PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULE
A.
Heating-Hot-Water Supply and Return, 250 Deg F and Below:
1.
NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 1-1/2 inches thick.
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230719 - 9
2.
NPS 2 and Larger: Insulation shall be the following:
a.
Mineral-Fiber, Preformed Pipe, Type I: 2 inches thick.
**END OF SECTION 230719**
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230719 - 10
SECTION 230900
INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes control equipment for HVAC systems and components, including control
components for terminal heating and cooling units not supplied with factory-wired controls.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Section 230993 "Sequence of Operations for HVAC Controls" for requirements that
relate to this Section.
DEFINITIONS
A.
DDC: Direct digital control.
B.
I/O: Input/output.
C.
MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.
D.
PC: Personal computer.
E.
PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.
F.
RTD: Resistance temperature detector.
1.4
SCOPE OF WORK
A.
Furnish and install all equipment, accessories, wiring and instrument piping required for a
complete and functional direct digital control (DDC) system designed as an integrated extension
of the existing web-based facility management and control system. The new control system
shall be fully controlled and monitored using the existing Invensys software system and web
browser graphical interface. Graphic screens for new equipment and control systems shall
appear similar in configuration and content with existing graphics.
B.
The instrumentation and control for HVAC work shall consist of the provision of all labor,
materials, tools, equipment, software, software licenses, software configurations and database
entries, interfaces, wiring, tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation,
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230900 - 1
submittals, testing, commissioning, training services, permits and licenses, transportation,
shipping, handling, administration, supervision, management, insurance, temporary protection,
cleaning, cutting and patching, warranties, services, and items are required for the complete,
fully functional and commissioned HVAC control system.
C.
All hardware materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly
manufactured for this and/or other systems and shall not be custom designed especially for this
Project. All components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use.
D.
Provide a complete, neat and workmanlike installation. Use only manufacturer's employees
who are skilled, experienced, trained, and familiar with the specific equipment, software,
standards and configurations to be provided for this Project.
E.
Manage and coordinate the HVAC control work in a timely manner in consideration of the
Project schedules. Coordinate with the associated work of other trades so as to not impede or
delay the work of associated trades. Provide a controls construction manager who shall be on
site a minimum of 8 hours per week during construction and shall attend all job conferences.
F.
Provide necessary power from electrical power source to each controller and end device
including circuit breakers, wiring, conduit, disconnect switches and transformers as required.
G.
Provide communications connections by means of open protocols only. The use of proprietary
software drivers is not acceptable for this project.
H.
Provide instrumentation and control for the following new and existing equipment:
1.
2.
1.5
Air distribution system components including variable air volume terminals and fans.
Integration of existing variable volume air handling units and air terminal units serving
the office areas including controls and instrumentation for operating modes and
economizer operation.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
A.
Comply with the following performance requirements:
1.
2.
3.
Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds,
but selected consistent with mechanical process under control.
Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute DDC PID control loops, and scan
and update process values and outputs at least once per second.
Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured
variables within tolerances as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Space Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.
Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus 1 deg F.
Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 deg F.
Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230900 - 2
1.6
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include manufacturer's technical literature for each control device. Indicate
dimensions, capacities, performance characteristics, electrical characteristics, finishes for
materials, and installation and startup instructions for each type of product indicated.
1.
2.
3.
B.
DDC System Hardware: Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer,
and model number. Include technical data for control units, transducers/transmitters,
sensors, actuators, valves, relays/switches, control panels, and operator interface
equipment.
Control System Software: Include technical data for operating system software, operator
interface, color graphics, and other third-party applications.
Controlled Systems:
Instrumentation list with element name, type of device,
manufacturer, model number, and product data. Include written description of sequence
of operation including schematic diagram.
Shop Drawings: Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required
clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field
connection.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Bill of materials of equipment indicating quantity, manufacturer, and model number.
Schematic flow diagrams showing fans, pumps, coils, dampers, valves, and control
devices.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
Schedule of dampers including size, leakage, and flow characteristics.
Schedule of valves including flow characteristics.
DDC System Hardware:
a.
b.
7.
8.
Control System Software: List of color graphics indicating monitored systems, data
(connected and calculated) point addresses, output schedule, and operator notations.
Controlled Systems:
a.
b.
c.
1.7
Wiring diagrams for control units with termination numbers.
Schematic diagrams for control, communication, and power wiring, showing trunk
data conductors and wiring between operator workstation and control unit
locations.
Schematic diagrams of each controlled system with control points labeled and
control elements graphically shown, with wiring.
Written description of sequence of operation including schematic diagram.
Points list.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.
B.
Software Upgrade Kit: For Owner to use in modifying software to suit future systems revisions
or monitoring and control revisions.
C.
Field quality-control test reports.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230900 - 3
1.8
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For HVAC instrumentation and control system to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Software and Firmware Operational Documentation: Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
1.9
Maintenance instructions and lists of spare parts for each type of control device and
compressed-air station.
Interconnection wiring diagrams with identified and numbered system components and
devices.
Keyboard illustrations and step-by-step procedures indexed for each operator function.
Inspection period, cleaning methods, cleaning materials recommended, and calibration
tolerances.
Calibration records and list of set points.
Software operating and upgrade manuals.
Program Software Backup: On a magnetic media or compact disc, complete with data
files.
Device address list.
Printout of software application and graphic screens.
Software license required by and installed for DDC workstations and control systems.
Project Record Documents: Revise Shop Drawings to reflect actual installation and operating
sequences.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative
who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Comply with ASHRAE 135 for DDC system components.
1.10
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this Section are indicated to
be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping of control devices to equipment
manufacturer.
B.
System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.
1.11
A.
COORDINATION
Coordinate location of thermostats, humidistats, and other exposed control sensors with plans
and room details before installation.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230900 - 4
B.
1.12
A.
Coordinate supply of conditioned electrical branch circuits for control units and operator
workstation.
WARRANTY
Standard Material and Labor Warranty:
instrumentation and controls for HVAC.
1.
2.
Provide a one-year material warranty on the
If within twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance of product, upon written notice
from the Owner, any portion of the HVAC control system is found to be defective in
operation, workmanship or materials, it shall be repaired or replaced at no cost to the
Owner.
Maintain an adequate supply of materials within 100 miles of the Project site for timely
replacement of key parts and labor support, including programming.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
1.
2.
2.2
Invensys Building Systems, Inc.
No substitutions.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
The HVAC instrumentation and control system shall provide temperature control of multiple
comfort zones, monitor zone temperature and set-points, and automatically change airflow
requirements to satisfy zone temperature.
B.
The control system shall consist of sensors, indicators, actuators, final control elements,
interface equipment, other apparatus, and accessories to control mechanical systems.
C.
The control system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and
functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, controllers and operator devices, while
re-using existing controls equipment.
D.
Control system design shall eliminate dependence upon any single device for alarm reporting
and control execution.
1.
2.
The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the
execution of control strategies at other operational devices.
The system shall maintain all settings and overrides through a system reboot.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230900 - 5
2.3
DDC EQUIPMENT
A.
VAV Control Units: Modular, comprising processor board with electronically programmable,
nonvolatile, random-access memory; configurable, read-only memory; integral differential
pressure transducer and damper actuator.
1.
2.
Units monitor and control pressure-independent, variable air volume terminal units; and
download from and upload to portable diagnostic terminal unit.
Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions
include the following:
a.
b.
c.
3.
B.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power.
Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second.
Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or
resistance signals.
Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally
open or normally closed operation.
Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current
(4 to 20 mA).
Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point,
floating-type electronic actuators.
Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.
Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit
connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current
and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Plenum rated plastic housing.
I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect
points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers.
1.
2.
3.
C.
Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O.
Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points.
Factory programmed adaptive tuning algorithm that senses changes and
automatically adjusts tuning parameters.
Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak.
Combined 1 percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50
percent load changes.
Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent
overload for at least 3 seconds without failure.
Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for
workstations or controllers with the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V.
Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds.
Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB.
Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230900 - 6
2.4
CONTROL PANELS
A.
Local Control Panels: Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting,
located adjacent to each system under automatic control. Provide common keying for all
panels.
1.
2.5
Fabricate panels of 0.06-inch-thick, furniture-quality steel, or extruded-aluminum alloy,
totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with manufacturer's standard
shop-painted finish.
SENSORS
A.
Electronic Sensors: Vibration and corrosion resistant; for wall, immersion, or duct mounting as
required.
1.
Thermistor temperature sensors as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.5 deg F at calibration point.
Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point; use where not affected by temperature
stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.
Averaging Elements in Ducts: Use where prone to temperature stratification or
where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required.
Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of
2-1/2 inches.
Room Sensors: Microprocessor-based with plug-in communication jack.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
g.
2.
Digital display of zone and outdoor-air temperature, setpoints, operating
mode, and airflow.
Multiple access level.
Occupant space temperature setpoint adjustment; limited by programming to
plus or minus 2 degrees or as directed by Owner.
Pushbutton for programmable timed override of unoccupied cycle.
Insulating base for sensors located on exterior walls.
Locking, heavy-duty, transparent plastic space sensor guards for sensors.
Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
Resistance Temperature Detectors: Platinum.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
Accuracy: Plus or minus 0.2 percent at calibration point.
Wire: Twisted, shielded-pair cable.
Insertion Elements in Ducts: Single point; use where not affected by temperature
stratification or where ducts are smaller than 9 sq. ft.
Averaging Elements in Ducts: Use where prone to temperature stratification or
where ducts are larger than 9 sq. ft.; length as required.
Insertion Elements for Liquids: Brass socket with minimum insertion length of
2-1/2 inches.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230900 - 7
f.
Room Sensors: Microprocessor based with plug-in communication jack.
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
g.
3.
c.
B.
2.
2.6
Accuracy: 2 percent of full scale with repeatability of 0.5 percent.
Output: 4 to 20 mA.
Building Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 0.25 inch wg.
Duct Static-Pressure Range: 0 to 5 inches wg.
Pressure Transmitters: Direct acting for gas, liquid, or steam service; range suitable for
system; proportional output 4 to 20 mA.
Equipment operation sensors as follows:
1.
C.
Accuracy: 5 percent full range with linear output.
Room Sensors: With locking cover matching room thermostats, span of 25 to 90
percent relative humidity.
Duct and Outside-Air Sensors: With element guard and mounting plate, range of 0
to 100 percent relative humidity.
Static-Pressure Transmitter: Nondirectional sensor with suitable range for expected
input, and temperature compensated.
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
Outside-Air Sensors: Watertight inlet fitting, shielded from direct sunlight.
Humidity Sensors: Bulk polymer sensor element.
a.
b.
4.
Digital display of zone and outdoor-air temperature, setpoints, operating
mode, and airflow.
Multiple access level.
Occupant space temperature setpoint adjustment; limited by programming to
plus or minus 2 degrees or as directed by Owner.
Pushbutton for programmable timed override of unoccupied cycle.
Insulating base for sensors located on exterior walls.
Locking, heavy-duty, transparent plastic space sensor guards for sensors.
Status Inputs for Fans: Differential-pressure switch with adjustable range of 0 to 5 inches
wg.
Status Inputs for Electric Motors: Current-sensing relay with current transformers,
adjustable and set to 175 percent of rated motor current.
Electronic Valve/Damper Position Indication: Visual scale indicating percent of travel and 2- to
10-V dc, feedback signal.
ACTUATORS
A.
Electric Motors: Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements
for HVAC Equipment." Size to operate with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth
modulating action or two-position action.
1.
Permanent Split-Capacitor or Shaded-Pole Type: Gear trains completely oil immersed
and sealed. Equip spring-return motors with integral spiral-spring mechanism in
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230900 - 8
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
housings designed for easy removal for service or adjustment of limit switches, auxiliary
switches, or feedback potentiometer.
Nonspring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running torque of
150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
Spring-Return Motors for Valves Larger Than NPS 2-1/2: Size for running and
breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.
Nonspring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running torque
of 150 in. x lbf and breakaway torque of 300 in. x lbf.
Spring-Return Motors for Dampers Larger Than 25 Sq. Ft.: Size for running and
breakaway torque of 150 in. x lbf.
Electronic Damper or Large-Valve Actuators: Direct-coupled type designed for minimum
60,000 full-stroke cycles at rated torque.
1.
2.
Valves: Size for torque required for valve close-off at maximum pump differential
pressure.
Dampers: Size for running torque calculated as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
2.7
Parallel-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 7 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper.
Opposed-Blade Damper with Edge Seals: 5 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper.
Parallel-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 4 inch-pounds/sq. ft of damper.
Opposed-Blade Damper without Edge Seals: 3 inch-pounds/sq. ft. of damper.
Dampers with 2 to 3 Inches wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 1000 to
2500 FPM: Multiply the minimum full-stroke cycles above by 1.5.
Dampers with 3 to 4 Inches wg of Pressure Drop or Face Velocities of 2500 to
3000 FPM: Multiply the minimum full-stroke cycles above by 2.0.
Coupling: V-bolt and V-shaped, toothed cradle.
Overload Protection: Electronic overload or digital rotation-sensing circuitry.
Fail-Safe Operation: Mechanical, spring-return mechanism. Provide external, manual
gear release on non-spring-return actuators.
Power Requirements (Two-Position Spring Return): 24 or 120-V ac.
Power Requirements (Modulating): Maximum 10 VA at 24-V ac or 8 W at 24-V dc.
Proportional Signal: 2- to 10-V dc or 4 to 20 mA, and 2- to 10-V dc position feedback
signal.
Temperature Rating: 40 to 104 deg F.
CONTROL VALVES
A.
Terminal Unit Control Valves NPS 2 and Smaller for Hydronic Valves: Bronze body, bronze
trim, two- or three-port as indicated, replaceable plugs and seats, union and threaded ends.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Internal Construction: Replaceable plugs and seats of brass or bronze for temperatures
below 210 deg F and stainless steel for temperatures 210 deg F and above.
Sizing for Two-Position Water Flow Control: Line size, to close against pump shutoff
head.
Sizing for Modulating Water Flow Control: As indicated with a 2-psig minimum
pressure drop at design flow rate, to close against pump shutoff head.
Flow Characteristics: Two-way valves shall have equal percentage characteristics; threeway valves shall have linear characteristics.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230900 - 9
2.8
CONTROL CABLE
A.
Electronic and fiber-optic cables for control wiring shall be size, type, and quantity of
conductors as required by the equipment supplier.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Verify that conditioned power supply is available to control units.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install software in control units and operator workstation. Implement all features of programs
to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.
B.
Connect and configure equipment and software to achieve sequence of operation specified.
C.
Verify location of thermostats, temperature sensors, humidity sensors, and other exposed
control sensors with plans and room details before installation. Locate all adjustable
thermostats and sensors 46 inches above finished floor and non-adjustable thermostats and
sensors 60 inches above the floor, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
D.
Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.
Install guards on thermostats in the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Entrances.
Public areas.
Large meeting rooms.
Where indicated.
E.
Install labels and nameplates to identify control components according to Section 230553
"Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment."
F.
Install hydronic instrument wells, valves, and other accessories according to Section 232113
"Hydronic Piping."
3.3
ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION
A.
Provide all power wiring from electrical panels, including breakers, as required for a complete
and operational control system.
B.
Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for
Electrical Systems."
C.
Install building wire and cable according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230900 - 10
D.
Furnish signal and communication cable and install according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are
exposed.
Install exposed cable of any voltage in raceway.
Install concealed cable greater than 24V ac in raceway.
Concealed cable at 24V ac or less, or at 24V dc, shall be plenum rated or non-plenum
rated, as required for application.
Bundle and harness multi-conductor instrument cable in place of single cables where
several cables follow a common path.
Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against
abrasion. Tie and support conductors.
Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control
system, except local individual room control cables.
E.
Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions.
F.
Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is
in hand position.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service:
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to
inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including
connections. Report results in writing.
B.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest.
Test and adjust controls and safeties.
Test calibration of electronic controllers by disconnecting input sensors and stimulating
operation with compatible signal generator.
Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control
set points are as required.
Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence
of operation. Adjust PID actions.
Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation.
Test software and hardware interlocks.
DDC Verification:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Check instruments for proper location and accessibility.
Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth,
and other applicable considerations.
Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements.
Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230900 - 11
5.
Check DDC system as follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
D.
3.5
Verify that DDC controller power supply is from emergency generator power
supply, if applicable.
Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and
approved tagging system.
Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided.
Verify that DDC controllers are protected from power supply surges.
Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.
ADJUSTING
A.
Calibrating and Adjusting:
1.
2.
3.
Calibrate instruments.
Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and
instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument
being calibrated.
Control System Inputs and Outputs:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
Pressure:
a.
b.
5.
b.
7.
8.
9.
B.
Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.
Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential
set at minimum.
Temperature:
a.
6.
Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span.
Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output.
Check digital inputs using jumper wire.
Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking.
Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a
precision-resistant source.
Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span
using a precision-resistance source.
Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts.
Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the
manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and
closed.
Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's
recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed.
Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system.
Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of
instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.
Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230900 - 12
C.
3.6
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to
three visits to Project during other than normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain HVAC instrumentation and controls.
**END OF SECTION 230900**
INSTRUMENTATION AND
CONTROL FOR HVAC
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230900 - 13
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 230993
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
FOR HVAC CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes control sequences for HVAC systems, subsystems, and equipment.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" for control equipment and
devices and for submittal requirements.
DEFINITIONS
A.
DDC: Direct digital control.
B.
VAV: Variable air volume.
1.4
REHEAT VAV BOXES
A.
Operating Schedule: Index the unit to the occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, or cool-down cycle
in accordance with its associated air handling unit.
B.
Occupied Cycle - Outdoor air temperature greater than 65 deg F:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
On a rise in space temperature, modulate the unit air supply to the space open to the
cooling maximum.
On a fall in space temperature, modulate the unit air supply to the space closed to the
cooling minimum.
Set the cooling maximum and minimum setpoints as indicated on the Drawings.
Set the heating maximum and minimum setpoints equal to the cooling minimum.
Occupied Cycle - Outdoor air temperature less than 65 deg F:
1.
2.
On a rise in space temperature, modulate the unit air supply to the space open to the
cooling maximum.
On a fall in space temperature, modulate the unit air supply to the space closed to the
cooling minimum.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
FOR HVAC CONTROLS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230993 - 1
3.
4.
5.
On a continued fall in space temperature, modulate the unit reheat coil control valve to
maintain the space temperature heating setpoint.
Set the cooling maximum setpoint as indicated on the Drawings. Set the cooling
minimum setting equal to the heating minimum setting.
Set the heating maximum and minimum setpoints as indicated on the Drawings.
D.
Unoccupied Cycle: Index the unit air supply to the cooling maximum. Open the heating coil
control valve.
E.
Warm-up Cycle: Index the unit air supply to the cooling maximum. Open the heating coil
control valve.
F.
Cool-down Cycle: Index the unit air supply to the cooling maximum. Close the heating coil
control valve.
1.5
PARALLEL FAN-POWERED VAV BOXES
A.
Operating Schedule: Index the unit to the occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, or cool-down cycle
in accordance with its associated air handling unit.
B.
Occupied Cycle:
1.
2.
3.
4.
On a rise in space temperature, modulate the unit air supply to the space open to the
cooling maximum.
On a fall in space temperature, modulate the unit air supply to the space closed to the
cooling minimum.
On a continued fall in space temperature, start the unit fan.
On a continued fall in space temperature, modulate the heating coil control valve to
maintain the space heating temperature setpoint.
C.
Unoccupied Cycle: Index the unit air supply to the cooling maximum. Open the heating coil
control valve. Stop the unit fan.
D.
Warm-up Cycle: Index the unit air supply to the cooling maximum. Open the heating coil
control valve. Stop the unit fan.
E.
Cool-down Cycle: Index the unit air supply to the cooling maximum. Close the heating coil
control valve. Stop the unit fan.
1.6
SERIES FAN-POWERED VAV BOXES
A.
Operating Schedule: Index the unit to the occupied, unoccupied, warm-up, or cool-down cycle
in accordance with its associated air handling unit.
B.
Occupied Cycle:
1.
2.
Fan Control: Operate the fan continuously.
On a rise in space temperature, modulate the unit air supply to the space open to the
cooling maximum.
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
FOR HVAC CONTROLS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230993 - 2
3.
4.
5.
On a fall in space temperature, modulate the unit air supply to the space closed to the
cooling minimum.
On a continued fall in space temperature, modulate the heating coil control valve to
maintain the space heating temperature setpoint.
Set the cooling maximum and minimum setpoints as indicated on the Drawings.
C.
Unoccupied Cycle: Operate as indicated in the occupied cycle to maintain the setup and
setback space temperature setpoints. When the associated air handler supply fan is off, open the
unit primary air supply, stop the fan and close the heating coil control valve to the coil.
D.
Warm-up Cycle: Start the unit fan, open the unit primary air supply to the cooling minimum,
and modulate the heating control valve to maintain occupied space temperature heating setpoint.
E.
Cool-down: Start the unit fan and modulate the unit air supply to maintain the occupied space
temperature cooling setpoint. Close the heating coil control valve.
1.7
FANS EF-1, EF-2 AND EF-3
A.
Fan Control: Operate the fan continuously during the occupied cycle. Fan shall not operate
during the unoccupied cycle.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
POINT DESCRIPTIONS
A.
A Schedule of Point Descriptions follows END OF SECTION.
**END OF SECTION 230993**
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
FOR HVAC CONTROLS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230993 - 3
(This page intentionally left blank)
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
FOR HVAC CONTROLS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
230993 - 4
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
FOR HVAC CONTROLS
Exhaust Fan EF-1
Exhaust Fan EF-2
Exhaust Fan EF-3
Fan Powered VAV Boxes
Supply Fan
Space Temperature
Heating Coil Valve
Discharge Air Temperature
Reheat VAV Boxes
Space Temperature
Reheat Coil Valve
Discharge Air Temperature
HVAC Equipment
OUTPUT
DIGITAL
ANALOG
Pneumatic Transducer
POINT DESCRIPTION
Control Relay
Contactor
EP Relay
Valve Actuator
Damper Actuator
Speed Control
Temperature Switch
INPUT
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
Auxiliary Contact
DIGITAL
Pressure Switch
Current Switch
Pulse
Temperature
ANALOG
Relative Humidity
Pressure
Flow
Level
Frequency
Unoccupied Cycle
Warm-up Cycle
Cool-down Cycle
Economizer Cycle
Dehumidification Cycle
Unoccupied Override
FUNCTIONS
Lead- Lag Control
Anti-Cycle Control
Ventilation Control
Space Pressure Control
Smoke Control
Unoccupied Override
Equipment Status
230993 - 5
DISPLAY
Run Time
High/Low Limit Alarm
Status Alarm
Graphics
SEQUENCE OF OPERATIONS
FOR HVAC CONTROLS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
(This page intentionally left blank)
230993 - 6
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 232113
HYDRONIC PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes pipe and fitting materials, joining methods, special-duty valves, and
specialties for the following:
1.
1.3
Hot-water heating piping.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
PTFE: Polytetrafluoroethylene.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Hydronic piping components and installation shall be capable of withstanding the following
minimum working pressure and temperature:
1.
1.5
Hot-Water Heating Piping: 150 psig at 100 deg F.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.6
Valves. Include flow and pressure drop curves based on manufacturer's testing for
calibrated-orifice balancing valves.
Air control devices.
Hydronic specialties.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Field quality-control test reports.
HYDRONIC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
232113 - 1
1.7
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air control devices, hydronic specialties, and special-duty
valves to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Steel Support Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M,
"Structural Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Welding: Qualify processes and operators according to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Code: Section IX.
1.
2.
C.
Comply with provisions in ASME B31 Series, "Code for Pressure Piping."
Certify that each welder has passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes
involved and that certification is current.
ASME Compliance: Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping," for materials,
products, and installation. Safety valves and pressure vessels shall bear the appropriate ASME
label. Fabricate and stamp air separators and expansion tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and
Pressure Vessel Code: Section VIII, Division 1.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
A.
Drawn-Temper Copper Tubing: ASTM B 88, Type L.
B.
Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.
C.
Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.
2.2
STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS
A.
Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, black steel with plain ends; type, grade, and wall thickness as
indicated in Part 3 "Piping Applications" Article.
B.
Wrought-Steel Fittings: ASTM A 234/A 234M, wall thickness to match adjoining pipe.
C.
Wrought Cast- and Forged-Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5, including bolts,
nuts, and gaskets of the following material group, end connections, and facings:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Material Group: 1.1.
End Connections: Butt welding.
Facings: Raised face.
Steel Pipe Nipples: ASTM A 733, made of same materials and wall thicknesses as pipe in
which they are installed.
HYDRONIC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
232113 - 2
2.3
JOINING MATERIALS
A.
Pipe-Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for chemical and thermal conditions of piping system
contents.
1.
ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos free, 1/8-inch maximum thickness unless
thickness or specific material is indicated.
B.
Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32, lead-free alloys. Include water-flushable flux according to
ASTM B 813.
D.
Welding Filler Metals: Comply with AWS D10.12/D10.12M for welding materials appropriate
for wall thickness and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded.
E.
Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fluid to be handled and working
temperatures and pressures.
2.4
VALVES
A.
Ball Valves: Comply with requirements specified in Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for
HVAC Piping."
B.
Automatic Temperature-Control Valves, Actuators, and Sensors: Comply with requirements
specified in Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
C.
Bronze, Calibrated-Orifice, Balancing Valves, NPS 2 and Smaller:
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
Danfoss.
Flow Design Inc.
Griswold Controls.
Marshall Engineering Products Co.
Tour & Andersson; available through Victaulic Company.
Body: Bronze, ball or plug type with calibrated orifice or venturi; or Y-pattern globe
style with alloyed brass parts.
Ball: Brass or stainless steel.
Plug: Resin.
Seat: PTFE.
End Connections: Threaded or socket.
Pressure Gage Connections: Integral seals for portable differential pressure meter.
Drain/Purge Port: NPS 1/4, tapped port.
Ball or Plug Type Handle Style: Lever, with memory stop to retain set position.
Globe Type Handle Style: Screw and yoke, with memory stop to retain set position.
HYDRONIC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
232113 - 3
11.
12.
2.5
CWP Rating: Minimum 125 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.
AIR CONTROL DEVICES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Manual Air Vents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
C.
Body: Bronze.
Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
Operator: Screwdriver or thumbscrew.
Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
Discharge Connection: NPS 1/8.
CWP Rating: 150 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 225 deg F.
Automatic Air Vents:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.6
Amtrol, Inc.
Armstrong Pumps, Inc.
Bell & Gossett Domestic Pump; a division of ITT Industries.
Body: Bronze or cast iron.
Internal Parts: Nonferrous.
Operator: Noncorrosive metal float.
Inlet Connection: NPS 1/2.
Discharge Connection: NPS 1/4.
CWP Rating: 150 psig.
Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.
HYDRONIC PIPING SPECIALTIES
A.
Y-Pattern Strainers, NPS 2 and Smaller:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Body: ASTM A 126, Class B, bronze body with bottom drain connection and NPT
tapped blow-off plug.
End Connections: Threaded ends.
Strainer Screen: 40-mesh startup strainer, and perforated stainless-steel basket with 50
percent free area.
CWP Rating: 125 psig.
HYDRONIC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
232113 - 4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PIPING APPLICATIONS
A.
Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2 and smaller, shall be the following:
1.
B.
Hot-water heating piping, aboveground, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, shall be any of the following:
1.
2.
3.2
Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.
Type L, drawn-temper copper tubing, wrought-copper fittings, and soldered joints.
Schedule 40 steel pipe, wrought-steel fittings and wrought-cast or forged-steel flanges
and flange fittings, and welded and flanged joints.
VALVE APPLICATIONS
A.
Install shutoff-duty valves at each branch connection to supply mains, and at supply connection
to each piece of equipment.
B.
Install throttling-duty valves at each branch connection to return main.
C.
Install calibrated-orifice, balancing valves in the return pipe of each heating or cooling terminal.
3.3
PIPING INSTALLATIONS
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping
systems. Indicate piping locations and arrangements if such were used to size pipe and
calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping
as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved by Architect.
B.
Install piping in concealed locations, unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms
and service areas.
C.
Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right
angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated
otherwise.
D.
Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.
E.
Install piping to permit valve servicing.
F.
Install piping free of sags and bends.
G.
Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.
H.
Install piping to allow application of insulation.
I.
Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating
pressure.
HYDRONIC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
232113 - 5
J.
Install groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and servicing
of valves.
K.
Install drains, consisting of a tee fitting, NPS 3/4 ball valve, and short NPS 3/4 threaded nipple
with cap, at low points in piping system mains and elsewhere as required for system drainage.
L.
Install hydronic piping at the following minimum slopes, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
Building Piping: Install piping at a uniform grade of 0.2 percent upward in direction of
flow.
M.
Reduce pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fitting installed with level side up.
N.
Install branch connections to mains using tee fittings in main pipe, with the branch connected to
the bottom of the main pipe. For up-feed risers, connect the branch to the top of the main pipe.
O.
Install valves according to Section 230523 "General-Duty Valves for HVAC Piping."
P.
Install unions in piping, NPS 2 and smaller, adjacent to valves, at final connections of
equipment, and elsewhere as indicated.
Q.
Install flanges in piping, NPS 2-1/2 and larger, at final connections of equipment and elsewhere
as indicated.
R.
Install strainers on inlet side of each control valve and elsewhere as indicated. Install NPS 3/4
nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection of strainers NPS 2 and larger. Match size of
strainer blowoff connection for strainers smaller than NPS 2.
S.
Identify piping as specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment."
T.
Install sleeves for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with requirements
for sleeves specified in Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC."
U.
Install escutcheons for piping penetrations of walls, ceilings, and floors. Comply with
requirements for escutcheons specified in Section 230500 "Common Work Results for HVAC."
3.4
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger, support, and anchor devices are specified in Section 230529 "Hangers and Supports for
HVAC Piping and Equipment." Comply with the following requirements for maximum spacing
of supports.
B.
Install the following pipe attachments:
1.
2.
Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal piping less than 20 feet long.
Adjustable roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal piping 20 feet or
longer.
HYDRONIC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
232113 - 6
3.
4.
C.
Install hangers for steel piping with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
D.
NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 3: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 4: Maximum span, 14 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.
Install hangers for drawn-temper copper piping with the following maximum spacing and
minimum rod sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.5
Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer,
supported on a trapeze.
Provide copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with
copper pipe.
NPS 3/4: Maximum span, 5 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1: Maximum span, 6 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.
NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
NPS 2: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.
PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION
A.
Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.
B.
Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before
assembly.
C.
Soldered Joints: Apply ASTM B 813, water-flushable flux, unless otherwise indicated, to tube
end. Construct joints according to ASTM B 828 or CDA's "Copper Tube Handbook," using
lead-free solder alloy complying with ASTM B 32.
D.
Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads according to ASME B1.20.1. Cut
threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded pipe ends to remove burrs and restore
full ID. Join pipe fittings and valves as follows:
1.
2.
Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to external pipe threads unless dry seal
threading is specified.
Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe or pipe fittings with threads that are corroded or
damaged. Do not use pipe sections that have cracked or open welds.
E.
Welded Joints: Construct joints according to AWS D10.12/D10.12M, using qualified processes
and welding operators according to Part 1 "Quality Assurance" Article.
F.
Flanged Joints: Select appropriate gasket material, size, type, and thickness for service
application. Install gasket concentrically positioned. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads.
HYDRONIC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
232113 - 7
3.6
HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES INSTALLATION
A.
Install manual air vents at high points in piping, at heat-transfer coils, and elsewhere as required
for system air venting.
B.
Install automatic air vents at high points of system piping in mechanical equipment rooms only.
3.7
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS
A.
Sizes for supply and return piping connections shall be the same as or larger than equipment
connections.
B.
Install control valves in accessible locations close to connected equipment.
3.8
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare hydronic piping according to ASME B31.9 and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Leave joints, including welds, uninsulated and exposed for examination during test.
Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints that cannot sustain reactions due to test
pressure. If temporary restraints are impractical, isolate expansion joints from testing.
Flush hydronic piping systems with clean water; then remove and clean or replace
strainer screens.
Isolate equipment from piping. If a valve is used to isolate equipment, its closure shall be
capable of sealing against test pressure without damage to valve. Install blinds in flanged
joints to isolate equipment.
Install safety valve, set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than test pressure, to
protect against damage by expanding liquid or other source of overpressure during test.
Perform the following tests on hydronic piping:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Use ambient temperature water as a testing medium unless there is risk of damage due to
freezing. Another liquid that is safe for workers and compatible with piping may be
used.
While filling system, use vents installed at high points of system to release air. Use
drains installed at low points for complete draining of test liquid.
Isolate expansion tanks and determine that hydronic system is full of water.
Subject piping system to hydrostatic test pressure that is not less than 1.5 times the
system's working pressure. Test pressure shall not exceed maximum pressure for any
vessel, pump, valve, or other component in system under test. Verify that stress due to
pressure at bottom of vertical runs does not exceed 90 percent of specified minimum
yield strength or 1.7 times "SE" value in Appendix A in ASME B31.9, "Building
Services Piping."
After hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping,
joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing
components, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.
Prepare written report of testing.
HYDRONIC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
232113 - 8
C.
Perform the following before operating the system:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Open manual valves fully.
Inspect pumps for proper rotation.
Set makeup pressure-reducing valves for required system pressure.
Inspect air vents at high points of system and determine if all are installed and operating
freely (automatic type), or bleed air completely (manual type).
Set temperature controls so all coils are calling for full flow.
Inspect and set operating temperatures of hydronic equipment, such as boilers, chillers,
cooling towers, to specified values.
Verify lubrication of motors and bearings.
**END OF SECTION 232113**
HYDRONIC PIPING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
232113 - 9
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 233113
METAL DUCTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
B.
Related Sections:
1.
2.
1.3
Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.
Single-wall round and flat-oval ducts and fittings.
Sheet metal materials.
Duct liner.
Sealants and gaskets.
Hangers and supports.
Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting, and
balancing requirements for metal ducts.
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for dampers, duct-mounting access doors and
panels, turning vanes, and flexible ducts.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint
construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC
Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design
criteria indicated in "Duct Schedule" Article.
B.
Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads
and stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
C.
Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in
ASHRAE 62.1.
METAL DUCTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233113 - 1
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of the following products:
1.
2.
1.5
Liners and adhesives.
Sealants and gaskets.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Field quality-control reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:
1.
2.
3.
AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel," for hangers and supports.
AWS D1.2/D1.2M, "Structural Welding Code - Aluminum," for aluminum supports.
AWS D9.1M/D9.1, "Sheet Metal Welding Code," for duct joint and seam welding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise
indicated.
B.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse
Joints," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
C.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal
Seams," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, ductsupport intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible."
D.
Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types
and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Chapter 4, "Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable
sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
METAL DUCTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233113 - 2
2.2
SINGLE-WALL ROUND AND FLAT-OVAL DUCTS AND FITTINGS
A.
General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on
indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Flat-Oval Ducts: Indicated dimensions are the duct width (major dimension) and diameter of
the round sides connecting the flat portions of the duct (minor dimension).
C.
Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for
static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals,
and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
1.
D.
Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams,"
for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support
intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible."
1.
E.
2.3
Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 30 Inches in Diameter: Flanged.
Fabricate flat-oval ducts larger than 72 inches in width (major dimension) with buttwelded longitudinal seams.
Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and
Figure 3-6, "Conical Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials
involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
SHEET METAL MATERIALS
A.
General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct
construction methods unless otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting,
seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations, and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
2.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.
Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.
C.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and
galvanized.
D.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
METAL DUCTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233113 - 3
2.4
DUCT LINER
A.
Fibrous-Glass Duct Liner: Comply with ASTM C 1071, NFPA 90A, or NFPA 90B; and with
NAIMA AH124, "Fibrous Glass Duct Liner Standard."
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Maximum Thermal Conductivity:
a.
3.
Type I, Flexible: 0.27 Btu x in./h x sq. ft. x deg F at 75 deg F mean temperature.
Solvent or Water-Based Liner Adhesive: Comply with NFPA 90A or NFPA 90B and
with ASTM C 916.
a.
B.
CertainTeed Corporation; Insulation Group.
Johns Manville.
Knauf Insulation.
Owens Corning.
For indoor applications, adhesive shall have a VOC content of 80 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Shop Application of Duct Liner: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 7-11, "Flexible Duct Liner Installation."
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Adhere a single layer of indicated thickness of duct liner with at least 90 percent adhesive
coverage at liner contact surface area. Attaining indicated thickness with multiple layers
of duct liner is prohibited.
Apply adhesive to transverse edges of liner facing upstream that do not receive metal
nosing.
Butt transverse joints without gaps, and coat joint with adhesive.
Fold and compress liner in corners of rectangular ducts or cut and fit to ensure buttededge overlapping.
Do not apply liner in rectangular ducts with longitudinal joints, except at corners of ducts,
unless duct size and dimensions of standard liner make longitudinal joints necessary.
Apply adhesive coating on longitudinal seams in ducts with air velocity of 2500 fpm.
Secure liner with mechanical fasteners 4 inches from corners and at intervals not
exceeding 12 inches transversely; at 3 inches from transverse joints and at intervals not
exceeding 18 inches longitudinally.
Secure transversely oriented liner edges facing the airstream with metal nosings that have
either channel or "Z" profiles or are integrally formed from duct wall. Fabricate edge
facings at the following locations:
a.
b.
c.
METAL DUCTS
Fan discharges.
Intervals of lined duct preceding unlined duct.
Upstream edges of transverse joints in ducts where air velocities are higher than
2500 fpm or where indicated.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233113 - 4
2.5
SEALANT AND GASKETS
A.
General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and
gaskets shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index
of 50 when tested according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.
B.
Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Solvent-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
D.
Application Method: Brush on.
Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.
Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum sheets.
Application Method: Brush on.
Base: Synthetic rubber resin.
Solvent: Toluene and heptane.
Solids Content: Minimum 60 percent.
Shore A Hardness: Minimum 60.
Water resistant.
Mold and mildew resistant.
For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive or negative.
Service: Indoor or outdoor.
Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless
steel, or aluminum sheets.
Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.
Type: S.
Grade: NS.
Class: 25.
Use: O.
For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when
calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).
E.
Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.
F.
Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:
1.
Seal shall provide maximum 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wg and shall be rated for10-inch
wg static-pressure class, positive or negative.
METAL DUCTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233113 - 5
2.6
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A.
Hanger Rods: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.
B.
Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2,
"Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round Duct."
C.
Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible
with duct materials.
D.
Trapeze and Riser Supports:
1.
Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
DUCT INSTALLATION
A.
Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct
system. Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and
calculate friction loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations.
Install duct systems as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved by Architect.
B.
Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible" unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Install round and flat-oval ducts in maximum practical lengths.
D.
Install ducts with fewest possible joints.
E.
Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for
branch connections.
F.
Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and
perpendicular to building lines.
G.
Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent
enclosure elements of building.
H.
Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.
I.
Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and
enclosures.
J.
Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to
view, cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal
flanges of same metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least
1-1/2 inches.
METAL DUCTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233113 - 6
K.
Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers.
Comply with requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire dampers.
L.
Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign
materials. Comply with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under
Construction," Appendix G, "Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."
3.2
DUCT SEALING
A.
Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction
Standards - Metal and Flexible":
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
3.3
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."
Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal
Class B.
Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg:
Seal Class A.
Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.
Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.
Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wg and Lower: Seal
Class C.
Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal
Class B.
Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.
Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.
HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"
Chapter 5, "Hangers and Supports."
B.
Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners
appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.
Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.
Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for
slabs more than 4 inches thick.
Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for
slabs less than 4 inches thick.
C.
Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and
Flexible," Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum
Hanger Sizes for Round Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports
within 24 inches of each elbow and within 48 inches of each branch intersection.
D.
Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.
METAL DUCTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233113 - 7
E.
Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds,
bolts, sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16
feet.
F.
Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension,
and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Make connections to equipment with flexible connectors complying with Section 233300 "Air
Duct Accessories."
B.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
branch, outlet and inlet, and terminal unit connections.
3.5
PAINTING
A.
3.6
Paint interior of metal ducts that are visible through registers and grilles and that do not have
duct liner. Apply one coat of flat, black, latex paint over a compatible galvanized-steel primer.
Paint materials and application requirements are specified in Division 09 painting Sections.
START UP
A.
3.7
Air Balance: Comply with requirements in Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing
for HVAC."
DUCT SCHEDULE
A.
Fabricate ducts with galvanized sheet steel except as otherwise indicated.
B.
Supply Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Terminal Units:
a.
2.
Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:
a.
3.
Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.
Pressure Class: Positive 2-inch wg.
Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units Upstream of VAV Boxes:
a.
METAL DUCTS
Pressure Class: Positive 3-inch wg.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233113 - 8
C.
Return Ducts:
1.
Ducts Connected to Terminal Units:
a.
2.
Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:
a.
D.
Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:
a.
Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel or carbon steel coated with zinc-chromate
primer.
Liner:
1.
2.
G.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
Intermediate Reinforcement:
1.
F.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
Exhaust Ducts:
1.
E.
Pressure Class: Positive or negative 2-inch wg.
Return Air Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.
Transfer Ducts: Fibrous glass, Type I, 1 inch thick.
Elbow Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."
a.
Velocity Less than 1500 fpm:
1)
2)
3)
b.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
1)
2)
3)
METAL DUCTS
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.
Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two
vanes.
Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane
Runners," and Figure 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233113 - 9
2.
Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible," Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."
a.
Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments:
Comply with
SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 31, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with less than 90-degree change of direction have
proportionately fewer segments.
1)
2)
b.
c.
H.
Velocity Less than 1500 fpm:
segments for 90-degree elbow.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:
segments for 90-degree elbow.
1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four
1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five
Round Elbows, 12 Inches and Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.
Round Elbows, 14 Inches and Larger in Diameter: Standing seam or welded].
Branch Configuration:
1.
Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.
Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Conical or bellmouth spin-in fitting or
rectangular-to-round transition boot with 45-degree entry where depth of main is
insufficient.
Rectangular Main to Round Flexible Duct: Spin in.
Provide manufactured volume dampers in fittings where indicated; minimum
24-gage damper attached to 3/8-inch solid shaft. Support shaft at both ends with
regulator and opposite side end bearing. Regulator shall consist of washer, gasket,
handle, and locking hex nut.
Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical
Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.
a.
b.
c.
d.
Velocity 1000 fpm or Lower: 90-degree tap.
Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.
Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher: 45-degree lateral.
Provide manufactured volume dampers in fittings where indicated; minimum
24-gage damper attached to 3/8-inch solid shaft. Support shaft at both ends with
regulator and opposite side end bearing. Regulator shall consist of washer, gasket,
handle, and locking hex nut.
**END OF SECTION 233113**
METAL DUCTS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233113 - 10
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 233300
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Section Includes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
1.3
Manual volume dampers.
Fire dampers.
Ceiling radiation dampers.
Turning vanes.
Duct-mounted access doors.
Flexible connectors.
Flexible ducts.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Operation and Maintenance Data:
maintenance manuals.
For air duct accessories to include in operation and
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with NFPA 90A, "Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems," and with
NFPA 90B, "Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems."
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
A.
Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for
acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and construction methods unless otherwise indicated.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233300 - 1
Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains, discolorations,
and other imperfections.
B.
Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.
1.
2.
Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.
Exposed-Surface Finish: Mill phosphatized.
C.
Aluminum Sheets: Comply with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003, Temper H14; with mill finish for
concealed ducts and standard, 1-side bright finish for exposed ducts.
D.
Extruded Aluminum: Comply with ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063, Temper T6.
E.
Reinforcement Shapes and Plates:
galvanized sheet metal ducts.
F.
Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inch
minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.
2.2
Galvanized-steel reinforcement where installed on
MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A.
Standard, Steel, Manual Volume Dampers:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Ruskin Company, Model MD35. Subject to compliance with
requirements, provide the named product or comparable product by one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
Frames: Hat-shaped, minimum 0.064 inch thick, galvanized sheet steel.
a.
b.
5.
Multiple or single blade.
Parallel- or opposed-blade design.
Stiffen damper blades for stability.
Galvanized-steel, 0.064 inch thick.
Blade Axles: Galvanized steel.
Bearings: Molded synthetic.
a.
8.
Mitered and welded corners.
Flanges for attaching to walls and flangeless frames for installing in ducts.
Blades:
a.
b.
c.
d.
6.
7.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Dampers in ducts with pressure classes of 3-inch wg or less shall have axles full
length of damper blades and bearings at both ends of operating shaft.
Tie Bars and Brackets: Galvanized steel.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233300 - 2
B.
Standard, Steel, Round, Manual Volume Dampers:
1.
Basis-of-Design Product: Ruskin Company, Model MDRS25. Subject to compliance
with requirements, provide the named product or comparable product by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
C.
3.
Size: 1-inch diameter.
Material: Galvanized-steel pipe rotating within pipe-bearing assembly mounted on
supports at each mullion and at each end of multiple-damper assemblies.
Length and Number of Mountings: As required to connect linkage of each damper in
multiple-damper assembly.
Damper Hardware:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Standard leakage rating, with linkage outside airstream.
Suitable for horizontal or vertical applications.
Frame: Minimum 0.0396-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel, 7-inches long.
Blades: Single blade, 0.0396-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel.
Blade Shaft: 3/8-inch-galvanized steel shaft extending through frame.
Bearings: Molded synthetic.
Quadrant: Locking hand quadrant.
Jackshaft:
1.
2.
D.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
METALAIRE, Inc.
Zinc-plated, die-cast core with dial and handle made of 3/32-inch-thick zinc-plated steel,
and a 3/4-inch hexagon locking nut.
Include center hole to suit damper operating-rod size.
Include elevated platform for insulated duct mounting.
FIRE DAMPERS
A.
Basis-of-Design Product(s): Ruskin Company, Models DIBD2 and DIBD23. Subject to
compliance with requirements, provide the named product(s) or comparable product(s) by one
of the following:
1.
2.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc.
B.
Type: Static and dynamic as indicated; rated and labeled according to UL 555 by an NRTL.
C.
Dynamic Fire Dampers: Closing rating in ducts up to 4-inch wg static pressure class and
minimum 2000-fpm velocity.
D.
Fire Rating: 1-1/2 and 3 hours as indicated.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233300 - 3
E.
Frame: Curtain type with blades outside airstream except when located behind grille where
blades may be inside airstream; fabricated with roll-formed, 0.0396-inch-thick galvanized steel;
with mitered and interlocking corners.
F.
Mounting Sleeve: Factory- or field-installed, galvanized sheet steel.
1.
2.
Minimum Thickness: 0.05 or 0.138 inch thick, as indicated, and of length to suit
application.
Exception: Omit sleeve where damper-frame width permits direct attachment of
perimeter mounting angles on each side of wall or floor; thickness of damper frame must
comply with sleeve requirements.
G.
Mounting Orientation: Vertical or horizontal as indicated.
H.
Blades: Roll-formed, interlocking, 0.0276-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel. In place of
interlocking blades, use full-length, 0.0276-inch-thick, galvanized-steel blade connectors.
I.
Horizontal Dampers: Include blade lock and stainless-steel closure spring.
J.
Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
2.4
CEILING RADIATION DAMPERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Prefco; Perfect Air Control, Inc.
Ruskin Company.
General Requirements:
1.
2.
Labeled according to UL 555C by an NRTL.
Comply with construction details for tested floor- and roof-ceiling assemblies as
indicated in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory."
C.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, round or rectangular, style to suit ceiling construction.
D.
Blades: Galvanized sheet steel with refractory insulation.
E.
Heat-Responsive Device: Replaceable, 165 deg F rated, fusible links.
F.
Fire Rating: 2 and 3 hours as indicated.
2.5
TURNING VANES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Duro Dyne Inc.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233300 - 4
3.
4.
5.
B.
METALAIRE, Inc.
SEMCO Incorporated.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Manufactured Turning Vanes for Metal Ducts: Curved blades of galvanized sheet steel; support
with bars perpendicular to blades set; set into vane runners suitable for duct mounting.
1.
Acoustic Turning Vanes: Fabricate airfoil-shaped aluminum extrusions with perforated
faces and fibrous-glass fill.
C.
General Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal
and Flexible"; Figures 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and 4-4, "Vane Support in Elbows."
D.
Vane Construction: Single wall for ducts up to 24 inches wide and double wall for larger
dimensions.
2.6
DUCT-MOUNTED ACCESS DOORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Cesco Products; a division of Mestek, Inc.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Duct-Mounted Access Doors: Fabricate access panels according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible"; Figures 7-2, "Duct Access Doors and Panels,"
and 7-3, "Access Doors - Round Duct."
1.
Door:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
3.
Double wall, rectangular.
Galvanized sheet metal with insulation fill and thickness as indicated for duct
pressure class.
Hinges and Latches: 1-by-1-inch butt or piano hinge and cam latches.
Fabricate doors airtight and suitable for duct pressure class.
Frame: Galvanized sheet steel, with bend-over tabs and foam gaskets.
Number of Hinges and Locks:
a.
b.
c.
d.
Access Doors Less Than 12 Inches Square: No hinges and two sash locks.
Access Doors up to 18 Inches Square: Two hinges or continuous piano hinges and
two sash locks.
Access Doors up to 24 by 48 Inches: Three hinges or continuous piano hinges and
two compression latches with outside and inside handles.
Access Doors Larger Than 24 by 48 Inches: Four hinges or Continuous piano
hinges and minimum two compression latches with outside and inside handles.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233300 - 5
2.7
FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Ductmate Industries, Inc.
Duro Dyne Inc.
Ventfabrics, Inc.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
B.
Materials: Flame-retardant or noncombustible fabrics.
C.
Coatings and Adhesives: Comply with UL 181, Class 1.
D.
Metal-Edged Connectors: Factory fabricated with a fabric strip minimum 3-1/2 inches wide
attached to two strips of 2-3/4-inch-wide, 0.028-inch-thick, galvanized sheet steel or 0.032inch-thick aluminum sheets. Provide metal compatible with connected ducts.
E.
Indoor System, Flexible Connector Fabric: Glass fabric double coated with neoprene.
1.
2.
3.
2.8
Minimum Weight: 26 oz./sq. yd.
Tensile Strength: 480 lbf/inch in the warp and 360 lbf/inch in the filling.
Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Insulated, Flexible Duct: UL 181, Class 1, multiple layers of aluminum laminate supported by
helically wound, spring-steel wire; fibrous-glass insulation; aluminized vapor-barrier film.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
Flexmaster U.S.A., Inc.
McGill AirFlow LLC.
Ward Industries, Inc.; a division of Hart & Cooley, Inc.
Pressure Rating: 10-inch wg positive and 1.0-inch wg negative.
Maximum Air Velocity: 4000 fpm.
Temperature Range: Minus 20 to plus 210 deg F.
Insulation R-value: Comply with ASHRAE/IESNA 90.1.
Flexible Duct Connectors:
1.
Clamps: Stainless-steel band with cadmium-plated hex screw to tighten band with a
worm-gear action in sizes 3 through 18 inches, to suit duct size.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233300 - 6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install duct accessories according to applicable details in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct
Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" for metal ducts and in NAIMA AH116, "Fibrous
Glass Duct Construction Standards," for fibrous-glass ducts.
B.
Install duct accessories of materials suited to duct materials; use galvanized-steel accessories in
galvanized-steel ducts.
C.
Install volume dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches extend
from larger ducts. Where dampers are installed in ducts having duct liner, install dampers with
hat channels of same depth as liner, and terminate liner with nosing at hat channel.
D.
Set dampers to fully open position before testing, adjusting, and balancing.
E.
Install fire dampers according to UL listing.
F.
Install duct access doors on sides of ducts to allow for inspecting, adjusting, and maintaining
accessories and equipment at the following locations:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Downstream from manual volume dampers, control dampers, and equipment.
Adjacent to and close enough to fire dampers, to reset or reinstall fusible links.
At each change in direction and at maximum 50-foot spacing.
Upstream and downstream from turning vanes.
Control devices requiring inspection.
Elsewhere as indicated.
G.
Install access doors with swing against duct static pressure.
H.
Access Door Sizes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
I.
Ductwork up to 6 Inches: 6 by 6 inches.
Ductwork up to 12 Inches: 8 by 8 inches.
Ductwork over 12 Inches but Less than 24 Inches: 12 by 12 inches.
Ductwork 24 Inches and Larger: 18 by 18 inches.
Label access doors according to Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC Piping and
Equipment" to indicate the purpose of access door.
1.
Permanently identify fire damper access points on the exterior with a label having letters
not less than 0.5 inch in height reading: "FIRE DAMPER."
J.
Install flexible connectors to connect ducts to equipment.
K.
Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly. Do not use flexible ducts to change directions.
L.
Connect flexible ducts to metal ducts with draw bands.
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233300 - 7
3.2
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Operate dampers to verify full range of movement.
Inspect locations of access doors and verify that purpose of access door can be
performed.
Operate fire dampers to verify full range of movement and verify that proper heatresponse device is installed.
Inspect turning vanes for proper and secure installation.
**END OF SECTION 233300**
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233300 - 8
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 233423
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
1.3
Ceiling-mounting ventilators.
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Project Altitude: Base fan-performance ratings on sea level.
B.
Operating Limits: Classify according to AMCA 99.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include rated capacities, furnished specialties, and accessories for each type of
product indicated and include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.5
Certified fan performance curves with system operating conditions indicated.
Certified fan sound-power ratings.
Motor ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories.
Material thickness and finishes, including color charts.
Dampers, including housings, linkages, and operators.
Fan speed controllers.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Operation and Maintenance Data: For power ventilators to include in emergency, operation,
and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233423 - 1
B.
AMCA Compliance: Products shall comply with performance requirements and shall be
licensed to use the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
C.
NEMA Compliance: Motors and electrical accessories shall comply with NEMA standards.
D.
UL Standard: Power ventilators shall comply with UL 705.
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver fans as factory-assembled unit, to the extent allowable by shipping limitations, with
protective crating and covering.
B.
Disassemble and reassemble units, as required for moving to final location, according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
C.
Lift and support units with manufacturer's designated lifting or supporting points.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate size and location of structural-steel support members.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CEILING-MOUNTING VENTILATORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
Cook, Loren Company; Gemini Series.
Greenheck Fan Corp.; Model SP.
Penn Ventilation Companies, Inc.; Zepher Series.
B.
Description: Centrifugal fans designed for concealed in-line applications.
C.
Housing: Steel, lined with acoustical insulation, with duct inlet and outlet connections.
D.
Fan Wheel: Centrifugal wheels directly mounted on motor shaft. Fan shrouds, motor, and fan
wheel shall be removable for service.
E.
Electrical Requirements: Junction box for electrical connection on housing and receptacle for
motor plug-in.
F.
Accessories:
1.
2.
3.
Variable-Speed Controller: Solid-state control to reduce speed from 100 to less than
50 percent.
Backdraft damper.
Isolation: Rubber-in-shear vibration isolators.
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233423 - 2
2.2
MOTORS
A.
2.3
Comply with requirements in Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC
Equipment."
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Sound-Power Level Ratings: Comply with AMCA 301, "Methods for Calculating Fan Sound
Ratings from Laboratory Test Data." Factory test fans according to AMCA 300, "Reverberant
Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans." Label fans with the AMCA-Certified Ratings Seal.
B.
Fan Performance Ratings: Establish flow rate, pressure, power, air density, speed of rotation,
and efficiency by factory tests and ratings according to AMCA 210, "Laboratory Methods of
Testing Fans for Rating."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install power ventilators level and plumb.
B.
Support suspended units from structure using threaded steel rods and vibration isolation
hangers.
C.
Install units with clearances for service and maintenance.
D.
Label units according to requirements specified in Section 230553 "Identification for HVAC
Piping and Equipment."
3.2
CONNECTIONS
A.
Duct installation and connection requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections.
Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts and duct accessories. Make final duct
connections with flexible connectors. Flexible connectors are specified in Section 233300 "Air
Duct Accessories."
B.
Install ducts adjacent to power ventilators to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
D.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233423 - 3
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
3.4
Verify that shipping, blocking, and bracing are removed.
Verify that unit is secure on mountings and supporting devices and that connections to
ducts and electrical components are complete. Verify that proper thermal-overload
protection is installed in motors, starters, and disconnect switches.
Verify that cleaning and adjusting are complete.
Verify proper motor rotation direction
Verify fan wheel free rotation and smooth bearing operation.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
Verify lubrication for bearings and other moving parts.
Verify that manual and automatic volume control and fire dampers in connected
ductwork systems are in fully open position.
Disable automatic temperature-control operators, energize motor and adjust fan to
indicated rpm, and measure and record motor voltage and amperage.
Shut unit down and reconnect automatic temperature-control operators.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
ADJUSTING
A.
Adjust damper linkages for proper damper operation.
B.
Refer to Section 230593 "Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC" for testing, adjusting,
and balancing procedures.
C.
Lubricate bearings.
**END OF SECTION 233423**
HVAC POWER VENTILATORS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233423 - 4
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 233600
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
1.3
Fan-powered air terminal units.
Shutoff single-duct air terminal units.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include rated capacities, furnished specialties,
sound-power ratings, and accessories.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For air terminal units to include in emergency, operation, and
maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Section 017823 "Operation and
Maintenance Data" include the following:
1.
2.
1.5
Instructions for resetting minimum and maximum air volumes.
Instructions for adjusting software set points.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of air terminal
units and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Section 016000 "Product
Requirements."
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
NFPA Compliance: Install air terminal units according to NFPA 90A, "Standard for the
Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems."
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233600 - 1
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of air terminal units and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to
product selection:
1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
FAN-POWERED AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Environmental Technologies, Inc.; Enviro-Air Div.
York International.
B.
Configuration: Volume-damper assembly and fan in series or in parallel arrangement inside
unit casing with control components inside a protective metal shroud.
C.
Casing: 0.034-inch steel.
1.
2.
3.
4.
D.
Casing Lining: 1-inch-thick, 4 pounds per cubic foot, fibrous-glass duct liner complying
with ASTM C 1071; secured with adhesive. Cover insulation with 22 gauge metal liner.
Air Inlets: Round or oval 22 gauge sleeve with integral multipoint differential pressure
sensor (minimum 12 points along two axes). Sensor shall provide an amplified signal,
minimum 2.5 times the equivalent velocity pressure signal for the same capacity as
measured with a conventional pitot tube.
Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.
Access: Removable panels for access to dampers and other parts requiring service,
adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket and quarter-turn latches.
Volume Damper: Galvanized steel butterfly damper with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating
bearings.
1.
2.
Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 1 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg
inlet static pressure.
Damper Position: Normally open.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233600 - 2
E.
Fan Section: Galvanized-steel plenum, with direct-drive, forward-curved fan with air filter and
backdraft damper.
1.
2.
Lining: 1-inch-thick, 4 pounds per cubic foot, fibrous-glass duct liner complying with
ASTM C 1071; secured with adhesive. Cover insulation with 22 gauge metal liner.
Motor: Multispeed or variable speed with controller . Comply with requirements in
Section 230513 "Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment."
a.
b.
3.
Fan-Motor Assembly Isolation: Rubber isolators.
Permanent split capacitor type with thermal overloads
Air Filter: 1-inch-thick, fiberglass throwaway.
F.
Hot-Water Heating Coil: Copper tube, mechanically expanded into aluminum-plate fins; leak
tested underwater to 200 psig; and factory installed.
G.
DDC Controls: Single-package unitary controller and actuator specified in Section 230900
"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
H.
Factory-Mounted and -Wired Controls: Electrical components shall be mounted in control box
with removable cover. Incorporate single-point electrical connection to power source.
1.
2.
3.
I.
2.3
Control Transformer: Factory mounted for control voltage on electric and electronic
control units with terminal strip in control box for field wiring of thermostat and power
source.
Wiring Terminations: Fan and controls to terminal strip, and terminal lugs shall match
quantities, sizes, and materials of branch-circuit conductors. Enclose terminal lugs in
terminal box that is sized according to NFPA 70.
Disconnect Switch: Factory-mounted, fused type.
Control Panel Enclosure: NEMA 250, Type 1, with access panel sealed from airflow and
mounted on side of unit.
SHUTOFF SINGLE-DUCT AIR TERMINAL UNITS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
Environmental Technologies, Inc.; Enviro-Air Div.
York International.
B.
Configuration: Volume-damper assembly inside unit casing with control components located
inside a protective metal shroud.
C.
Casing: 0.034-inch steel.
1.
2.
Casing Lining: 1-inch-thick, 4 pounds per cubic foot, fibrous-glass duct liner complying
with ASTM C 1071; secured with adhesive. Cover insulation with 22 gauge metal liner.
Air Inlets: Round or oval 22 gauge sleeve with integral multipoint differential pressure
sensor (minimum 12 points along two axes). Sensor shall provide an amplified signal,
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233600 - 3
3.
4.
D.
minimum 2.5 times the equivalent velocity pressure signal for the same capacity as
measured with a conventional pitot tube.
Air Outlet: S-slip and drive connections.
Access: Removable panels for access to dampers and other parts requiring service,
adjustment, or maintenance; with airtight gasket.
Volume Damper: Galvanized steel butterfly damper with peripheral gasket and self-lubricating
bearings.
1.
2.
Maximum Damper Leakage: ARI 880 rated, 1 percent of nominal airflow at 3-inch wg
inlet static pressure.
Damper Position: Normally open.
E.
Multioutlet Attenuator Section: With two, three, or four collars; each with locking butterfly
balancing damper.
F.
Hot-Water Heating Coil: Copper tube, mechanically expanded into aluminum-plate fins; leak
tested underwater to 200 psig; and factory installed.
G.
DDC Controls: Single-package unitary controller and actuator specified in Section 230900
"Instrumentation and Control for HVAC."
2.4
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Identification: Label each air terminal unit with plan number, nominal airflow, maximum and
minimum factory-set airflows, coil type, and ARI certification seal.
B.
Verification of Performance: Rate air terminal units according to ARI 880.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
3.2
Install air terminal units level and plumb. Maintain sufficient clearance for normal service and
maintenance.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 23 Sections. Drawings indicate
general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.
B.
Install piping adjacent to air terminal units to allow service and maintenance.
C.
Hot-Water Piping: In addition to requirements in Section 232113 "Hydronic Piping," connect
heating coils to supply with shutoff valve, and union or flange; and to return with shutoff valve,
balancing valve, control valve and union or flange. Install air vent, drain valve and
pressure/temperature test stations.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233600 - 4
D.
3.3
Connect ducts to air terminal units according to Section 233113 "Metal Ducts."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections,
and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
3.4
After installing air terminal units and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
compliance with requirements.
Leak Test: After installation, fill water coils and test for leaks. Repair leaks and retest
until no leaks exist.
Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm
proper motor rotation and unit operation.
Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and
equipment.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
STARTUP SERVICE
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service.
1.
Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written instructions
and do the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.5
Verify that inlet duct connections are as recommended by air terminal unit
manufacturer to achieve proper performance.
Verify that controls and control enclosure are accessible.
Verify that control connections are complete.
Verify that nameplate and identification tag are visible.
Verify that controls respond to inputs as specified.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain air terminal units. Refer to Section 017900 "Demonstration and
Training."
**END OF SECTION 233600**
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233600 - 5
SECTION 233713
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, AND GRILLES
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Related Sections:
1.
1.3
Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire dampers and volume-control dampers not
integral to diffusers, registers, and grilles.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, include the following:
1.
2.
Data Sheet: Indicate materials of construction, finish, and mounting details; and
performance data including throw and drop, static-pressure drop, and noise ratings.
Diffuser, Register, and Grille Schedule: Indicate drawing designation, room location,
quantity, model number, size, and accessories furnished.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DIFFUSER SCHEDULE
A.
Ceiling Diffuser, Type CD:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Air Systems Components; Krueger Div., Model 5SH.
Anemostat Products; Dynamics Corp. of America, Model XDF.
Carnes Co. Inc., Model SAFA.
Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Tuttle & Bailey Div., Model AME.
Titus, Model TDC-AA.
Material: Aluminum.
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
Duct Connection: Square.
Maximum Noise-Criterion Rating: NC 30 or as indicated.
Face Style: Square.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,
AND GRILLES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233713 - 1
7.
8.
9.
10.
Mounting: Surface, overlapping margin.
Pattern: Fixed, 4 way or as indicated, removable core.
Dampers: Opposed blade.
Accessories: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
B.
Panel Ceiling Diffuser, Type PCD:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Air Systems Components; Krueger Div., Model 5SH.
Anemostat Products; Dynamics Corp. of America, Model XDP.
Carnes Co. Inc., Model SATA
Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Tuttle & Bailey Div., Model AMF.
Titus, Model TDC-AA.
Material: Aluminum.
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
Duct Connection: Square.
Maximum Noise Criterion Rating: NC 30 or as indicated.
Face Style: Square panel.
Mounting: Lay in.
Pattern: Fixed, 4 way, or as indicated, removable core.
Dampers: Opposed blade.
Accessories: Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
C.
Operating keys
Square-to-round neck adapter.
Throw reducing vanes.
Operating keys.
Square-to-round neck adapter.
Throw reducing vanes.
VAV Slot Diffuser, Type VSD:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Anemostat Products; Dynamics Corp. of America, Model SLSD.
Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div., Model 35BD.
York International Corp., Model TLD.
Material: Steel.
Finish: Baked enamel, white, face and frame.
Maximum Noise-Criterion Rating: NC 35.
Face Style: Linear.
Mounting: Lay in (2x2 or 2x4) or plaster frame, as required for application.
Pattern: Fixed linear slots in one or two directions, as indicated.
Accessories: Minimum ½-inch thick acoustically lined steel plenum with duct inlet
collar.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,
AND GRILLES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233713 - 2
D.
VAV Slot Return, Type VSR:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.2
Anemostat Products; Dynamics Corp. of America, Model SLSR.
Carrier Corp.; Carrier Air Conditioning Div., Model 35BD.
York International Corp., Model TLD.
Application: Matching return unit, for use with VAV slot diffuser (Type VSD).
Material: Steel.
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
Accessories: Acoustically lined steel plenum.
REGISTER SCHEDULE
A.
Return Register, Exhaust Register, Types RR, ER:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
2.3
Air Systems Components; Krueger Div., Model EGC-5.
Anemostat Products; Dynamics Corp. of America, Model GC50.
Carnes Co. Inc., Model RWPAF.
Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Tuttle & Bailey Div., Model CRE507.
Titus, Model 50F.
Material: Aluminum.
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
Face Blade Arrangement: 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch eggcrate style.
Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.
Mounting: Countersunk screw.
Damper Type: Adjustable opposed-blade assembly.
Accessories: Plaster frame as required.
GRILLE SCHEDULE
A.
Return Grille, Transfer Grille, Types RG, TG:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Air Systems Components; Krueger Div., Model EGC-5.
Anemostat Products; Dynamics Corp. of America, Model GC5.
Carnes Co. Inc., Model RAPAF.
Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Tuttle & Bailey Div., Model CRE500.
Titus, Model 50F.
Material: Aluminum.
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
Face Blade Arrangement: 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch by 1/2 inch eggcrate style.
Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.
Mounting: Countersunk screw.
Accessories: Plaster frame as required.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,
AND GRILLES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233713 - 3
B.
Soffit Exhaust Grille, Type SEG:
1.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.4
Air Systems Components; Krueger Div.
Anemostat Products; Dynamics Corp. of America, Model X35HD.
Carnes Co. Inc.
Hart & Cooley, Inc.; Tuttle & Bailey Div.
Titus.
Material: Aluminum.
Finish: Baked enamel, white.
Face Blade Arrangement: Fixed horizontal, 45 deg. deflection at 1/2-inch spacing.
Frame: 1-1/4 inches wide.
Mounting: Concealed.
Accessories: Plaster frame, insect screen.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Verification of Performance: Rate diffusers, registers, and grilles according to ASHRAE 70,
"Method of Testing for Rating the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets."
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine areas where diffusers, registers, and grilles are to be installed for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
equipment.
B.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles level and plumb.
B.
Ceiling-Mounted Outlets and Inlets: Drawings indicate general arrangement of ducts, fittings,
and accessories. Air outlet and inlet locations have been indicated to achieve design
requirements for air volume, noise criteria, airflow pattern, throw, and pressure drop. Make
final locations where indicated, as much as practical. For units installed in lay-in ceiling panels,
locate units in the center of panel. Where architectural features or other items conflict with
installation, notify Architect for a determination of final location.
C.
Install diffusers, registers, and grilles with airtight connections to ducts and to allow service and
maintenance of dampers, air extractors, and fire dampers.
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,
AND GRILLES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233713 - 4
3.3
ADJUSTING
A.
After installation, adjust diffusers, registers, and grilles to air patterns indicated, or as directed,
before starting air balancing.
**END OF SECTION 233713**
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS,
AND GRILLES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
233713 - 5
SECTION 260500
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following basic electrical materials and methods to complement other
Division 26 Sections:
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.3
Non-shrink grout for equipment installations.
Electrical demolition.
Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
Touchup painting and finishing.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.4
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate chases, slots, inserts, sleeves, and openings with general construction work and
arrange in building structure during progress of construction to facilitate the electrical
installations that follow.
1.
Set inserts and sleeves in poured-in-place concrete, masonry work, and other structural
components as they are constructed.
B.
Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient
flow of the Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning.
C.
Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by other trades.
1.
Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260500 - 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
GROUT
A.
Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B.
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Characteristics:
Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout,
nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous, and recommended for interior and exterior
applications.
Design Mix: 5000-psi, 28-day compressive strength.
Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.
TOUCHUP PAINT
A.
For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer.
C.
For Non-equipment Surfaces: Matching type and color of undamaged, existing adjacent finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Headroom Maintenance: If mounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,
arrange and install components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom.
B.
Materials and Components: Install level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other
building systems and components, unless otherwise indicated.
C.
Equipment: Install to facilitate service, maintenance, and repair or replacement of components.
Connect for ease of disconnecting, with minimum interference with other installations.
D.
Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope.
3.2
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
3.3
Firestop: Seal annular space for all conduit penetrations with firestopping materials. Refer to
Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping" for materials.
DEMOLITION
A.
Protect existing electrical equipment and installations indicated to remain. If damaged or
disturbed in the course of the Work, remove damaged portions and install new products of equal
capacity, quality, and functionality.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260500 - 2
B.
Accessible Work: Remove exposed electrical equipment and installations, indicated to be
demolished, in their entirety.
C.
Abandoned Work: Cut and remove buried raceway and wiring, indicated to be abandoned in
place, 2 inches below the surface of adjacent construction. Cap raceways and patch surface to
match existing finish.
D.
Unless indicated otherwise, remove demolished material from Project site.
coordinate with Owner all material or equipment Owner wishes to retain.
E.
Disconnect, remove, store, clean, reinstall, reconnect, and make operational components
indicated for relocation.
3.4
Confirm and
CUTTING AND PATCHING
A.
Cut, channel, chase, and drill floors, walls, partitions, ceilings, and other surfaces required to
permit electrical installations. Perform cutting by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
B.
Repair and refinish disturbed finish materials and other surfaces to match adjacent undisturbed
surfaces. Install new fireproofing where existing firestopping has been disturbed. Repair and
refinish materials and other surfaces by skilled mechanics of trades involved.
3.5
GROUTING
A.
Install nonmetallic nonshrink grout for electrical equipment base bearing surfaces, other
equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
B.
Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout.
C.
Provide forms for placement of grout, as required.
D.
Avoid air entrapment when placing grout.
E.
Place grout to completely fill equipment bases.
F.
Place grout around anchors.
G.
Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect installed components for damage and faulty work, including the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Supporting devices for electrical components.
Electrical demolition.
Cutting and patching for electrical construction.
Touchup painting.
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260500 - 3
3.7
TOUCHUP PAINTING AND FINISHING
A.
Touchup: Comply with requirements in Division 09 painting Sections for cleaning and touchup
painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint on miscellaneous
metal.
B.
Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply
galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.
C.
Refinish and touch up paint.
1.
2.
3.
4.
3.8
Clean damaged and disturbed areas and apply primer, intermediate, and finish coats to
suit the degree of damage at each location.
Follow paint manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation and for timing
and application of successive coats.
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A.
On completion of installation, including outlets, fittings, and devices, inspect exposed finish.
Remove burrs, dirt, paint spots, and construction debris.
B.
Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings, finishes,
and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
3.9
ELECTRICAL INSPECTION
A.
Schedule an inspection of the electrical system. Electrical inspection shall be performed by the
authorities having jurisdiction.
**END OF SECTION 260500**
COMMON WORK RESULTS
FOR ELECTRICAL
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260500 - 4
SECTION 260519
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes building conductors and cables and associated connectors, splices, and
terminations for wiring systems rated 600 V and less.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labeling materials.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: For electronic cables.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Field quality-control test reports.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
1.7
Deliver conductors and cables according to NEMA WC 26.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of cables with other installations.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
July 29, 2014
260519 - 1
B.
Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and as
approved by Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Conductors and Cables:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Connectors for Conductors and Cables:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
AFC Cable Systems, Inc.
AMP Incorporated/Tyco International.
Hubbell/Anderson.
O-Z/Gedney; EGS Electrical Group LLC.
3M Company; Electrical Products Division.
Electronic Cables for Fire Alarm Systems:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
American Insulated Wire Corp.; a Leviton Company.
General Cable Corporation.
Senator Wire & Cable Company.
Southwire Company.
Commscope.
Cooper Industries; Belden Division.
West Penn.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
UL-listed building conductors and cables. Refer to Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation
Applications" Article for insulation type, cable construction, and ratings. Use single
(individual) conductors unless otherwise indicated.
B.
Conductor Material: Copper complying with NEMA WC 5; solid conductor for No. 10 AWG
and smaller, stranded for No. 8 AWG and larger.
C.
Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN complying with NEMA WC 5.
2.3
CONNECTORS AND SPLICES
A.
Description: UL-listed, factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating,
material, type, and class for application and service indicated. Comply with Project's
installation requirements and as specified in Part 3 "Conductor and Insulation Applications"
Article.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
July 29, 2014
260519 - 2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
3.2
Examine raceways and building finishes to receive conductors and cables for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of
conductors and cables. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have
been corrected.
CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS
A.
Feeders: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors (rated 600 volts, 90 deg C dry, 75 deg C wet),
in raceway.
B.
Branch Circuits:
raceway).
C.
Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections:
Suitable for use in damp and wet locations.
D.
Fire Alarm Circuits: Power-limited, fire-protective, signaling circuit cable and/or Type THHNTHWN, in raceway. All conductors shall be of size, quantity, and type as recommended by
equipment supplier.
E.
Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN, single conductors (rated 600 volts, 90 deg C
dry, 75 deg C wet), in raceway.
F.
Class 2 Control Circuits: Size, type, and quantity of conductors as recommended by equipment
supplier, in raceway where indicated. Plenum rated cabling where conductors are not required
to be installed in raceway.
3.3
Type THHN-THWN (rated 600 volts, 90 deg C dry, 75 deg C wet), in
Type SOW, extra-hard service cord.
INSTALLATION
A.
Install conductors and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and
NECA's "Standard of Installation."
B.
Conceal all conduit in finished spaces. In unfinished spaces, conceal all conduit to the highest
extent possible.
1.
All lighting, power, control, and fire alarm cabling shall be installed in raceway.
C.
Pull Conductors: Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary;
compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's
recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.
Pull cables
simultaneously if more than one is being installed in same raceway.
D.
Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips, that will
not damage cables or raceway.
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
July 29, 2014
260519 - 3
E.
Remove existing conductors from raceway before pulling in new conductors and cables.
Existing raceways can only be reused where indicated; all other raceways shall be new.
F.
Support cables according to Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems."
G.
Seal around cables penetrating fire-rated elements according to Section 260500 "Common
Work Results for Electrical."
H.
Identify and color-code conductors and cables according to Section 260553 "Identification for
Electrical Systems."
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B, as applicable.
B.
Conductor Splices: Keep to a minimum (branch circuits only).
permitted. Splices are not permitted for electronic cables.
C.
Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent
or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors.
D.
Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet, with at least 12 inches of slack. Connect
outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and as instructed by manufacturer.
E.
Electronic Cables: Bond shields and drain conductors to ground at only one point in each
circuit.
3.5
Feeder splices are not
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Testing: Perform the following field quality-control testing:
1.
2.
After installing conductors and cables and before electrical circuitry has been energized,
test for compliance with requirements.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection stated in NETA ATS,
Section 7.3.2. Certify compliance with test parameters.
B.
Electronic Cable Testing Procedures: Inspect for physical damage and test cable for continuity
and shorts. Use time-domain reflectometer with strip-chart recording capability and anomaly
resolution to within 12 inches in runs up to 1,000 feet in length. Test cable segments for faulty
connectors, terminations, and the integrity of the cable and its component parts.
C.
Correct malfunctioning conductors and cables at Project site, where possible, and retest to
demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units and retest.
**END OF SECTION 260519**
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
July 29, 2014
260519 - 4
SECTION 260526
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements
specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in
other Sections.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
B.
Comply with UL 467 for grounding and bonding materials and equipment.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Grounding Conductors, Cables, Connectors, and Rods:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
i.
j.
k.
Chance/Hubbell.
Copperweld Corp.
Dossert Corp.
Erico Inc.; Electrical Products Group.
Framatome Connectors/Burndy Electrical.
Ideal Industries, Inc.
Kearney/Cooper Power Systems.
Korns: C. C. Korns Co.; Division of Robroy Industries.
O-Z/Gedney Co.; a business of the EGS Electrical Group.
Raco, Inc.; Division of Hubbell.
Thomas & Betts, Electrical.
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260526- 1
2.2
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
For insulated conductors, comply with Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
B.
Material: Copper.
C.
Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation.
D.
Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:
1.
2.
3.
2.3
Bonding Cable: 28 kcmil, 14 strands of No. 17 AWG copper conductor, 1/4 inch in
diameter.
Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.
Bonding Jumper: Bare copper tape, braided bare copper conductors, terminated with
copper ferrules; 1-5/8 inches wide and 1/16 inch thick.
CONNECTOR PRODUCTS
A.
Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467; listed for use for specific types, sizes, and combinations of
conductors and connected items.
B.
Bolted Connectors: Bolted-pressure-type connectors, or compression type.
C.
Welded Connectors: Exothermic-welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's
written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact
with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
B.
In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
C.
Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for connections to structural steel and for underground
connections.
D.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps.
3.2
EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A.
Comply with NFPA 70, Article 250, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding
conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by NFPA 70
are indicated.
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260526- 2
B.
Install insulated equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and branch circuits.
C.
Isolated Equipment Enclosure Circuits: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit
or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic raceway fitting
listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure, and install a separate
equipment grounding conductor. Isolate equipment grounding conductor from raceway and
from panelboard grounding terminals. Terminate at equipment grounding conductor terminal of
the applicable derived system or service, unless otherwise indicated.
D.
Air-Duct Equipment Circuits: Install an equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted
electrical devices operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners and heaters. Bond
conductor to each unit and to air duct.
E.
Water Heater, Heat-Tracing, and Antifrost Heating Cables (As Applicable): Install a separate
equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater, heat-tracing, and antifrost heating
cable. Bond conductor to heater units, piping, connected equipment, and components.
F.
Signal and Communication Systems (As Applicable): For telephone, data, cable TV, fire alarm,
security, paging, sound, and all other communication systems, provide No. 4 AWG minimum
insulated grounding conductor in raceway from grounding electrode system to each service
location, terminal cabinet, wiring closet, and central equipment location.
1.
3.3
Terminal Cabinets: Terminate grounding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
INSTALLATION
A.
Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless otherwise
indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to
strain, impact, or damage.
B.
Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration isolation
hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use exothermic-welded
connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type connection is required; then, use a
bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic structure taking care not to penetrate any
adjacent parts. Install straps only in locations accessible for maintenance.
C.
Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air ducts to equipment grounding conductors of
associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding
straps.
D.
Where metal sleeves or metal conduits are used for mechanical protection of piping or
grounding conductors, bond the metal sleeves or metal conduits at both ends. Provide bonding
jumpers/straps on all metal piping systems at valves/fittings/joints. Provide bonding
jumpers/straps at valves/fittings/joints unless the pipe couplings are UL listed as a grounding
and bonding source. Coordinate with applicable trades.
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260526- 3
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select
connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct
contact will be galvanically compatible.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make
contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical
clamps.
Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and
mechanical clamps.
Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future
penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B.
Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds that
are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable.
C.
Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use pressure-type
grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with
winged pressure-type connectors.
D.
Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal housings
without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each conduit with a
grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to grounding
bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically noncontinuous conduits at entrances and exits
with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
E.
Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals according to
manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not
indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B, as applicable.
F.
Compression-Type Connections: Use hydraulic compression tools to provide correct
circumferential pressure for compression connectors. Use tools and dies recommended by
connector manufacturer. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a
visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on grounding conductor.
G.
Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or
grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture penetration of
insulation and cable.
**END OF SECTION 260526**
GROUNDING AND BONDING
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260526- 4
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 260529
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes hangers and supports for electrical equipment and systems.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
RMC: Rigid metal conduit.
1.4
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A.
Design supports for multiple raceways capable of supporting combined weight of supported
systems and its contents.
B.
Design equipment supports capable of supporting combined operating weight of supported
equipment and connected systems and components.
1.5
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural
Welding Code - Steel."
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SUPPORT, ANCHORAGE, AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A.
Material: Cold-formed steel, with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having
jurisdiction.
B.
Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260529 - 1
C.
Steel Slotted Support Systems: Comply with MFMA-4, factory-fabricated components for field
assembly.
1.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Allied Tube & Conduit.
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
ERICO International Corporation.
GS Metals Corp.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Unistrut; Tyco International, Ltd.
Metallic Coatings: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and applied according to
MFMA-4.
Nonmetallic Coatings: Manufacturer's standard PVC, polyurethane, or polyester coating
applied according to MFMA-4.
Painted Coatings: Manufacturer's standard painted coating applied according to
MFMA-4.
Channel Dimensions: Selected for applicable load criteria.
D.
Raceway and Cable Supports: As described in NECA 1 and NECA 101.
E.
Conduit and Cable Support Devices: Steel and malleable-iron hangers, clamps, and associated
fittings, designed for types and sizes of raceway or cable to be supported.
F.
Support for Conductors in Vertical Conduit: Factory-fabricated assembly consisting of
threaded body and insulating wedging plug or plugs for non-armored electrical conductors or
cables in riser conduits. Plugs shall have number, size, and shape of conductor gripping pieces
as required to suit individual conductors or cables supported. Body shall be malleable iron.
G.
Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.
H.
Structural Steel for Fabricated Supports and Restraints:
shapes, and bars; black and galvanized.
I.
Mounting, Anchoring, and Attachment Components: Items for fastening electrical items or
their supports to building surfaces include the following:
1.
ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates,
Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Threaded-steel stud, for use in hardened portland cement
concrete, steel, or wood, with tension, shear, and pullout capacities appropriate for
supported loads and building materials where used.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.; Masterset Fastening Systems Unit.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260529 - 2
2.
Mechanical-Expansion Anchors: Insert-wedge-type, zinc-coated or stainless steel, for
use in hardened portland cement concrete with tension, shear, and pullout capacities
appropriate for supported loads and building materials in which used.
a.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one
of the following:
1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.2
Cooper B-Line, Inc.; a division of Cooper Industries.
Empire Tool and Manufacturing Co., Inc.
Hilti Inc.
ITW Ramset/Red Head; a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc.
MKT Fastening, LLC.
Concrete Inserts: Steel or malleable-iron, slotted support system units similar to MSS
Type 18; complying with MFMA-4 or MSS SP-58.
Clamps for Attachment to Steel Structural Elements: MSS SP-58, type suitable for
attached structural element.
Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, and high strength. Comply with
ASTM A 325.
Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.
Hanger Rods: Threaded steel.
FABRICATED METAL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT ASSEMBLIES
A.
Description: Welded or bolted, structural-steel shapes, shop or field fabricated to fit dimensions
of supported equipment.
B.
Materials: Comply with requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for steel shapes
and plates.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
APPLICATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for application of hangers and supports for electrical
equipment and systems except if requirements in this Section are stricter.
B.
Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials, U-channel system components.
C.
Dry Locations: Steel materials.
D.
Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.
E.
Maximum Support Spacing and Minimum Hanger Rod Size for Raceway: Space supports for
EMT and RMC as scheduled in NECA 1, where its Table 1 lists maximum spacings less than
stated in NFPA 70. Minimum rod size shall be 1/4 inch in diameter. Use 3/8-inch or 1/2-inch
diameter or larger rods where required by load.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260529 - 3
F.
Multiple Raceways or Cables: Install trapeze-type supports fabricated with steel slotted support
system, sized so capacity can be increased by at least 25 percent (or as indicated on the
Drawings) in future without exceeding specified design load limits.
1.
3.2
Secure raceways and cables to these supports with two-bolt conduit clamps.
SUPPORT INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with NECA 1 and NECA 101 for installation requirements except as specified in this
Article.
B.
Strength of Support Assemblies: Where not indicated, select sizes of components so strength
will be adequate to carry present and future static loads within specified loading limits, times a
safety factor of at least 4. Minimum static design load used for strength determination shall be
weight of supported components plus 200 lb.
C.
Provide support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components.
D.
Provide individual and multiple raceway hangers and riser clamps to support raceways. Provide
U-bolts, clamps, attachments, and other hardware necessary for hanger assemblies and for
securing hanger rods and conduits.
E.
Support parallel runs of horizontal raceways together on trapeze- or bracket-type hangers.
F.
Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or clamps.
G.
Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried
entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
H.
Simultaneously install vertical conductor supports with conductors.
I.
Separately support cast boxes that are threaded to raceways and used for fixture support.
Support sheet-metal boxes directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. If bar hangers
are used, attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of the box and support the raceway with an
approved fastener not more than 24 inches from the box.
J.
Provide metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnect switches, motor
controllers, control enclosures, pull and junction boxes, transformers, and other devices unless
components are mounted directly to structural elements of adequate strength.
K.
Provide sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls unless coredrilled holes are used. Install sleeves for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and firerated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during
erection of concrete and masonry walls.
L.
Mounting and Anchorage of Surface-Mounted Equipment and Components: Anchor and fasten
electrical items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods
unless otherwise indicated by code:
1.
2.
To Wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.
To New Concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260529 - 4
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
M.
3.3
To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor
fasteners on solid masonry units.
To Existing Concrete: Expansion anchor fasteners.
To Steel: Welded threaded studs complying with AWS D1.1/D1.1M, with lock washers
and nuts or spring-tension clamps.
To Light Steel: Sheet metal screws.
Items Mounted on Hollow Walls and Nonstructural Building Surfaces: Mount cabinets,
panelboards, disconnect switches, motor controllers, control enclosures, pull and junction
boxes, transformers, and other devices on slotted-channel racks attached to substrate.
Drill holes for expansion anchors in concrete at locations and to depths that avoid reinforcing
bars.
INSTALLATION OF FABRICATED METAL SUPPORTS
A.
Comply with installation requirements in Section 055000 "Metal Fabrications" for sitefabricated metal supports.
B.
Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation
to support and anchor electrical materials and equipment.
C.
Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M.
**END OF SECTION 260529**
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260529 - 5
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 260533
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes raceways, fittings, boxes, and enclosures/cabinets for electrical wiring.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems" for supports and anchors.
Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for identification products.
Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for devices installed in boxes.
DEFINITIONS
A.
EMT: Electrical metallic tubing.
B.
FMC: Flexible metal conduit.
C.
LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Product Data: For nonmetallic tubing (innerduct) and hinged-cover enclosures/cabinets.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260533 - 1
1.6
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, enclosures/cabinets, and suspension
system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light
fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following
requirements apply for product selection:
1.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
manufacturers specified.
METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Electri-Flex Co.
Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div.
LTV Steel Tubular Products Company.
Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex.
O-Z Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
Wheatland Tube Co.
B.
Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1.
C.
EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3.
1.
Fittings: Compression type.
D.
FMC: Zinc-coated steel.
E.
LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket.
F.
Fittings: NEMA FB 1; compatible with conduit and tubing materials.
G.
Expansion Fittings (for all conduits that cross building expansion joints): Sleeves with fittings
to provide for telescoping of the conduits into the sleeves with 8-inch movement. Galvanized or
cadmium finish. Provide copper bonding jumpers.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260533 - 2
2.3
NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING
A.
Indoor Corrugated Fiber Innerduct: Nonmetallic tubing, plenum rated.
1.
Manufacturers:
a.
b.
2.4
Carlon/Pyramid Industries, Inc., "PLENUM-GARD."
Endot Industries, Endocor/PL Plenum Innerduct.
CONDUIT BODIES AND FITTINGS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
2.5
American Electric; Construction Materials Group.
Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries.
Emerson Electric Co.; Appleton Electric Co.
Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
BOXES, ENCLOSURES, AND CABINETS
A.
Manufacturers:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Cooper Crouse-Hinds; Div. of Cooper Industries, Inc.
Emerson/General Signal; Appleton Electric Company.
Erickson Electrical Equipment Co.
Hoffman.
Hubbell, Inc.; Killark Electric Manufacturing Co.
O-Z/Gedney; Unit of General Signal.
RACO; Division of Hubbell, Inc.
Robroy Industries, Inc.; Enclosure Division.
Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co.
Thomas & Betts Corporation.
Woodhead, Daniel Company; Woodhead Industries, Inc. Subsidiary.
B.
Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
C.
Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, with gasketed cover.
D.
Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA OS 1.
E.
Cast-Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: NEMA FB 1, cast aluminum with gasketed cover.
F.
Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1 (or as required for application), with continuous
hinge cover and flush latch.
1.
Metal Enclosures: Steel, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260533 - 3
G.
2.6
Cabinets: NEMA 250, Type 1 (or as required for application), galvanized steel box with
removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's
standard enamel. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. Key latch to
match panelboards. Include metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltages.
Include accessory feet where required for freestanding equipment.
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Finish: For enclosure or cabinet components, provide manufacturer's standard gray paint
applied to factory-assembled enclosures/cabinets before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
RACEWAY APPLICATION
A.
Outdoors: Use the following wiring methods:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Exposed: Rigid steel conduit.
Concealed: Rigid steel conduit.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): LFMC.
Boxes, Cabinets, and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 3R, or Type 4, as required for
application.
Indoors: Use the following wiring methods:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Exposed, Unfinished Areas, Dry Locations: EMT.
Exposed, Finished Areas: Exposed raceway is not permitted in finished areas.
Concealed (in Walls, Columns, or Above Ceilings): EMT.
Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Hydraulic, Pneumatic,
Electric Solenoid, or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC; except use LFMC in damp or wet
locations.
Damp or Wet Locations: Rigid steel conduit.
Fiber Optic Data Backbone Cabling: Plenum rated, corrugated indoor fiber innerduct or
raceway as indicated for applicable indoor wiring methods. Refer to Section 271300
"Voice and Data Communications Cabling" for permitted uses.
Data / Voice / Sound Masking-Paging / Audio Visual-Sound / Cable Television / Clock /
Integrated Access Control-Security System Device Conduit Stubs: EMT. Provide
bushings on the cut end of all conduits to prevent cable damage.
Boxes, Exposed, Dry Locations: Cast-metal boxes.
Boxes, Exposed, Damp or Wet Locations: Cast-metal boxes.
Boxes, Concealed, Dry Locations: Sheet metal boxes.
Cabinets and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except as follows and as required for
application:
a.
Damp or Wet Locations: NEMA 250, Type 4, stainless steel.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260533 - 4
C.
Outdoors or Indoors, Fire Alarm System: Raceway as indicated for applicable outdoor or
indoor wiring method.
D.
HVAC Control Wiring and Wiring for Sound Masking-Paging / Audio Visual-Sound / Cable
Television / Clock / Integrated Access Control-Security / Lighting Control: Use the following
wiring methods:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Outdoor Wiring, Exposed or Concealed (24VAC or 24VDC, Maximum): Raceway as
indicated for applicable outdoor or indoor wiring method.
Indoor Wiring, Exposed or Concealed above Nonaccessible Ceilings (24VAC or 24VDC,
Maximum): Raceway as indicated for applicable outdoor or indoor wiring method.
Indoor Wiring, Concealed in Wall and above Accessible Ceilings (24VAC or 24VDC,
Maximum): Raceway as indicated for applicable indoor wiring method from wallmounted device outlet box to above accessible ceiling. (Plenum rated cabling for all
conductors not in raceway.)
Wiring, Exposed or Concealed (Greater than 24VAC or 24VDC): Raceway as indicated
for applicable outdoor or indoor wiring methods.
Provide bushings on the cut end of all conduits to prevent cable damage.
All conductors not in raceway shall be plenum rated.
E.
Voice and Data Communications Cabling: As indicated in this Section and Section 271300
"Voice and Data Communications Cabling."
F.
Minimum Raceway Size: 3/4-inch trade size, or as indicated.
G.
Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Keep raceways at least 6 inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes.
Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.
B.
Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.
C.
Support raceways as specified in Section 260529 "Hangers and Supports for Electrical
Systems."
D.
Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways.
E.
Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs or concrete pads or
foundations. All stub-ups shall be rigid steel. Arrange so curved portions of bends are not
visible above the finished slab or pad or foundation.
F.
Make bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep
straight legs of offsets parallel, unless otherwise indicated.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260533 - 5
G.
Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls, ceilings, and floors, unless otherwise
indicated. Conceal all outlet boxes, device boxes, and conduit in finished spaces. In unfinished
spaces, all outlet and device boxes shall be recessed to the highest extent possible and all
conduit shall be concealed to the highest extent possible.
1.
H.
Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in middle 1/3 of slab thickness where practical and leave
at least 2 inches of concrete cover.
1.
2.
3.
I.
Install concealed raceways with a minimum of bends in the shortest practical distance,
considering type of building construction and obstructions, unless otherwise indicated.
Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete
placement.
Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete.
Run conduit larger than 1-inch trade size parallel or at right angles to main reinforcement.
Where at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.
Install exposed raceways parallel or at right angles to nearby surfaces or structural members and
follow surface contours as much as possible.
1.
2.
Run parallel or banked raceways together on common supports.
Make parallel bends in parallel or banked runs. Use factory elbows only where elbows
can be installed parallel; otherwise, provide field bends for parallel raceways.
J.
Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools.
K.
Terminations:
1.
2.
Where raceways are terminated with locknuts and bushings, align raceways to enter
squarely and install locknuts with dished part against box. Use two locknuts, one inside
and one outside box.
Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs, screw raceways or fittings tightly
into hub so end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used,
align raceways so coupling is square to box; tighten chase nipple so no threads are
exposed.
L.
Install pull wires in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not
less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.
M.
Fire Alarm, Security, Data, Telephone, Signal, Sound Masking-Paging, Audio Visual-Sound,
Cable Television System Raceways, Etc., 2-Inch Trade Size and Smaller: In addition to above
requirements, install raceways in maximum lengths of 150 feet and with a maximum of two
90-degree bends or equivalent. Separate lengths with pull or junction boxes where necessary to
comply with these requirements.
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260533 - 6
N.
Install raceway sealing fittings according to manufacturer's written instructions. Locate fittings
at suitable, approved, and accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound.
For concealed raceways, install each fitting in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having
a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the
following points:
1.
2.
Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated
spaces.
Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.
O.
Stub-up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding
equipment. Install with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with
finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; FMC may be used
6 inches above the floor. Install screwdriver-operated, threaded plugs flush with floor for future
equipment connections.
P.
Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 72 inches of flexible conduit for equipment subject to
vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for all motors. Use LFMC in damp or wet
locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections.
Q.
Install hinged-cover enclosures and cabinets plumb. Support at each corner.
R.
Provide expansion fittings for all conduits that cross building expansion joints. Conduits shall
cross building expansion joints at right angles. Free ends of conduits shall be installed in
accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.3
PROTECTION
A.
Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes, and cabinets are
without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.
1.
2.
3.4
Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by
manufacturer.
Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by
manufacturer.
CLEANING
A.
After completing installation of exposed, factory-finished raceways and boxes, inspect exposed
finishes and repair damaged finishes.
**END OF SECTION 260533**
RACEWAYS AND BOXES
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260533 - 7
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 260553
IDENTIFICATION
FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes electrical identification materials and devices required to comply with
ANSI C2, NFPA 70, OSHA standards, and authorities having jurisdiction.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Schedule of Nomenclature: An index of electrical equipment and system components used in
identification signs, labels, and nameplates.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Comply with ANSI C2.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
Comply with ANSI A13.1 and NFPA 70 for color-coding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
RACEWAY AND CABLE LABELS
A.
Comply with ANSI A13.1, Table 3, for minimum size of letters for legend and for minimum
length of color field for each raceway and cable size.
1.
2.
Color: Black letters on orange field.
Legend: Indicates voltage and service.
B.
Adhesive Labels: Preprinted, flexible, self-adhesive vinyl with legend overlaminated with a
clear, weather- and chemical-resistant coating.
C.
Pretensioned, Wraparound Plastic Sleeves: Flexible, preprinted, color-coded, acrylic band sized
to suit the diameter of the line it identifies and arranged to stay in place by pretensioned
gripping action when placed in position.
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260553 - 1
D.
Colored Adhesive Tape: Self-adhesive vinyl tape not less than 3 mils thick by 1 to 2 inches
wide.
E.
Tape Markers: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth, self-adhesive, wraparound type with preprinted numbers
and letters.
F.
Aluminum, Wraparound Marker Bands: Bands cut from 0.014-inch-thick aluminum sheet, with
stamped or embossed legend, and fitted with slots or ears for permanently securing around wire
or cable jacket or around groups of conductors.
G.
Plasticized Card-Stock Tags: Vinyl cloth with preprinted and field-printed legends. Orange
background, unless otherwise indicated, with eyelet for fastener.
H.
Aluminum-Faced, Card-Stock Tags: Weather-resistant, 18-point minimum card stock faced on
both sides with embossable aluminum sheet, 0.002 inch thick, laminated with moisture-resistant
acrylic adhesive, punched for fasteners, and preprinted with legends to suit each application.
I.
Brass or Aluminum Tags: 2 by 2 by 0.05-inch metal tags with stamped legend, punched for
fastener.
2.2
NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS
A.
Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.
B.
Engraved Plastic Nameplates and Signs: Engraving stock, melamine plastic laminate, minimum
1/16 inch thick for signs up to 20 sq. in. and 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. Nameplates shall
consist of a minimum of two lines as follows: Line 1: Equipment Name (For Example:
"Panelboard 2DP1"); Line 2: System Voltage (For Example: "277/480V").
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Engraved legend with white letters on black face: 120/208V normal systems and
277/480V (or 480V) normal systems.
Engraved legend with white letters on red face: 120/208V life safety emergency systems
and 277/480V (or 480V) life safety emergency systems.
Engraved legend with white letters on orange face: 120/208V standby emergency
systems and 277/480V (or 480V) standby emergency systems.
Engraved legend with white letters on blue face: 120/208V optional standby emergency
systems and 277/480V (or 480V) optional standby emergency systems.
Punched or drilled for mechanical fasteners.
C.
Baked-Enamel Signs for Interior Use: Preprinted aluminum signs, punched or drilled for
fasteners, with colors, legend, and size required for the application. 1/4-inch grommets in
corners for mounting.
D.
Exterior, Metal-Backed, Butyrate Signs: Weather-resistant, nonfading, preprinted, celluloseacetate butyrate signs with 0.0396-inch galvanized-steel backing; and with colors, legend, and
size required for the application. 1/4-inch grommets in corners for mounting.
E.
Fasteners for Nameplates and Signs: Self-tapping, stainless-steel screws or No. 10/32,
stainless-steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260553 - 2
2.3
MISCELLANEOUS IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS
A.
Cable Ties: Fungus-inert, self-extinguishing, one-piece, self-locking, Type 6/6 nylon cable ties.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Minimum Width: 3/16 inch.
Tensile Strength: 50 lb minimum.
Temperature Range: Minus 40 to plus 185 deg F.
Color: According to color-coding.
Paint: Formulated for the type of surface and intended use.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Primer for Galvanized Metal: Single-component acrylic vehicle formulated for
galvanized surfaces.
Primer for Concrete Masonry Units: Heavy-duty-resin block filler.
Primer for Concrete: Clear, alkali-resistant, binder-type sealer.
Enamel: Silicone-alkyd or alkyd urethane as recommended by primer manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Identification Materials and Devices: Install at locations for most convenient viewing without
interference with operation and maintenance of equipment.
B.
Lettering, Colors, and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other
designations with corresponding designations in the Contract Documents or with those required
by codes and standards. Use consistent designations throughout Project.
C.
Sequence of Work: If identification is applied to surfaces that require finish, install
identification after completing finish work.
D.
Self-Adhesive (Raceway and Cable Labels) Identification Products: Clean surfaces before
applying.
E.
Install painted identification according to manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:
1.
2.
3.
F.
Clean surfaces of dust, loose material, and oily films before painting.
Prime surfaces using type of primer specified for surface.
Apply one intermediate and one finish coat of enamel.
Color Banding Exposed and Concealed Accessible Raceways: Band exposed and concealed
accessible raceways of the systems listed below:
1.
2.
Bands: Pretensioned, wraparound plastic sleeves; colored adhesive tape; or a
combination of both. Make each color band 2 inches wide, completely encircling
conduit, and place adjacent bands of two-color markings in contact, side by side.
Band Locations: At changes in direction, at penetrations of walls and floors, at 50-foot
maximum intervals in straight runs, and at 25-foot maximum intervals in congested areas.
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260553 - 3
3.
Apply the following colors to the systems listed below:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Fire Alarm System: Red.
Fire-Suppression Supervisory and Control System: Red and yellow.
Security System: Blue and yellow.
Mechanical and Electrical Supervisory System: Green and blue.
Emergency System: Orange.
Telecommunications System: Green and Yellow.
Control Wiring: Green and red.
G.
Caution Labels for Indoor Boxes and Enclosures for Power and Lighting: Install pressuresensitive, self-adhesive labels identifying system voltage with black letters on orange
background. Install on exterior of door or cover.
H.
Circuit Identification Labels on Boxes: Install labels externally.
1.
2.
3.
I.
Exposed Boxes: Pressure-sensitive, self-adhesive plastic label on cover.
Concealed Boxes: Plasticized card-stock tags.
Labeling Legend: Permanent, waterproof listing of panelboard and circuit number.
Color-Coding of Secondary Phase Conductors: Use the following colors for feeder and branchcircuit phase (including neutral and ground) conductors, and control wiring:
1.
2.
Existing Buildings or Systems: Color-code system shall match existing. If there is no
existing color-code system, provide color coding as indicated below.
Color-code 208/120-V and/or 240/120-V Conductors as follows: (Confirm with Owner
prior to performing color-coding.)
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
Color-code 480/277-V or 480-V Conductors as follows: (Confirm with Owner prior to
performing color-coding.)
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
4.
5.
Phase A: Black.
Phase B: Red.
Phase C: Blue.
Neutral: White.
Ground: Green.
Phase A: Brown.
Phase B: Orange.
Phase C: Yellow.
Neutral: Gray.
Ground: Green.
Color-code HVAC Control Wiring as follows (Confirm with Owner prior to performing
color-coding.): Red.
Color-code Control Wiring as follows (Confirm with Owner prior to performing colorcoding.):
a.
b.
c.
120-V Power Distribution Wiring (for Control Systems): Black.
Neutral: White.
Ground: Green.
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260553 - 4
d.
e.
f.
6.
Factory apply color the entire length of conductors, except the following field-applied,
color-coding methods may be used instead of factory-coded wire for sizes larger than
No. 10 AWG:
a.
b.
J.
2.
3.
3.
Conductors to Be Extended in the Future: Indicate source and circuit numbers.
Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each conductor with
source, voltage, circuit number, and phase. Use color-coding to identify circuits' voltage
and phase.
Multiple Control and Communication Circuits in the Same Enclosure: Identify each
conductor by its system and circuit designation. Use a consistent system of tags, colorcoding, or cable marking tape.
Apply warning, caution, and instruction signs as follows:
1.
M.
Legend: 1/4-inch-steel letter and number stamping or embossing with legend
corresponding to indicated circuit designations.
Tag Fasteners: Nylon cable ties.
Band Fasteners: Integral ears.
Apply identification to conductors as follows:
1.
2.
L.
Colored, pressure-sensitive plastic tape in half-lapped turns for a distance of
6 inches from terminal points and in boxes where splices or taps are made. Apply
last two turns of tape with no tension to prevent possible unwinding. Use 1-inchwide tape in colors specified. Adjust tape bands to avoid obscuring cable
identification markings.
Colored cable ties applied in groups of three ties of specified color to each wire at
each terminal or splice point starting 3 inches from the terminal and spaced
3 inches apart. Apply with a special tool or pliers, tighten to a snug fit, and cut off
excess length.
Power-Circuit Identification, Branch Circuits, and Associated Junction Boxes: Metal tags or
aluminum, wraparound marker bands for cables, feeders, and power circuits in pull and junction
boxes and electrical rooms. Indicate source, equipment served, and voltage for power circuits.
Indicate source, circuit number(s), and voltage for branch circuits and associated junction
boxes.
1.
K.
120VAC Control Wiring: Red.
12VDC or 24VDC Control Wiring: Blue.
Interlock Wiring: Yellow.
Warnings, Cautions, and Instructions: Install to ensure safe operation and maintenance of
electrical systems and of items to which they connect. Install engraved plastic-laminated
instruction signs with approved legend where instructions are needed for system or
equipment operation. Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
Equipment Identification Labels: Engraved plastic laminate. Install on each unit of equipment.
Unless otherwise indicated, provide a single line of text with 1/2-inch-high lettering on 1-1/2inch-high label; where two lines of text are required, use labels 2 inches high. Use color coding
(to distinguish system voltages) as indicated in "Nameplates and Signs" Article. Apply
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260553 - 5
nameplate labels for each unit of the following categories of equipment using mechanical
fasteners:
Item
Panelboards, electrical cabinets, and
enclosures (including all existing
panelboards and new panelboards included
in the Work of this Project)
Access doors and panels for concealed
electrical items
Electrical switchboards
Emergency system boxes and enclosures
Motor control centers;
Each MCC compartment
Disconnect switches
Enclosed circuit breakers
Motor starters
Manual motor starters
Push-button stations
Emergency push-button stations
Contactors
Uninterruptible power supplies
Lighting controls and modular dimming
controls
Control devices
Ganged switches
Transformers
Enclosed bus plus-in units
Power-generating units
Fire alarm control panel and remote panels
Automatic transfer switches
Area protection system
Receptacles
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Nameplate Information
Equipment designation and system voltage
For Example: Panelboard 2DP1, 277/480V
Equipment served
Equipment designation and system voltage
For Example: EMSWBD, 277/480V
Source, circuit number, and system voltage
(i.e. 2LSLP1-1, 277V)
Motor Control Center: Equipment designation
(i.e. MCCB) and system voltage (i.e. 480V).
Individual Compartments: Information indicated
in "Nameplate" and "HP" columns of Motor
Control Center Schedule (i.e. AH-3: 15 HP).
Equipment designation, system voltage, and
equipment served
For Example: DS-10, 480V, CH-1
Equipment served
Equipment designation, system voltage, and
equipment served
For Example: CMS-1, 480V, Fan F-9
Equipment served and system voltage
Equipment served
"EMERGENCY STOP" and equipment served
Equipment designation (i.e. C-1) and equipment
served
Input voltage, output voltage, and capacity
(i.e. 480V-3PH-3W input; 120/208V-3PH-4W
output; 270KW-300KVA-0.9 p.f.)
Equipment description
Equipment served
Equipment served
Equipment designation (i.e. T-1), primary and
secondary voltages, and primary source
Equipment served and system voltage
(i.e. Panelboard 7LP1, 277/480V)
Equipment served
Equipment description
Equipment designation (i.e. ATS-LS) and system
(i.e. life safety, standby, or optional standby)
Equipment description
Source and circuit number (i.e.3RP5-27)
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260553 - 6
Integrated access control/security system
panel and emote panels
Sound masking and paging systems
Audio visual and sound systems
Cable television systems
Wireless data system
Clock system
N.
Equipment description
Equipment description
Equipment description
Equipment description
Equipment description
Equipment description
Panelboards:
Provide framed, typed circuit schedules with explicit description and
identification of items controlled by each individual breaker. Update at end of Project (after
load balancing) in a final typed version for each panelboard (all existing panelboards and new
panelboards included in the Work of this Project). Typed schedule shall indicate load(s) served,
room name(s), and room number(s), i.e. Lighting: Offices 100, 101; Receptacle: Office 200.
**END OF SECTION 260553**
IDENTIFICATION FOR
ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260553 - 7
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 260923
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following lighting control devices:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Time switches.
Outdoor photoelectric switches and relays.
Indoor occupancy sensors.
Indoor switch-box occupancy sensors.
Lighting contactors.
Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for manual light switches.
DEFINITIONS
A.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
B.
PIR: Passive infrared.
1.4
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show installation details for occupancy and light-level sensors.
1.
1.5
Interconnection diagrams showing field-installed wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Field quality-control test reports.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260923 - 1
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data:
maintenance manuals.
For each type of product to include in operation and
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain lighting control devices from a single source with total
responsibility for compatibility of lighting control system components.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
C.
Comply with 47 CFR 15, Subparts A and B, for Class A digital devices.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of ceiling-mounted devices with other construction that
penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, smoke
detectors, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
TIME SWITCHES
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Intermatic, Inc.
Paragon Electric Co.
TORK.
Electronic Time Switches: Electronic, solid-state programmable units with digital LED display;
complying with UL 917.
1.
2.
3.
Contact Configuration: As required for application.
Contact Rating: Two contacts, each rated 20-A ballast load, 120/277-V ac, unless
otherwise indicated.
Programming: Programming schedules and features as follows:
a.
b.
c.
Seven-day and full-year programming options (load control).
Seven-day programming uniquely programmable for weekdays and weekends.
Full-year programming uniquely programmable for holidays.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260923 - 2
d.
e.
f.
4.
5.
6.
2.2
Automatic daylight-savings-time adjustment.
Leap year adjustment.
Skip-a-day mode.
Battery Backup: For maintaining schedules and time clock for a minimum of five years.
Enclosure: NEMA 1, lockable.
Ambient Operating Temperature Range: Minus 20 deg F to 120 deg F.
OUTDOOR PHOTOELECTRIC SWITCHES AND RELAYS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Description: Solid state, with SPST or DPST dry contacts as required for application, rated to
operate connected load, relay, or contactor coils, or microprocessor input; and complying with
UL 773A.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C.
2.3
Intermatic, Inc.
Paragon Electric Co.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
TORK.
Light-Level Monitoring Range: 1.5 to 10 fc, with an adjustment for turn-on and turn-off
levels within that range, and a directional lens in front of photocell to prevent fixed light
sources from causing turn-off.
Time Delay: 15-second minimum, to prevent false operation.
Surge Protection: Metal-oxide varistor, complying with IEEE C62.41 for Category A1
locations.
Mounting: Twist lock complying with IEEE C136.10, with base-and-stem mounting or
stem-and-swivel mounting accessories as required to direct sensor to the north sky
exposure.
Outdoor Sealed Units: Weathertight housing, resistant to high temperatures and equipped
with sun-glare shield and ice preventer.
Control Relays: NEMA rated, 600VAC, with 10A replaceable, convertible contacts installed in
NEMA 250 enclosure, type as required for application. Square D, Class 8501, Type X.
INDOOR OCCUPANCY SENSORS, GENERAL
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Hubbell Building Automation, Inc./Hubbell.
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
Watt Stopper (The).
Source Limitations: Except for the dual-technology type switch-box sensors and PIR ceiling
sensors, all occupancy sensors (ceiling units and switch-box type) shall be provided by the same
manufacturer.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260923 - 3
2.4
INDOOR CEILING OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A.
General Description: Ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate relay unit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is occupied and
off when unoccupied; with a time delay for turning lights off, adjustable over a minimum
range of 15 seconds to 15 minutes.
Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL 773A.
Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
Power Supply Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20-A ballast load at 120- and 277-V ac,
for 13-A tungsten at 120-V ac, and for 1 hp at 120-V ac. Power supply to sensor shall be
24-V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by NFPA 70. UL listed for plenum
use.
Mounting:
a.
b.
c.
5.
B.
Detection Coverage: Detects occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft.
minimum, 2000 sq. ft. maximum (360-degree coverage) when mounted a maximum of
10'-0" above finished floor.
Dual-Technology Type (Ultrasonic and PIR): Ceiling mounting; detects occupancy by using a
combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. (Detects occupancy
by sensing a change in pattern of reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage and by sensing
a combination of heat and movement in area of coverage.) Utilize in rooms or spaces without
obstructions or partial height partitions.
1.
2.
E.
Detection Coverage: Refer to Occupancy Sensor Schedule on Drawings.
Ultrasonic Type: Ceiling mounting; detects occupancy by sensing a change in pattern of
reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage. Utilize in rooms or spaces with obstructions or
partial height partitions.
1.
D.
Indicator: LED, to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal
operation of the sensor.
PIR Type: Ceiling mounting; detect occupancy by sensing infrared energy changes between
background and a moving body in area of coverage. Utilize in rooms or spaces with ceiling
heights greater than 10'-0".
1.
C.
Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard electrical
enclosure.
Time-Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed behind hinged
door.
Operation: Turns lights on when both ultrasonic and PIR technologies detect occupancy.
Once lighting is turned on, detection by either technology will keep lights on.
Detection Coverage: Detects occupancy anywhere within a circular area of 1000 sq. ft.
(360-degree coverage) when mounted 8'-0" above finished floor.
Refer to Occupancy Sensor Schedule on Drawings.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260923 - 4
2.5
INDOOR SWITCH-BOX OCCUPANCY SENSORS
A.
PIR Type: Wall mounting; with integral power-switching contacts rated a minimum 800W at
120-V ac, suitable for incandescent light fixtures and fluorescent light fixtures with magnetic or
electronic ballasts; and rated a minimum 1200W at 277-V ac, suitable for fluorescent light
fixtures with magnetic or electronic ballasts. Provide with integral override switch.
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Dual-Technology Type (Ultrasonic and PIR): Wall mounting; detects occupancy by using a
combination of PIR and ultrasonic detection methods in area of coverage. (Detects occupancy
by sensing a change in pattern of reflected ultrasonic energy in area of coverage and by sensing
a combination of heat and movement in area of coverage.) Rated a minimum of 600W at
120-V ac and 1200W at 277-V ac.
1.
2.
3.
4.
C.
2.6
Operation: Turns lights on when sensing infrared energy changes between background
and a moving body in area of coverage; with a time delay for turning lights off,
adjustable over a minimum range of 30 seconds to 30 minutes.
Manual Override Switch: Turns lights off manually regardless of elapsed time delay.
Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 5 to 150 fc; keeps lighting off when
selected lighting level is present.
Detection Coverage: Rated for a minimum of 500 sq. ft., maximum 1000 sq. ft., at
180 degrees coverage.
Operation: Turns lights on when both ultrasonic and PIR technologies detect occupancy.
Once lighting is turned on, detection by either technology will keep lights on; with selfadjusting time delay to off.
Manual Override Switch: Turns lights off manually regardless of elapsed time delay.
Automatic Light-Level Sensor: Adjustable from 10 to 500 fc; keeps lighting off when
selected lighting level is present.
Detection Coverage: Infrared sensor rated for 1000 sq. ft. at 166 degrees coverage.
Refer to Occupancy Sensor Schedule on Drawings.
LIGHTING CONTACTORS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
B.
Square D; Schneider Electric.
Description: Electrically operated and mechanically or electrically held as required for
application, complying with NEMA ICS 2 and UL 508.
1.
2.
Current Rating for Switching: Listing or rating consistent with type of load served,
including tungsten filament, inductive, and high-inrush ballast (ballast with 15 percent or
less total harmonic distortion of normal load current).
Control Coil Voltage: As indicated and/or as required for application. Confirm and
coordinate coil voltages with control device requirements.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260923 - 5
2.7
CONTROL RELAYS
A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
B.
Description: Provide replaceable, convertible contacts; 600-V, 10 ampere NEMA rating.
1.
2.8
Square D; Schneider Electric.
Install in NEMA 250 enclosure, type as required for application.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12
AWG, complying with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
B.
Class 1 Control Cable: Size, type, and quantity of conductors as recommended by lighting
control device manufacturer, plenum rated above accessible ceilings, in raceway above nonaccessible ceilings.
C.
Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Size, type, and quantity of conductors as recommended by
lighting control device manufacturer, in raceway.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment level and plumb and according to manufacturer's written instructions.
B.
Install sensors at locations indicated on the Drawings. Aim sensors to achieve maximum
coverage of areas served. Do not exceed coverage limits specified in manufacturer's written
instructions.
C.
Mount lighting control devices according to manufacturer's written instructions.
D.
Confirm time-delay settings and sensitivity adjustments for all occupancy sensors with Owner.
E.
Mounting heights indicated are to bottom of unit for suspended devices and to center of unit for
wall-mounted devices.
3.2
CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Install wiring between sensing and control devices according to manufacturer's written
instructions and as specified in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables" for low-voltage connections.
B.
Wiring Method: Install all wiring in raceway as specified in Section 260533 "Raceways and
Boxes for Electrical Systems."
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260923 - 6
C.
Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Separate
power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors according to conductor manufacturer's written
instructions.
D.
Size conductors according to lighting control device manufacturer's written instructions, unless
otherwise indicated.
E.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
F.
Ground equipment.
G.
Connections: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published
torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified
in UL 486A and UL 486B, as applicable.
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
Identify controlled circuits in lighting contactors.
Identify circuits or luminaries controlled by photoelectric and occupancy sensors at each
sensor.
B.
Label contactors with a unique designation.
C.
Label ceiling-mounted and wall-mounted occupancy sensors and associated relay power pack
unit.
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least 14 days' advance
notice.
B.
Inspect control components for defects and physical damage, testing laboratory labeling, and
nameplate compliance with the Contract Documents.
C.
Check tightness of electrical connections with torque wrench calibrated within previous six
months. Use manufacturer's recommended torque values.
D.
Verify settings of photoelectric devices with photometer calibrated within previous six months.
E.
Electrical Tests: Use particular caution when testing devices containing solid-state components.
Perform the following according to manufacturer's written instructions:
1.
Continuity tests of circuits.
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260923 - 7
2.
Operational Tests: Set and operate devices to demonstrate their functions and capabilities
in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions.
a.
b.
Include testing of devices under conditions that simulate actual operational
conditions. Record control settings, operations, cues, and functional observations.
Verify actuation of each sensor and adjust time delays.
F.
Correct deficiencies, make necessary adjustments, and retest.
requirements are met.
G.
Remove and replace lighting control devices where test results indicate that they do not comply
with specified requirements.
H.
Test Labeling: After satisfactory completion of tests and inspections, apply a label to tested
components indicating test results, date, and responsible agency and representative.
I.
Reports: Written reports of tests and observations. Record defective materials and
workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Record repairs and adjustments.
J.
Test Reports: Submit field quality-control test reports.
3.5
Verify that specified
CLEANING
A.
3.6
Cleaning: Clean equipment and devices internally and externally using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturers, and repair damaged finishes.
ADJUSTING
A.
3.7
Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion,
provide on-site assistance in adjusting sensors to suit occupied conditions. Provide two visits to
Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel as
specified below for occupancy sensors:
1.
2.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and
preventive maintenance. Provide a minimum of two hours initial training and one hour
follow-up training at time requested by Owner within the one-year warranty period.
Training Aid: Use the approved final version of maintenance manuals as a training aid.
B.
Schedule training for Owner's personnel, through Architect, with at least 14 days' advance
notice.
C.
"Demonstration" services shall be in addition to testing, adjusting, and start-up services.
**END OF SECTION 260923**
LIGHTING CONTROL DEVICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
260923 - 8
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 262726
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
1.3
Receptacles and ground-fault circuit interrupters.
Tamper resistant receptacles.
Single- and double-pole snap switches.
Device wall plates and weather-resistant covers.
Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems" for labeling materials.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Legends for receptacles and wall plates.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Field quality-control test reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals.
WIRING DEVICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
262726 - 1
1.7
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain each type of wiring device through one source from a single
manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Receptacles for Owner-Furnished Equipment or for Equipment Furnished by Other Trades:
Match plug configurations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the
following:
1.
Wiring Devices:
a.
b.
c.
2.2
Hubbell Incorporated; Wiring Device-Kellems.
Leviton Mfg. Company Inc.
Pass & Seymour/Legrand; Wiring Devices Div.
RECEPTACLES
A.
Receptacles, General: All devices shall be UL listed, UL Federal Specification WC-596 listed,
CSA certified, and comply with NEMA WD 1, NEMA WD 6, and ANSI/IEEE standards. As
pertaining to specific device types below, devices shall be UL listed 943 (GFCI). All devices
30 ampere and larger shall be rated for 75 deg C wiring terminations.
1.
2.
Unless indicated or required, all straight blade devices shall be duplex type, 125-volt,
2-pole, 3-wire, NEMA 5-20R configuration.
As pertaining to specific device types below, all devices shall be back and side wired,
accepting No. 12 and No. 10 AWG stranded or solid wire.
B.
Straight-Blade and Locking Receptacles: Heavy-Duty Specification grade or Industrial
Specification grade. Solid brass ground strap. Hubbell HBL5362, Pass & Seymour 5362-A
(with color as indicated in Article "Finishes" for wiring devices), or equal by Leviton.
C.
GFCI Receptacles: Straight blade, Heavy-Duty Specification grade or Industrial Specification
grade, termination type for GFCI protection at each device, with NEMA 5-20R duplex
configuration. Solid brass ground strap. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch deep outlet
box without an adapter. Hubbell GF5362, Pass & Seymour 2094, or equal by Leviton.
WIRING DEVICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
262726 - 2
D.
2.3
Tamper-Resistant Convenience Receptacles, 125 V, 20 A: Comply with NEMA WD 1,
NEMA WD 6 Configuration 5-20R, UL 498 Supplement sd, and FS W-C-596.
SWITCHES
A.
Switches, General: All devices shall be UL listed, CSA certified, and comply with
NEMA WD 1, ANSI, and Federal Specification WS-896. Back and side wired. As pertaining
to specific device types below, devices shall be momentary- or maintained-contact type, singlepole, double-pole, three-way, four-way, three-position SPDT center off, or three-position DPDT
center off type as required for application.
B.
Snap Switches: Heavy-Duty, quiet type. Heavy-Duty Specification grade or Industrial
Specification grade. 20 A, 120/277V ac with ratings of 1 Hp at 120 volts and 2 Hp at 240 volts.
1.
C.
Combination Switch and Pilot Light:
1.
2.
2.4
Standard Toggle Switches: Hubbell 1221, 1222, 1223, 1224, or equal.
Switch: 20 A, 120/277V ac.
Pilot Light: Neon lamp, red jewel. Suitable for single-gang mounting, installed with
switch in double-gang box.
WALL PLATES
A.
Single and combination types that mate with corresponding wiring devices.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.5
Plate-Securing Screws: Metal with head color to match plate finish.
Material for Finished Spaces: 0.04-inch-thick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel.
Material for Unfinished Spaces: 0.04-inch-thick, satin-finished, Type 302 stainless steel.
Material for Damp Locations: Cast aluminum with spring-loaded lift cover, and listed
and labeled for use in damp locations.
Material for Wet Locations: Clear thermoplastic cover or metallic cover listed and
labeled for wet locations while in use.
WEATHER-RESISTANT COVERS
A.
UL listed, Commercial Specification grade. Unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings,
comply with Article 406 of the 2014 National Electrical Code for cover/enclosure requirements
for devices in damp or wet locations.
B.
Units Requiring Weatherproof "While in Use" Cover: Clear thermoplastic or metallic cover
rated NEMA 3R "while in use."
C.
Units Not Requiring Weatherproof "While in Use" Cover: Die-cast zinc, weather-resistant
cover, self-closing, stainless-steel springs and weather-resistant gasket.
WIRING DEVICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
262726 - 3
2.6
FINISHES
A.
Color:
1.
2.
3.
Wiring Devices Connected to Normal Power System (excluding Isolated-Ground
Receptacles and Ground-Fault Receptacles): Black receptacles and black switches,
unless otherwise indicated or required by Code.
Wiring Devices Connected to Life Safety, Standby, or Optional Standby Emergency
Power System (Receptacles and Switches): Red.
Ground-Fault Receptacles: Gray.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install devices and assemblies level, plumb, and secure.
B.
Arrangement of Devices: Unless otherwise indicated, mount flush, with long dimension
vertical, and with grounding terminal of receptacles on top. Group adjacent switches under
single, multigang wall plates.
C.
Remove wall plates and protect devices and assemblies during painting.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
1.
2.
3.3
Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as indicated, identify
each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate. Submit proposed engraving
schedule for review.
Receptacles: Identify panelboard and circuit number from which served. Use machineprinted, pressure-sensitive, abrasion-resistant label tape on face of plate and durable wire
markers or tags inside outlet boxes. Verify requirements with Owner.
CONNECTIONS
A.
Ground equipment according to Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical
Systems."
B.
Connect wiring according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and
Cables."
C.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B, as applicable.
WIRING DEVICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
262726 - 4
3.4
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Perform the following field tests and inspections:
1.
2.
B.
3.5
After installing wiring devices and after electrical circuitry has been energized, test for
proper polarity, ground continuity, and compliance with requirements.
Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest as specified above.
CLEANING
A.
Internally clean devices, device outlet boxes, and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly
painted wall plates or devices.
**END OF SECTION 262726**
WIRING DEVICES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
262726 - 5
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 262813
FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
This Section includes fuses.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each product specified, including spare fuse cabinet. Include the following
for each fuse type indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.4
Dimensions and manufacturer's technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, and ratings.
Descriptive data and time-current curves.
Let-through current curves for fuses with current-limiting characteristics.
Coordination charts and tables and related data.
Fuse size for elevator feeders and elevator disconnect switches.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
Maintenance data for tripping devices to include in the operation and maintenance manual.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed, are packaged with
protective covering for storage, and are identified with labels describing contents.
1.
1.6
Spare Fuses: Furnish quantity equal to 20 percent of each fuse type and size installed,
but not less than 1 set of 3 of each type and size.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain fuses from one source and by a single manufacturer.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
FUSES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
262813 - 1
C.
Listing and Labeling: Provide fuses specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.
1.
The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled":
Article 100.
As defined in the National Electrical Code,
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers:
following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Subject to compliance with requirements, provide fuses by one of the
Cooper Industries, Inc.; Bussmann Div.
Ferraz Shawmut.
Tracor, Inc.; Littelfuse, Inc. Subsidiary.
CARTRIDGE FUSES
A.
Characteristics: NEMA FU 1, nonrenewable cartridge fuse; class as indicated or required;
current rating as indicated or required; voltage rating consistent with circuit voltage.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine utilization equipment nameplates and installation instructions to verify proper fuse
locations, sizes, and characteristics.
B.
Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
FUSE APPLICATIONS
A.
Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, dual element, time delay, for full voltage starting (up to
600A).
B.
Fixed Electric Space Heating or Appliance Branch Circuits (consisting of resistance elements
with or without a motor): Class RK1, dual element, time delay (up to 600A).
3.3
INSTALLATION
A.
FUSES
Install fuses in fusible devices as indicated. Install in upright position. Arrange fuses so fuse
ratings are readable without removing fuse.
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
262813 - 2
3.4
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Install typewritten labels on inside door of each fused switch to indicate fuse replacement
information.
**END OF SECTION 262813**
FUSES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
262813 - 3
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 262816
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
SECTION 262816 - ENCLOSED SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes individually mounted enclosed switches used for motor and equipment
disconnecting means and DPST switches rated for use as a motor controller.
B.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
1.3
Section 262726 "Wiring Devices" for attachment plugs, receptacles, and snap switches
used for disconnecting means.
Section 262813 "Fuses" for fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of switch, accessory, and component indicated. Include
dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, and finishes. Include the following:
1.
2.
B.
Descriptive data and time-current curves.
Coordination charts and tables and related data.
Shop Drawings: For each switch.
1.
Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details, including required clearances and
service space around equipment. Show tabulations of installed devices, equipment
features, and ratings. Include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
2.
Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250, Type 1.
Current and voltage ratings.
Short-circuit current rating.
Features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
Wiring Diagrams:
Power, signal, and control wiring.
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
Differentiate between
262816 - 1
1.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Maintenance Data: For enclosed switches, and for components to include in maintenance
manuals. In addition to requirements specified in Division 01, include the following:
1.
2.
1.5
Routine maintenance requirements for components.
Manufacturer's written instructions for testing and adjusting switches.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Source Limitations: Obtain enclosed switches from one source and by a single manufacturer.
B.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
C.
Comply with NEMA AB 1 and NEMA KS 1.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
1.6
PROJECT CONDITIONS
A.
Environmental Limitations: Rate equipment for continuous operation under the following
conditions, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
1.7
Ambient Temperature: Not less than minus 22 deg F and not exceeding 104 deg F.
Altitude: Not exceeding 6600 feet.
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of switches and components with other construction,
including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces. Maintain required workspace
clearances and required clearances for equipment access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Eaton
General Electric
Siemens-ITE
Square D Company.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
262816 - 2
2.2
MANUAL MOTOR CONTROLLERS
A.
2.3
Description: 30A, 240 VAC, double pole, single throw (DPST) switch rated for use as a motor
controller. Provide stainless steel wall plate.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
A.
Enclosed, Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with lockable handle.
B.
Enclosed, Fusible Switch, 1200 A and Smaller: NEMA KS 1, Type HD, with clips to
accommodate specified fuses, enclosure consistent with environment where located, lockable
handle with two padlocks, and interlocked with cover in CLOSED position. UL listed service
entrance where utilized as such.
C.
Enclosure: NEMA KS 1, Type 1, unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental
conditions of installed location.
1.
2.
2.4
Outdoor Locations: Type 3R.
Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4.
FACTORY FINISHES
A.
Finish: Manufacturer's standard gray paint applied to factory-assembled and -tested enclosures
before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine elements and surfaces to receive enclosed switches for compliance with installation
tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
1.
3.2
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Temporary Lifting Provisions: Remove temporary lifting eyes, channels, and brackets and
temporary blocking of moving parts from enclosures and components.
B.
Install enclosed switches in locations as indicated, according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
C.
Install enclosed switches level and plumb.
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
262816 - 3
3.3
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify field-installed conductors, interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning
signs as specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Enclosure Nameplates: Label each enclosure with engraved metal or laminated-plastic
nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws.
3.4
CONNECTIONS
A.
Install equipment grounding connections for switches with ground continuity to main electrical
ground bus.
B.
Install power wiring. Install wiring between switches and control and indication devices.
C.
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B, as applicable.
3.5
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Prepare for acceptance tests as follows:
1.
2.
B.
Testing: After installing enclosed switches and after electrical circuitry has been energized,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements.
1.
2.
3.6
Test insulation resistance for each enclosed switch, component, and control circuit.
Test continuity of each line- and load-side circuit.
Procedures: Perform each visual and mechanical inspection and electrical test indicated
in NETA ATS, Section 7.5 for switches. Certify compliance with test parameters.
Correct malfunctioning units on-site, where possible, and retest to demonstrate
compliance; otherwise, replace with new units and retest.
CLEANING
A.
On completion of installation, inspect interior and exterior of enclosures. Remove paint
splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris; do not use compressed air to assist in
cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish.
**END OF SECTION 262816**
ENCLOSED SWITCHES
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
262816 - 4
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 265100
INTERIOR LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
B.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
1.3
Interior lighting fixtures, lamps, and ballasts.
Lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces.
Exit signs.
Lighting fixture supports.
Accessories.
Section 260923 "Lighting Control Devices" for automatic control of lighting, including
time switches, photoelectric relays, occupancy sensors, and multipole lighting relays and
contactors.
DEFINITIONS
A.
1.4
CRI: Color-rendering index.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of lighting fixture scheduled, arranged in order of fixture
designation. Include data on features, electrical ratings, accessories, finishes, and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Physical description of lighting fixture including dimensions and verification of indicated
parameters.
Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance.
Fluorescent ballasts.
Lamps.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
265100 - 1
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
1.6
Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For lighting equipment and fixtures to include in emergency,
operation, and maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1.
1.7
Catalog data for each fixture. Include diffuser, ballast, and lamps installed in that fixture.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
B.
Comply with NFPA 70.
C.
NFPA 101 Compliance: Comply with visibility and luminance requirements for emergency
lighting fixtures and for exit signs.
1.8
COORDINATION
A.
Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, firesuppression system, and partition assemblies.
B.
Fixtures, Mounting Hardware, and Trim: Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures
with ceiling system and other construction.
1.9
WARRANTY
A.
Special Warranty for Fluorescent Ballasts: Manufacturer's standard form in which ballast
manufacturer agrees to repair or replace ballasts that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
2.
Warranty Period for Electronic Ballasts: Five years from date of manufacture, but not
less than 4 years from date of Substantial Completion.
Warranty Period for Electronic Dimming Ballasts: Three years from date of
manufacture, but not less than 2 years from date of Substantial Completion.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
265100 - 2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified in the
Lighting Fixture Schedules on the Drawings.
B.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide ballasts by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
C.
Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide lamps by one of the following:
1.
2.
3.
2.2
Advance.
Osram/Sylvania.
Universal Lighting Technologies.
General Electric.
Osram/Sylvania.
Philips.
LIGHTING FIXTURES AND COMPONENTS, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A.
Recessed Fixtures: Comply with NEMA LE 4 for ceiling compatibility for recessed fixtures.
B.
Incandescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598.
C.
Fluorescent Fixtures: Comply with UL 1598.
D.
Metal Parts: Free of burrs and sharp corners and edges.
E.
Sheet Metal Components: Steel, unless otherwise indicated. Form and support to prevent
warping and sagging.
F.
Doors, Frames, and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free of light leakage under
operating conditions, and designed to permit relamping without use of tools. Designed to
prevent doors, frames, lenses, diffusers, and other components from falling accidentally during
relamping and when secured in operating position.
G.
Reflecting surfaces shall have minimum reflectance as follows, unless otherwise indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
White Surfaces: 85 percent.
Specular Surfaces: 83 percent.
Diffusing Specular Surfaces: 75 percent.
Laminated Silver Metallized Film: 90 percent.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
265100 - 3
H.
Plastic Diffusers, Covers, and Globes:
1.
Acrylic Lighting Diffusers: 100 percent virgin acrylic plastic. High resistance to
yellowing and other changes due to aging, exposure to heat, and UV radiation.
a.
b.
2.
2.3
Lens Thickness:
indicated.
UV stabilized.
At least 0.125 inch minimum unless different thickness is
Glass: Annealed crystal glass, unless otherwise indicated.
BALLASTS FOR LINEAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
Description: Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output, unless
otherwise indicated.
B.
Electronic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Solid-state, full-light output, energy-efficient type
compatible with lamps and lamp combinations to which connected. Comply with ANSI C82.11
and the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
C.
Certification by Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL).
Labeling by Certified Ballast Manufacturers Association (CBM).
Type: Class P, high power factor, except as otherwise indicated.
Sound Rating: A rating, except as otherwise indicated.
Voltage: Match connected circuits.
Lamp Flicker: Less than 5 percent.
Minimum Starting Temperature: 32 deg F.
Ballast Factor: t 85 percent and d 95 percent.
Minimum Power Factor: 95 percent.
Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) of Ballast Current: Less than 10 percent for ballasts
wired at 277 volts and less than 10 percent for ballasts wired at 120 volts.
Comply with FCC Rules and Regulations Title 47 CFR, Part 18, Non-Consumer
(Class A) for EMI/RFI (conducted and radiated).
Conform to IEEE C62.41, Category A, for resistance to voltage surges for normal and
common modes.
Single or Multilamp Ballasts: Use 1, 2, or 3-lamp ballasts as required to perform
switching functions indicated; 4-lamp ballasts are not permitted. All ballasts shall be
located in fixture housings. Ballasts of one fixture shall not be utilized to switch lamps of
another fixture (do not share ballasts between fixtures).
Lamp-ballast connection method shall not reduce normal rated life of lamps.
Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound.
Series-Parallel Lamp Circuits.
Ballast Type: Programmed rapid start.
Operating Frequency: 40 kHz or higher.
Ballasts for Dimmer-Controlled Lighting Fixtures: Electronic type.
1.
2.
Dimming Range: 100 to 10 percent of rated lamp lumens.
Compatibility: Certified by manufacturer for use with specific dimming control system
and lamp type indicated.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
265100 - 4
2.4
BALLASTS FOR COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
Description: Electronic programmed rapid-start type, complying with ANSI C 82.11, designed
for type and quantity of lamps indicated. Ballast shall be designed for full light output unless
dimmer control is indicated:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
B.
Ballasts for Low-Temperature Environments:
1.
2.5
Lamp end-of-life detection and shutdown circuit.
Automatic lamp starting after lamp replacement.
Sound Rating: A.
Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 20 percent.
Transient Voltage Protection: IEEE C62.41, Category A or better.
Operating Frequency: 20 kHz or higher.
Lamp Current Crest Factor: 1.7 or less.
Ballast Factor: 0.95 or higher, unless otherwise indicated.
Power Factor: 0.90 or higher.
Interference: Comply with 47 CFR, Chapter 1, Part 18, Subpart C, for limitations on
electromagnetic and radio-frequency interference for nonconsumer equipment.
Ballast Case Temperature: 75 deg C, maximum.
Temperatures 0 Deg F and Above: Electronic type rated for 0 deg F starting and
operating temperature with indicated lamp types.
EXIT SIGNS
A.
General: Comply with UL 924; for sign colors, visibility, luminance, and lettering size, comply
with authorities having jurisdiction.
1.
2.6
Lamps for AC Operation: LEDs, 70,000 hours minimum rated lamp life. Diffuse design
(no visible LEDs).
FLUORESCENT LAMPS
A.
Low-Mercury Lamps: Comply with EPA's toxicity characteristic leaching procedure test; shall
yield less than 0.2 mg of mercury per liter when tested according to NEMA LL 1.
B.
T8 rapid-start low-mercury lamps, rated 32 W maximum, nominal length of 48 inches, 2800
initial lumens (minimum), CRI 75 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and average rated life
20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
C.
Lamps shall be suitable for use (without derating lamp life) with instant start electronic
ballasts.
T5HO rapid-start, high-output low-mercury lamps, rated 54 W maximum, nominal length of
45.2 inches, 5000 initial lumens (minimum), CRI 85 (minimum), color temperature 3500 K, and
average rated life of 20,000 hours, unless otherwise indicated.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
265100 - 5
D.
Compact Fluorescent Lamps: 4-Pin, low mercury, CRI 80 (minimum), color temperature
3500 K, average rated life of 10,000 hours at 3 hours operation per start, unless otherwise
indicated.
E.
Comply with ANSI C78 Series that is applicable to each type of lamp.
2.7
LIGHTING FIXTURE SUPPORT COMPONENTS
A.
Comply with Section 260500 "Common Work Results for Electrical" for channel- and angleiron supports and nonmetallic channel and angle supports.
B.
Twin-Stem Hangers: Two, 1/2-inch steel tubes with single canopy designed to mount a single
fixture. Finish same as fixture.
C.
Wires: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 3, soft temper, zinc-coated steel, 12 gage.
D.
Rod Hangers: 3/16-inch minimum diameter, cadmium-plated, threaded steel rod.
2.8
FINISHES
A.
Fixtures: Manufacturer's standard, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
2.9
Paint Finish: Applied over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer, free of defects.
Metallic Finish: Corrosion resistant.
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Factory test fixtures with ballasts and lamps.
photometric performance.
Certify results for electrical ratings and
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Lighting Fixtures: Set level, plumb, and square with ceilings and walls. Secure according to
manufacturer's written instructions and approved Submittal materials. Install lamps in each
fixture.
B.
Support for Lighting Fixtures in or on Grid-Type Suspended Ceilings (Troffers, Etc.): Use both
overhead structure and ceiling grid as a support element.
1.
2.
3.
Provide four No. 12 gage rods or wires for each fixture and support from building
structure. Install in each corner of fixture. In addition, provide support clips.
Support Clips: Fasten to lighting fixtures and to ceiling grid members in each fixture
corner with clips that are UL listed for the application.
Fixtures of Sizes Less Than Ceiling Grid: Install as indicated and support fixtures from
overhead structure with four No. 12 gage rods or wires.
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
265100 - 6
C.
Suspended Lighting Fixture Support:
1.
2.
D.
3.2
Pendants and Rods: Brace from building structure to prevent swinging.
Stem-Mounted, Single-Unit, Fluorescent Fixtures (Maximum 12'-0" Fixture Lengths):
Suspend with twin-stem hangers or rod hangers (two pendants or rods per single fixture
supported from building structure).
Adjust aimable lighting fixtures to provide required light intensities.
CONNECTIONS
A.
3.3
Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torquetightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in
UL 486A and UL 486B, as applicable.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspect each installed fixture for damage. Replace damaged fixtures and components.
B.
Advance Notice: Give dates and times for field tests.
1.
Notify Architect and Owner 14 days in advance.
C.
Provide instruments to make and record test results.
D.
Verify normal operation of each fixture after installation.
E.
Test for Emergency Lighting: Interrupt power supply to demonstrate proper operation. Verify
transfer from normal power to battery and retransfer to normal.
F.
Malfunctioning Fixtures and Components: Replace or repair, then retest. Repeat procedure
until units operate properly.
G.
Corroded Fixtures: During warranty period, replace fixtures that show any signs of corrosion.
3.4
CLEANING
A.
Clean fixtures internally and externally after installation.
recommended by manufacturer.
Use methods and materials
**END OF SECTION 265100**
INTERIOR LIGHTING
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
265100 - 7
,-./--01-(2)
//-()-.3
//+4
4,",
,
$#%
/52 / 2/ 6-.- - -/+ (2 / / %(663/)
--/
.-%6/-%-+/66)-%-
%$##,1
%- ( --52 3 - -36 / () -6/-/ 52 )3
(/2/6/5/)-.-/2"6///3-7
!
:
=
&
,/%-(--527
!
:
!
#-(23
$5"6//82
98"-6/82
4/-
;-</--(
/-6-(
/83/-/2
;//)
%-:>-33-;-<,(-/>
%-:*>-5"-/2/4-5-(-//8>
%-:>-(2/&-2-/%)3>
%-:!!>,/5/)/&-?-/%)3>
%-::!>/--/%)3>
9%
&/<8-7/)@2+6/5/)+/8+--(-A85-33(/---3
- -- 8(- 3/+ / /+ / B(63 --3 5 -
858(2
&
&%7&(2()-(2%./-/
-"-7/)/823/--/83/--
--"--
#7-3/2
C-D-/ /827 /82 85 / (2 -33(/- -(--
/ -D-/ -"- - /82 85 / (2 8(2
##$%&
'()*+
!"
/(-3/-)3-(-3//3/---D-/--6-
/-D-/-"-
9
7(/-6/3--
/7 -/- - / ) 2/2 8) -/-+ / / 36-)+
%(8-/-+-%(8"(8-/-+6-8-//-+-+/66/-+/
B(-6/--;-<-%-
C
7-///5-<
,
7,2-33(/-
8(-
2
'
,#7,23/-(
E
$4%7$(666-5(66)
$47$56/
:
%$&#%
/7%(834-(
//+%-6
/52+/B(//-+//-
@- /82-- )3 - 8 (D - 4-FA+ / )3 5//) // / /
-366/</2(83/6//6/</2(83/--3/-58(
5-(G.5
%$&#%
4-( //7 9- /(+ /2+ / 6-3/ - / -36- 6+ (2
5//)3
&
%-6
/527
%)3 /82 %(7 - -6) - /82 ( / / 6/ - /82///-)3--5/
/823/-
/52
9,#%$&#%
H(//-
//79-/@A(/3/(3-("3,
36-)8)
/
&
9B(/)"--6-
##$%&
'()*+
!"
%)3 ;//) //7 %(83 / / 6- - %)3 #/(/(G 5//)
(26-3/////-36.--36-///66-.-
(5//)3(/-3/(/(G/66-.///8
=
%$%$&#%
6/-/#//
//79--36)//-6/-/)3-(
3//3/(/
##,%$&#%
9( ?/ 3// 8 8-5 / 3/ 6-( / / / / 6/</2
56-.-.2--/2/5/882-
*
%)3;//)/7;//)/28)//(-D6/.
-)33/(/(
;2%)3;//)7-36/5>;//)>--52
('/<387-/)6-.):-(-5-6/+8(-
5////.-
.4/7-/)6
H$1%%$,
/ H(//-7 / / 8 / / - -33(/- /8
//5/-)3-8/
!
4-3/C-)7///.(()6-3//6-F
-3/-6/D56/)/
&( C-)7 / / /. 8 8( / / /. 6-3
//----2))3-(-()-6/)/
,
4-7///./,
-/
&
;
//%)3/7%;%)3/
#/(/(7 - /6/8 3/(/( / )3 / ( 4/ - %-
B(63 - /- 3/(/( (83 - /66-./ / / (8(-+ - B(63 - 6 3/(/( (83 8( -3 6-(
6(-3-(62/---2//./3+(83///
/)//.//-/./--3)3-6/-//5/6
6- - .//- / ./- / .) 6//2/6 - %6/-
(5/-5(83//6-6-)33-?
B(3--/
-(3/-/8/2/(-
//(-D6/.-B(633/(/(
##$%&
'()*+
!"!
B(637B(63/--3-3/(/(G/6(86/-
/( / (-+ 8- 6)/) / /)+ 5 - - - 6/- /
/ 3/(/(G / 6(8 6/- / 8 -6-/
8)
)3-36-+(2/8+/8-(5//)3
/-36-+
.+/-7//8/94 +
+ 8) / 2 /2) /6/8 - /(- /.2 F(-+ / 3/< -
(
9
-36)594 +>/-//->
-36)5/66/86---/----52%//7
!
:
%// "!"
@
38 *=:A+ >/ 85 // 3/
B(63 / // ("3/2 B(63 36-)2 %/ &/) //
/2+> / ":=+ >-33/ &(2 ;2 %//+> -
B(3 - -36/ - (66 )--( / /)--( /82 /
B(63
":=+>-33/&(2-33(/-/82%//>
":*+ >-33/ &(2 %// - -33(/- 4/5/) /
%6/>
%"+ > 3/- %// - -33(/-
/((--33/&(2>
%" + >-33/ &(2 -(2 / &-2 ,B(3 -
-33(/->
"%& + > -33(/- %)3 &(+ -/
/3-%6/--$5"4//82%)3>
"%& :+>-/C-D-//824/-6>
C
-36)5/66/82(/--/(-/.2F(-
$ -36/7 -36) 5 /66/8 B(3 - $ %// =!+ >3-6/"
(/;//8>I=+>;--/%-2(2-$5-66
-(->I/$*+>#--9/%3-<//-/8$
"C/2%6/>4-.6-(5/$//8
'
# -36/7 -36) 5 # %// 4(8- ;":+
>3-6/"(/;//8-/3-/
8(--/
2)+> / ;!+ >-- -2 - ; / /8+> 6/2 - -- / 2/
/3-3/
E
9-36/7-36)5$%9/-33(/--33-/=%//
-/-5/8//--35-<B(63/52
##$%&
'()*+
!"
6 2 -36/)7 /- - 2 B( - -8/ )3
3/(/(G5//)+/5-</--(-D-//82/8/<8--66/
8 -6 /8 / 8 - --3/ 5 6-3/ B(3 - %-8)/62-36/)/66-.8)5
5"66-.62-36/7
/
8
,
--/ /)-( / //- - .- / // -33(/- /82 5 5G
-33(/- / B(63 / . (66 / 3-(/ ((
(66
!
&
!
# F-) 5 3-(/ (( (66+ -33(/- / B(63 (66+ / 5 - ?/2 -3/- / /2 - / -
B(63//23///-/
,-/23/32/8(--6/6/
F( //23 / -/- - 8(- /3 / -"- / 6/
6/B(63--3/52--/-33-//-63D//23
/6/B(3-B(63
--/ 6-8 / B( - /. - / ;-< / 6- 3--)
5-((/)(6---(-(
/<
/66
-//F/<+-.6/+/-B(--(3-(/((+/
/-//82//8/88)-/-
-//6/-56-35/+-(3+-3-(/((/88)
-/-(?8/5/)+/5/)2+//66/-3-(
F/<+.-/82+///82+--//-3B(355
/ 3-(/ (( B(63 (66 @(2 /5/) )6+ /5/) --+
2+ A 9/ .-// -- - 3-(/ ((+ (2 8-
36-/) / 63/ --+ / 8 8) -/- --/ 5
-(-(/6/2
#-(/ ((+ (2 6-5 6- @ 4/A / -6 /5/) - /82+
/88)3-(/((B(63(66
;,,1
%6/ ;//)7 #/(/(G // -3 5 3/(/( /2 - 6/ -
6/ )3 -36- / / 3// - 5-<3/6 5 6 5//)
6- %6/ 5//) B( - 63/ < @6/ 6/ - /- -(A
((52)3
;//)4-7:)/@33(3A-3/-%(8//-36-
##$%&
'()*+
!":
4,"4,
$%
#$9$,,%
- 4/ / 5 8-5 -( + --52 B(3 /66) -
6-(-7
&
%(( ;2 %)37 %(8F - -36/ 5 B(3+ 6-. --52
)37
!
:
!
#/(/(7%(8F--36/5B(3+6-.6-(8)--
3/(/(6
4-(7 %(8F - -36/ 5 B(3+ 6-. - - 6-(
6
#4+-/2-)
./)/+%)3/?2/6J=
C(88+#-/;//)?%6J/-/
.-+?3/@KA+8/-2
-++/!
%3--@A+%)3
%1%#,H$,#%
--//(-3///B(63-)-3/2/)3#/
-36- / -- -3 /3 3/(/(G 5// )3 -
/66-.6-(--63(3((6-3/
#$#%
8(-,/<79/2+3-(/"(58/<"6-)6-5-/+
2--33(/-3/(66-/--/53--(-
8(66-(./53//23-8--//</-D-/5
3//23 / / 6/ 6/ ; -36/8 5 ! // *" 6/
3-(2,-
/52-/-/B(3
#/(/(@,/<A7
/
8
&"
//<
C(88
,/
#/@8/-2A
#/(/(@/8A7,-
/52-,B(3
/
8
//<
8
##$%&
'()*+
!"
!
4-5 %67 9- 3-(2 - /< - /8+ 5 "+ " /+
#;
+ -2(/-:", -/"2-( 6/+ (38 / /+
8(-/5/+/(2--527
/
&
#/-(
#/@8/-2A
'(-8-?/-6-/"5--
9--"#-(2 ,/<7 %+ /2+ 3-(/+ 5 ./ / -D-/ /8
3//23/+-6/8--3/8-(2+/2-(2(2
'"C--<7 %6/) 2 - (66- - /8 ( - 4-F '"--< D / -
/(/ B(/) - /8 / 8) '"--< 6( / 33(3 - : 6 6/ /6/)
&--D-//./(//8(.-(/"33(382
/(-//83//'"--<//-(6(3//8
(/8-(56(3"//8
$%C
;%
"4,&
$4/8#/(/(7%(8F--36/ 5B(3+6-./6-(-3
- - 3/(/( 6 / /- / 6-( - %)3 #/(/(G
5//)3
!
:
#4+/@#DA%
./)/+2/6J=%
&I-
.-#/5%
&<<+/#/<!%
-33%-64-6+$/#/%
#-/5<
I/.--/8
2--2+2/%
%(6-?I%(6--33(/-+?/%
&
"3$47-36)5$
&/<8--66/87
!
-;+-(-
-36)5%"=": /":="&+/2-)!
94 +)6#4-36)25$
/8'/<--7/)
C-D-/-66/87
!
:
-;+-3+-(6/
-36)5":="&+/2-)
94 )6#4
/8'/<--@
//A7&(@-3556---2/8A
/8 '/< -- @-A7 /) - 5 @-3 5 5 6- - -2
/8A
##$%&
'()*+
!" /8 -2 C/5/7 -36) 5 ":="&+ )6+ (2 3-(
2-6("-5/6---
9
3/&-<#-(72/5--8-+(26(2/F/<
5/
-2C/5/7--(2-(4-F
4/ 4/7 -36) 5 ":="&+ 32 - ?2 /8 6-3/
#-(/ 6/ -(2 3(6"(38 F/< ( 5 ")6 -- / / F/<
-63/3/--6/2-(6-//8
(38-'/<697-/-("6/-(-2-(6-//8+
6(/33(3-66/F/<
'/< / '/< 387 #-(/+ --"-+ ,'": 6/ ( 5 2/ "
)63/$<)F/<-//.
C
"%) 3/- &-<7 -36) 5 ":="& (2 /- 2 / "
)3/-H(/)-/83/-/3//(/B(/)65
//-/:66//6/)
-66 $4 // 4/ - @-A7 /2-) -36/ -36) 5 )3
B(3
.-5/-)6/</224-.6/-2/
8)5-355B(--/B(63-3/55G
//-4-.-6/--.)/.//6-6(66/--
/3/----D-////824/-3/(/(/3/3/(/(
-((52)3
'
-66 $4 // 4/ - @;-</-A7 /2-) -36/ -36) 5 )3
B(3
.-5/-)6/</224-.6/-2/
8)54-.-6/--.)/.//6-6(66/-3
--554/-3/(/(/3/3/(/(-((52
)3
E
-66$4-4/-@;-</-A7/2-)-36/-36)5)3
B(3
.-5/-)6/</224-.6/-2/
8)54-.-6/--.)/..-6-6(66/-3
--554/-3/(/(/3/3/(/(-((52
)3
:
9&,"4&
/8+ 3/+ / -- 4-( #/(/(7 %(8F - -36/ 5
B(3+ 6-. / 6-( -3 - - 3/(/( 6 / /- / 6-(-%)3#/(/(G5//)3
!
./)/
&<"<I//-36/)
-33%-64-6+
##$%&
'()*+
!"=
:
-2/8%)3
#-/5<
I/.--/8
2--2
%(6-?I%(6--33(/-
&
98"6/87::"3-3+3(3--6/84(3/
-&/<8-98/87H(/)-8//-
/52
!
:
-36) 5 "*+ "*&+ /- "*
--(8
94 +)69-36)25$
#/?3(3(/-7!:&<3/=:3I:&<3/!3-::/
::"3-33(3-8
#3(3 #-/ &/57 #CD"<3 / =: 3I : #CD"<3 / ! 3 -
::"3-33(3-8
/8'/<--7/2
-"- / 4/ 4/7 #-(/ 6/ -(2 3(6"(38+ (6? /8
--)--)6@%-%A55
(38---697-/8-/8-/8/2-+
6(/33(3-66/--
4/ -7 9/-)"3/+ (/ 8 /8 !" 2 -3 2 /
--B(355
9
/8-2C/5/7
;,E%$%
'/<7 "-3+ 8//+ 5"6/ --I -("6/+ 3-(/+ ,'":I / /8
-.-36)5":="&
&
-36)5":="&!
H(<"-+ 36?" / (6?")6% -(6 @-3 )6 5 5A
---3-/ &
4-.8(--//F/</5--.-F/<
;-</-(7
(/F/<"--/383-(2-3(2/2/6/
!
9/6/7C2"36/6/I/2F/<I--/8)
#-(279(+(-5/
27#/"6/86-(/6/-)3G/-3
C/5/8/-63
##$%&
'()*+
!"*
,$
&
#//7-36)594 +" +/$ &
-(2 &(7 -66 8( 5 6 - 6/2 - /-33-/ 5-"- (2
//3H(/)//3--/-36)5" %/"&/<7(/+5/"-/<"3-(2//
-33(/--(2&(8/7
3-/--57
=
-33(/- -( &(8/ @&A7 2 / / - /52 8)
28)"<
94,
$%
#/(/(7
!
&/);-5+
C3/)-
E-)
4/(-6
&
-36) 5 ""+ /66/8 B(3 %-::! >/- -
/%)3+>/55GB(3
/8 /87 %"/. .) - .)"- 5/6/-( /6 3/<+ 3/ 6
5/6/(3/82/-
4/ 4/ / -.6/ /87 %"/.+ 3/"6 5 8/< < - 5
8/<2-(I2/--36)25)3G/-3
*
%$,H$1,
98"6/87//86--//-)8-662/=:/!3-
.)-36/58/5B(36%-
&
$4/8/--4-3/7.)/86/</2-//-)-.)
//8-365":="&B(3
4,!"J$
!
%%
,
%
-36) 5 &%+ ":="&+ ":="&+ ":="&!+ "
:*"+/%)3#/(/(G5//)B(3)./-3(8/66-.
528)8-/;//)3/(/(
##$%&
'()*+
!"
!
J#
?/36/5/)3-/8
!
!!
)6-6--(-6/5/)</5/)+/8/)+/-3-
-36/ 5 6/ /-/-+ //+ //- -/+ /D/ - /8
//-+ / - -- /2 //- ) / /82 / 8
/-36)25#//B(3
46/5/6/-/.)/6/--/5//3/(2
6-(/8-)6-5/6/
) 6/ - (66- /8 / /5/) (6 2 ) 52 -
.(/)6/D-/8)/-//6/)-/8(66-((
/B(/-/6/5/)+(2/33(3:66//6/)
4-5//--)/(//-)--/.8-
449#
&/<8-/87,-
/52-/66/-B(3
&
C-D-//87,-
/52-/66/-B(3
!
%
-36)5
&
;2#-7-//5/)//8?6(6/,/5/)/8-?
/6%-:!!>,/5/)/&-?-/%)3>
!
:
/82 -/ /8-. 8 27 4(3"/ /82 (66- 5
'"--<
/82 -/ /8-. -/8 27 ,/5/) / / %-:!!>,/5/)/&-?-/%)3>
/82 -/ ;/ - /8-. 8 27 ,/5/) / / %-:!!>,/5/)/&-?-/%)3>
/82 -/ ;/ - /8-. -/8 27 ,/5/) / / %-:!!>,/5/)/&-?-/%)3>
/82?6--36(7/8/)
/8//-7
!
/ ?6- /8 6// / 66(/ - (/ - ?6- ((/
338/--5(/--(56-8
#/< 6+ /6+ / 3/- -) / / -(+ 3/+ / -"
-/6/6/
4(2/87
--?3/(/(G5-336(2-
-
- / 8(+ <<+ -+ -3+ - /8/ /8 - - 6 /8
85 3/-+ /6+ - F(- 6- ,3-. / / /8 /3/2
(2//-/6/55/8
##$%&
'()*+
!"
:
-";/ //-7 &2 /8 - --3 36/( 8- 2 C/
/36/-8(-/2
%( / (66- /8 / ./ - ?2 = / - 3- /
3/(-D-/)-3/8+8-?+2+-(+/<+/3+/
3/
/ $4 /8 (2 B(+ 6/+ / 3- / / - 5
/2-) /2 - -36- / / ( /2-) 6-3/ - -36
/<2/6/+-
/
8
;25;2-/-(7
!
:
--(53-/-/2-)/8/--3/-
4- - /2 /8+ .) / /5/) /. 6/ 2-33 / /
/
%(66-/82/8-./82(2'"--<
--(66-/82
) -3 2 (66-+ ((/ 338+ (5-<+ 662+ - -
3//-/66-.-(
#-( 6/ 6/+ 3/ 6+ / - -2 /5/ - --"3-(
/<//
-(6-2/5/-/8-6//-2/
/-(--3/6-5-?
$ /2 8/ - / /8+ - 6. /2 --+ / - 6.
82/8-3///33(3-338)3/(/(
//8/)//-36(
%6//- -3 # %-(7 -36) 5 &%
# / ":*"
-33/- - 6//2 ( -66 .- / // -33(/- /8 -3
6-/ # -(+ (2 / 6-5 / B(63 -36) 5 --5233(36//-/-36-8-(-#7
%6//-85(6-5-/B(636-?3)--6
/8-/8-3//5/)/--57
/
8
%6//-85(6-5-/B(636-?3)-/8
2-(3//5/)/--57
/
8
!
/B(63,/2/<7:
/B(63,/285/:<7
/B(63,/2#-/:<7
/B(63,/2/<7"
/B(63,/285/:<7
/B(63,/2#-/:<7
%6//- 85 6-5 / / B(63 -/ 2-( 3/
-(--(6-?3)-/82-(3//5/)/--57
/
8
/B(63,/2/<7!
/B(63,/285/:<7!
/B(63,/2#-/:<7
##$%&
'()*+
!"
:
/#--//-3+:<-C4//27=
9(-9?(7:
9
/ /8 / 8(- /< /-/ 5 B(63 3/(/(G
-33/-
-(7
C
!:
-36) 5 ":*" - 3/?3(3 2 - -( / 8 85 6(
6-+/-6("8-?D2
$3/(/(-(56/-2"/(5.6-8
#/(/(G 9 %.7 2/2 / /-)"/(-D . 6/. - /+
6++//F(5//)3/6--36-//38+(2
--,6-(52
,$
-36) 5 %-: >-(2 / &-2 - / %)3> / 5
&
,-
/52-6B(32/22-(2)3
-(24-7
&-2-(-7
?-32-(28(8/-8(23//35--3+--3//3
?/---38(/)/858(23//32-(
%6/,B(37
!
9
-/2-(23//B(63--3+52-+/<+//8
-33(/--(2&(8/7#-(-/<+/8+-5/-//--3
5/-(/-//-
/52
&-2-(-/8(/-66+-;33(3
/ -) -3/ -(+ ( 6/) B( - 6-- -
-(-#/-(+(+/8,#9-,#/?!
2+-(-/88-//--(
&-2 -(- / 8 / 5-( 6 ( /66-. 8) 8/(-6/(3/;6//)+)/8/8
/ / 8 -/ -33(/- 6/ %6 / 8 8) .8
-36----8)?-352
-/--"3-(/<+6-3//8563/)6--+
/$4%-&8/3//--3
;%)374-.2-(2/8-2-5/)3/
8) 5 / )3 B(63 (66 / /-/ 5 " /
94 ##$%&
'()*+
!"!
!
9
/--B(3+-36)5-33(/-3/-
/6 - &% # #/(/ @5 8/ - ""A / 5 /66/8
B(3%-::!>/--/%)3>
3/-/-4-F/8/
--"- -"- 66) -- - .- / // . 8/<8-/+
--+-.+//8-36--"-255/
6---23//
&
$ -2/ / )3/ 2/- - /)G /(/ //23 /
-3/(+//---"-/--.(/-(-
/8/;/-7
/8//85-/3/-//6+5/8/
/8-F(---(8-?+/5//
/8/3/6/53///8+/<+-6/
/
8
!
.(/) (38 / 52 -(- - - 3/ 6 )
//8-522-(682?-3/6/-/8-/8(2"
3-(.5/3/(38-6/(/./-5
/8/(/58(-/<//3
;--9B(63,--3/;2-7/8/--
//(-/8"3/2/-2/5/
;-</-7/8/85-(8-?////8-.6/
/8 %(7 4- 6-3 -/- / B(63 --3 / 52 - -32 / -(2-2 /8 / 2/-+ -2+ / /- 4- 5
2 /3 / / 6/ -. 9( / - -6) - / -36.
(-4-F
/823/-
/527%-58(2--6/5/8/3/-"6-
/82 ) /82 -.- / -5 /8 - -33(/- -+
8/<8-6/5/)//8+/6/5/)//8+3//5//6--+
-D-/ /8+ 5-< // / 5-</- 3/ 6--+ 2-(2 8( /
6/5/)+ / B(63 2-(2 -(- 9--5 -.- - ""
%(83 - - - / /52+ (-
/52 -3/ -36/8 5
(-
-
! 9
H$1,
4-3--52/6-/66/6-7
&
/2-)%)37
(3/3-?/66/8B(3":="&/
%)3 #/(/(G 5//) B(3 4-3 5 / /
##$%&
'()*+
!"
!
-36 5 6-3/ B(3 ? + -36)2 5 3/(3
/(/)6?C$-)-///6//B(/8)
B(633/(/(-<-2(/-
(/)6/86/3+/83/-+2-(2/8-2+B(63
/6/-+//82-/-36-
;"3/6/6--6(+-(+-6/+.6/+6
6/+/36-63/-
< - /8 2+ - -+ /" -/< -+ 6-5 (3 /"
-/<-+B(/"./"-/<-+6-5(3B(/"./"-/<+
(-+6-6/2/-/)+//)<54-3//-36)533(3
/":="&/%)3#/(/(G5//)B(3
98"6/87
!
(3/3-?/66/8B(3":="&$
-)-///6//B(/8)B(633/(/(-/
-<-2(/-
(/)6/86/3+/83/-+2-(2/8-2+B(63
/6/-+//82-/-36-
<"-"7
/
8
C-D-//3(3-8/<8-<3/(37/=:-!3
-/-2-":""+#-&+,'(36
(/-(/8/B(3-":="&-
%)3#/(/(G5//)B(3+5.3-2
// - / 3/(3 / 8 -(3 // - (83/ / 8 6 /
(33/)6-/-3/3/-/8&%
#+-/-3
(3 - -36(+ /. / ? + / 6 / (83 /8 // 5
/-2/-(-)3/8
,3-./6//825(//)---36)56
B(3
9
, / 6 /82 - 3 -36/ - 6/ - /-/ 5-< 5
6B(3
62-;-</-(/&/<8-/872/2/5"/66-.
6 2 -36/) - / 5-</- -(-D-/ /82 / 8/<8-
/8@-66/8-6A--36/56-3/B(38
%- 2 / -( / / / //-) -36 )3 5//)
2
!
,3-. / 6/ /82 5 ( / / ) - - -36) 5
6B(3
,/6/82-3-36/-6/-/-/5-<5
6B(3
%(83 / 6- / -(- - 6 2 -(3 // - /
3/(34//-(83//(33/)6-/-3/3/-
/8&%
#+-/-3(3--36(+/./
##$%&
'()*+
!":
?+/6/(83/8//5/-2/-(-
)3/8
!=
%,"$4%,%
2/2//-)"/(-D.6/.-6-3/"(6.-5//
)3%/"(6./--62+2+/F(2+//"(6
!*
#%,
,
/ 5G 3// 6- /8"6/ 3//23 -6/-+ (2
/22 2/ 6/5/) - 5-</-+ -(2 2/ / /8+ /
<62--/82/23/.-5?252-/85
5-</--(
!
&
!
%(/2555///)/./-
-( / 33(3 - / / - "-( /2 - / - "-( --5"(6
- ! 3- / - 5 8) 5 5 -")/ 5//)
6---52%(8//-36-
6/ - /2+ ?6/ 5 -3/- -/ 6/- /
#//#/(//3-/6-66-(-(6/2-3/-
2/2 / /-)"/(-D . 6/. - 3-/ -6/- - 5 //
)3/-/5G3///-3/---2)6-
!
-3/6-2/3/5//)36//3/8)5
/ 5G 3// / -3/- --2) 6- - -(8--2+
.2+/F(2+-6/2+/3//2B(63/-5/
/27$/66-./.--3//3/(////2/
%(/2555///)G/./-
/2 6 / 8 /- - //-+ 62+ 2+
6-2/332+ /F(2+ / /"(6 . /2 / - - / 33(3 -
?-(/--575-"-(//2---52//-/-
"-(--5"(6--3-/@-58)55-"
)/5//)6---52%(8//-36-A
4,
##$
-//38/-3/-/)-.3//23-((
52 )3 !"2 8@A %( / -3/- 8@A -- -
/52/-/6/8
.-5/%(8//-36-
-3/-6/-/#//#/(//>/"8(>--
-/)3
3/?3(3 < - - 8@A / - ? : 6 - 8G2/)+6-.3(68-3B(3
##$%&
'()*+
!"
&
- / 2/D/-7 $ /8 . -6// / /2-) / 3/F- )3
-36-(--52-3/-7
!
:
9/%)3;//)/
4-(
//
%-6
/52--33(/-B(63--3/-36(-52
3-6//./-/B(63/</38
/823/-
/52//82)3(33/)
96-
- -6 - %-6 /52+ /82 3/- /52+ / 6-/-3//66-.8)5
LL
9% !LL
##$%&
'()*+
!" SECTION 274134
CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section describes the cabling and cable system electronics required to support the cable
television distribution network for the facility. The Work includes the furnishing of all labor,
materials, and performance of all operations in connection with installing an extension of the
existing television distribution system of the broadband distribution type, complete and ready
for use, with complete interface of all components. Provide all new-to-new interface and any
new-to-existing interface as may be required. All equipment and installation material required
shall be furnished whether or not enumerated herein.
1.
1.3
The television system shall include line amplifiers, cables, cabling, cable fittings,
terminal outlets, wires, wiring devices, and all other components, parts, and equipment
necessary to provide a complete and fully operational system for the distribution of cable
television from the existing cable television demark as indicated on the Drawings.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Submit manufacturer's product literature for
each component specified and installation instructions with system wiring diagrams. Include
data on features, ratings, and performance. Provide a complete listing of all major components.
B.
Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for television equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.4
Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of components and enclosures. Show
sections, details, and attachments to other work.
Show access and workspace requirements.
Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring; and grounding.
System Riser Diagram: Show connection of all hardware and outlets in the system.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer certifying that
products meet or exceed the specified requirements.
CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
274134 - 1
B.
Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturer, certifying that Installers comply with
requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" article. Upon request, submit evidence of
experience and of relationship with system manufacturer.
C.
Qualification Data: For Installer and Supplier.
D.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For cable television distribution system components to
include operation and maintenance manuals. Include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.6
Inventory of equipment provided.
Detailed operating instructions covering operation under both normal and abnormal
conditions.
Dimensioned plan and elevation views of components and enclosures. Show access and
workspace requirements.
Routine maintenance requirements for system components.
Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be stored at the site for
ready access.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced Installer who is an authorized representative of
the television system manufacturer to supervise installation of the system.
B.
Supplier Qualifications: The supplier shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in the design
and installation of systems equal in size and type required by this Project. The supplier shall
maintain a local service organization within a 100 mile radius of the installation with spare
service replacement boards, components, and accessories. The response time may not exceed 4
hours in the event of an equipment failure.
1.
2.
3.
The supplier shall be an authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer and
shall have full-time technicians trained and certified in the installation and service of the
equipment supplied.
The supplier shall provide two references of CATV distribution network and installation
which exceeded 100 taps and were completed within the last 12 months.
The qualified installation firm shall perform all terminations at device and head-end
locations.
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70.
CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
274134 - 2
E.
Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authorities
having jurisdiction and that portion of the NEC which pertains to installation and construction
of specified products.
F.
FCC Compliance: Comply with US Federal Communications Commission Class B standard for
allowable radiation from network equipment and wiring. Comply with all applicable standards
regarding RF emission in CATV systems.
G.
Institute for Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): Comply with all applicable standards
for audio, video, and data networks.
H.
UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL Standard 83, "ThermoplasticInsulated Wires and Cables," UL Standard 486A, "Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use
with Copper Conductors," and UL Standard 910, "Test Method for Fire and Smoke
Characteristics of Cables Used in Air Handling Spaces."
I.
NEMA/ICEA Compliance: Comply with NEMA/ICEA Standards Publication No. WC5,
"Thermoplastic-Insulated Wire and Cable for the Transmission and Distribution of Electrical
Energy", and Publication No. WC30, "Color Coding of Wires and Cables", pertaining to control
and signal transmission media.
J.
ADA Requirements: Comply with requirements in ICC A117.1, "Accessible and Usable
Buildings and Facilities" and Public Law 101-336, "Americans with Disabilities Act."
1.7
DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A.
Deliver materials to Project site in original factory wrappings and containers, clearly labeled
with identification of manufacturer. Inspect equipment to ensure that no damage has occurred
during shipment. Do not install damaged equipment; remove from site and replace with new
equipment.
B.
Store materials in original packages and containers inside a well-ventilated area protected from
weather, moisture, soiling, extreme temperatures, and humidity. Store materials flat and
blocked off the ground to prevent sagging and warping. Protect products from construction
debris and traffic.
C.
Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrading, puncturing, and tearing wire and cable
insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance and characteristic impedance
integrity of transmission media are maintained.
D.
Comply with equipment manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for special delivery,
storage, and handling requirements.
1.8
MAINTENANCE SERVICE WARRANTY
A.
Warranty for Television System and Components: Submit a written warranty signed by the
manufacturer and Installer agreeing to correct system deficiencies and replace components that
fail in materials or workmanship within the specified warranty period when installed and used
according to the manufacturer's written instructions. Warranty shall be in addition to, and not
CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
274134 - 3
limiting, other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents.
Written warranty shall ensure that system downtime will not exceed four (4) hours in the event
of a major equipment failure. Service shall be provided within four (4) hours of receipt of
notice within the hours of 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Monday through Friday.
B.
Warranty for Functional Performance: Installer shall warrant that all specified functions are
provided even if functional omission is not discovered until the end of the warranty period.
This shall warrant full function of the system even if Owner initially does not fully utilize the
capabilities of the system.
C.
Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:
1.
2.2
Blonder Tongue Laboratories, Inc.
SYSTEM FUNCTION
A.
The system shall receive cable television signals, amplify these signals by master amplifiers,
and distribute these signals to all television outlets to permit the connection of standard cable
ready television receivers commonly manufactured for the standard frequency bands.
1.
B.
As installed, system shall be capable of passing standard NTSC color television signals without
the introduction of noticeable effects of the color fidelity of intelligence. The system and all
equipment shall be designed and rated for 24 hours per day continuous operation. The system
shall use equipment matched to 75 ohms impedance with maximum voltage standing wave ratio
VSWR of 1.4 so as to prevent ghosts or smear. The phasing characteristics of the system shall
not cause ghosts or double images to appear in receivers used with the system.
1.
2.
2.3
System Usable Bandwidth: 5 to 860 MHz.
Output Signal Level Range: 0 to 10 dBmV, across 75 ohms, per channel at each
television outlet.
Noise: Not more than 15 dB at maximum gain.
CATV DISTRIBUTION HEADEND COMPONENTS
A.
General: Provide a complete new CATV distribution system in the renovated areas of the
building. Connect new CATV components and cables to the existing building CATV
distribution system.
CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
274134 - 4
2.4
DISTRIBUTION COMPONENTS
A.
Distribution components shall be for signal processing and distribution downstream from
headend equipment. Provide (AR) splitters, tapoffs, and "F" outlets as indicated and as required
for a fully operational cable television distribution system.
1.
Products:
a.
b.
(AR) Blonder-Tongue DMT-1000-* Series Multitaps for response to 1000MHz.
(AR) "F" Type Outlets to match structured cabling devices specified elsewhere.
B.
Signal Power Splitters and Isolation Taps: Where installed in signal circuits used to supply
cable-powered amplifiers, power throughput capacity shall exceed load by at least 25 percent.
C.
Passive Circuit Devices: All passives shall be solder back and feature high RF shielding for
FCC compliance.
2.5
CABLES
A.
Cable Characteristics: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for
broadband CATV applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal
impedance with a return loss of 26 dB RL VHF from 5 to 750 MHz, and shall be listed to
comply with NFPA 70, Articles 810 and 820.
B.
Provide size and type of coaxial cable as recommended by equipment supplier for application
intended.
C.
Manufacturers: Belden, West Penn, or Commscope.
2.6
CABLE CONNECTORS
A.
Coaxial Cable Connectors: Type F, 75 ohms or as recommended by cable manufacturer.
B.
Patch Panels: Standard electrical enclosures, with NEMA 250 type suitable for environmental
conditions at the installed location, with bulkheads and Type F connectors for splicing and
patching coaxial cable.
2.7
SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Cable products shall be sweep tested at the factory before shipping at frequencies from 5 MHz
to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a
cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range
and graphing the results.
CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
274134 - 5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine pathway elements intended for coaxial cable installation. Check raceways, cables,
trays, and other elements for compliance with accessibility for installation and maintenance, and
other conditions affecting installation.
B.
Examine roughing-in for antenna to verify actual locations of cable connections before antenna
installation.
C.
Examine walls, floors, roofs, equipment bases, and roof supports for suitable conditions where
television equipment is to be installed.
D.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Provide all
equipment necessary for a complete and operable system.
1.
Install equipment with accessibility for maintenance, located so as not to interfere with
the servicing of other nearby equipment.
B.
Install systems to comply with Drawings, Specifications, and final Shop Drawings.
C.
Provide and install complete wiring required by systems herein specified. All wiring shall be
tested for continuity and freedom of all grounds and short circuits.
3.3
GENERAL WIRING
A.
General: Use the size and types of wire recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
However, the size and quality shall not be less than that specified or indicated on the Drawings.
If cross talk, appreciable loss of signal or distortion occurs after installation has been completed,
it shall be the mutual responsibility of Contractor and manufacturer to correct any such
condition without additional cost to Owner.
B.
Wiring Method above Accessible Ceilings; Finished Areas: Plenum cable. Conceal cable in
accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible. Install parallel to building lines, follow
surface contours, and support the cable according to manufacturer's recommendations.
C.
Wiring Method in Exposed or Unfinished Areas: Install wiring in raceways. Install parallel to
building lines and follow surface contours.
D.
Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess
and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars
and distribution spools.
CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
274134 - 6
E.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
F.
Grounding: Provide independent signal circuit grounding recommended by manufacturer.
3.4
COAXIAL CABLE INSTALLATION
A.
Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps may
not be used for heating.
B.
Cable may not be installed in same raceway with power cable.
C.
Coaxial cable shall not be spliced except on plywood backboards in data closets or at headend.
Taps shall not be located above ceilings.
D.
All conduit entrances shall be suitably protected with weatherheads.
E.
All coaxial cable between the main amplifier and the isolation tapoff units in closet locations
shall be .500 hardline minimum; RG-11 cable shall not be acceptable for trunk cables.
F.
RG-6 quadfoil shield minimum may be used for room dropoffs; RG-11 quad shield cable shall
be used where required for proper system performance.
G.
All cable taps shall be in data closet locations or at the headend.
H.
Each cable run between the console and remote locations shall be one continuous cable.
I.
Do not use water-based cable pulling lubricants with PVC-jacketed cable.
J.
Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended minimum bending radiuses.
K.
Pulling Cable: Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended pulling tensions. Do not install
bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination,
tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it
with new cable.
L.
Exposed Cable: Install parallel to building lines, follow surface contours, and support cable
according to manufacturer's written instructions. Do not run adjacent and parallel to power or
data cables.
M.
Cable Support: Install supports at intervals recommended in writing by cable manufacturer.
Install supports within 6 inches of connector so no weight of cable is carried by connector. Use
no staples or wire ties, pull tie-wrap snug, and do not over tighten.
N.
Signal Equalization: Where system performance may be degraded in certain operating modes,
revise component connections and install distribution amplifiers and attenuators as required,
providing a balanced signal across the system.
O.
Install passive circuit devices, such as splitters and attenuators, in wire closets or cabinets. Do
not install attenuators as part of user-interface device outlets.
CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
274134 - 7
3.5
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Label each installed cable on both ends of termination of each cable run. Provide room number
and the wiring block or device to which it is connected. Tags shall be permanent and legible.
3.6
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connection,
and to assist in field testing. Report results in writing.
B.
Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and
that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified.
C.
Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that
they comply with specified requirements. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items. Retest
until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare television equipment for
acceptance and operational testing as follows:
D.
Subsequent to hookups of equipment, test the entire system and demonstrate proper functioning
in accordance with requirements. Where necessary, correct malfunctioning units and then retest
to demonstrate compliance. All tests shall be performed with a WAVETEK SAM4040 or
equal. A test sweep printout for each drop (outlet) shall be provided and bound in a report book
and turned over to the Architect for approval. Tests must demonstrate specified output level at
specified bandwidth for each outlet. If an outlet fails to pass the test, reconfigure distribution to
correct the problem and retest until satisfactory results are obtained.
E.
Documentation: Bind the test results and cable identification in a cable record book indexed for
easy reference during future maintenance operations.
F.
Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has successfully been completed and system has
been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice
of test schedule.
G.
Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with
Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in
all functional modes.
H.
Record test results.
I.
Retest: Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until requirements
specified in Part 1 are met.
CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
274134 - 8
3.7
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain cable television distribution system equipment.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for troubleshooting,
servicing, and maintaining equipment.
Demonstrate methods of determining optimum alignment and adjustment of components
and settings for system controls.
Review all system programming.
Conduct a minimum of one 2-hour training session.
Schedule training with Owner with at least 14 days' advance notice.
**END OF SECTION 274134**
CABLE TELEVISION SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
274134 - 9
SECTION 275118
SOUND MASKING AND
PAGING SYSTEMS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Work of this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, and performance of all
operations in connection with the installation of an extension of an existing Sound Masking and
Paging System including wiring, control, system generator, equalizer, loudspeakers, etc., all
ready for operation. Provide all new-to-new interface and any new-to-existing interface as may
be required. Refer to Drawings for detailed requirements.
1.
1.3
The intent of this Specification is to provide complete and satisfactorily operating Sound
Masking and Paging Systems. All equipment and installation materials required shall be
furnished whether or not enumerated herein or indicated.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
1.4
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions with system
wiring diagrams. Provide a complete listing of all major components required for a complete
and fully operational system.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For sound-masking and paging system equipment and
components to include in Owner's operation and maintenance manuals.
B.
Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer's printed instructions for maintenance of
installed work, including methods and frequency recommended for maintaining optimum
condition under use conditions. Submit three complete sets of operating instructions including
wiring and circuit diagrams.
C.
Inventory: Supply with the manuals an inventory of the equipment provided.
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS
A.
Supplier: The supplier must have a minimum of five years experience in the design and
installation of systems equal in size and type required by this project. The supplier must
maintain a local service organization within a one hundred (100) mile radius of the installation
SOUND MASKING AND
PAGING SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
275118 - 1
with spare service replacement boards, components and accessories whose local personnel can
provide five reference installation sites which they have installed for each item of equipment in
each system listed here-in.
1.
1.6
The Supplier must be the authorized representative of the equipment manufacturer
supplied and have full-time technicians trained and certified in the installation and service
of the equipment supplied.
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A.
Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code requirements of the authority
having jurisdiction, and that portion of the NEC which pertains to installation and construction
of specified products.
B.
FCC Compliance: Comply with U.S. Federal Communication Class B standard for allowable
radiation from equipment and wiring.
C.
Institute for Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE): Comply with all applicable standards
for audio, video, and data networks.
D.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA): - Accessibility Guidelines for buildings and Facilities.
1.7
MAINTENANCE SERVICE WARRANTY
A.
Special Project Warranty: Submit a written warranty, executed by the contractor, installer, and
the manufacturer, agreeing to repair or replace equipment which fails in material or
workmanship within the specified warranty period. This warranty shall be in addition to and
not a limitation of other rights the owner may have against the contractor under the contract
documents.
B.
Warranty of Conformance with Specifications: The contractor shall warrant that all specified
functions shall be provided even if functional omission is not discovered until the end of the
warranty period. This shall warranty full function of the system even if the Owner does not
fully utilize the capabilities of the system initially.
1.
Warranty Period: One (1) year after the date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
PAGING SYSTEM
A.
Provide a complete, locally controllable paging system to match existing building paging
system including, equalization, paging microphone and preamplifier, amplifiers, and
specifications as follows.
B.
Note: All Equipment shall conform to the manufacturer's latest published specifications in
feature and function both physically and electrically whether or not those specifications are
delineated herein. The manufacturer's latest published specifications shall be considered as part
SOUND MASKING AND
PAGING SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
275118 - 2
of this text. Equipment shall be Allen & Heath, Audio-Technica, Architectural Acoustics,
Ashley, Biamp, Crown, DBX, Denon, EAW, Electro-Voice, JBL, Lowell, Sabine, Shure,
Soundcraft, Tascam, or Telex to match existing.
2.2
NOISE MASKING SYSTEM
A.
Provide a complete noise masking system to match the existing building noise masking system
including speakers, digital generators, equalization, amplifiers, and specifications as follows.
B.
Note: All Equipment shall conform to the manufacturer's latest published specifications in
feature and function both physically and electrically whether or not those specifications are
delineated herein. The manufacturer's latest published specifications shall be considered as part
of this text. Equipment shall be Allen & Heath, Audio-Technica, Architectural Acoustics,
Ashley, Biamp, Crown, DBX, Denon, EAW, Electro-Voice, JBL, Lowell, Sabine, Shure,
Soundcraft, Tascam, or Telex to match existing.
2.3
PAGING AND NOISE MASKING LOUDSPEAKERS
A.
Provide Lowell Model LT805-SM805RT lay in 1' by 2' tile type loudspeakers with upward
facing masking speaker and downward facing paging speaker. Provide internal 70-volt
transformers with rotary tap selector. Equivalent equipment by Atlas is permitted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Comply with installation instructions provided by system manufacturer. Provide type of cables
as shown on plans and schedules.
B.
All wiring shall be plenum rated where required by code.
C.
Install system to comply with drawings and final shop drawings in compliance with
manufacturer's printed instructions and the project plans.
D.
Cable identification: shall be provided on both ends of each cable and termination with the
wiring block or device to which it is connected. Tags shall be permanent and neat.
E.
Furnish and install necessary wire to provide a complete system or systems as herein specified.
All wiring shall be tested for continuity and freedom of all grounds and short circuits.
F.
System supplier shall provide control consoles pre-wired for connection of all system wiring.
G.
Each cable run between the console and remote locations shall be one continuous cable except
where shown at designated consolidation points. All cable shall be as manufactured by
Comscope, Belden, or West Penn. Intercommunications system cable shall not share conduit
with any other system.
SOUND MASKING AND
PAGING SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
275118 - 3
H.
3.2
Contractor shall use the types of wire recommended by the sound equipment manufacturer.
However, size and quality shall not be less than that previously specified or indicated on
Drawings. If cross talk, appreciable loss of volume or distortion occurs after installation has
been completed, it shall be the mutual responsibility of Contractor and manufacturer to correct
any such condition without cost to Owner. Contractor in no case shall use a type of wire which
it assumes to be the best quality, but rather, the wire recommended specifically by equipment
manufacturer. Loudspeaker wiring shall be No. 18 AWG minimum.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
3.3
Identify components and power and control wiring according to Section 260553 "Identification
for Electrical Systems."
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide system programming as required by Owner. Schedule a meeting, through Architect,
with Owner's personnel to obtain all programming requirements.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, and to assist in field
testing.
C.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
D.
3.4
Continuity tests of circuits.
Operational Test: Set and operate controls to demonstrate their functions and capabilities
in a methodical sequence that cues and reproduces actual operating functions.
Remove and replace malfunctioning components and retest as specified above.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain system controls.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Provide a minimum of 3 hours training (one 2-hour initial session, and one 1-hour
follow-up session three months later).
Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance manual
as a training aid.
Schedule training with Owner, through Architect, with a least ten days' advance notice.
Demonstration services shall be in addition to inspection, troubleshooting, servicing,
adjusting, testing, and start-up services.
**END OF SECTION 275118**
SOUND MASKING AND
PAGING SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
275118 - 4
SECTION 275313
CLOCK SYSTEMS
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Work of this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, and performance of all
operations in connection with the installation of a complete operating, coordinated, and
centrally controlled time system using the existing master clock and program control system.
Provide all new-to-new interface and any new-to-existing interface as may be required. Refer
to Drawings for detailed requirements.
1.
Existing Master Clock and Program System:
Center.
SimplexGrinnell 6400 Time Control
B.
The intent of this Specification is to provide a complete and satisfactory operating master clock
and program system. All equipment and installation material required shall be furnished
whether or not enumerated herein or indicated.
C.
This Section specifies the following components for the master clock and program system:
1.
2.
3.
1.3
Secondary indicating clocks (analog).
Clock circuit power boosters.
System wire and cable.
SYSTEM FUNCTION
A.
Wall clocks and program system components shall be powered and corrected by master clock
through a dedicated 3-wire distribution system. Where required, booster relays (signal repeater)
shall be provided. New wall clocks and program system components shall operate as an
extension of the existing system.
CLOCK SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
275313 - 1
B.
System shall perform the following functions, at a minimum: (Coordinate system functions to
correlate with existing system.)
1.
2.
Supply power to remote indicating clocks.
Maintain correct synchronized time and transmit time-correction signals over dedicated
system wiring from a master clock to secondary indicating clocks, including the
following:
a.
1.4
Analog Clocks: Correct for minute-hand synchronization at least once each hour
and for hour-hand synchronization at least once each day.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual
components and profiles, and finishes for each product indicated and describe features and
operating sequences, both automatic and manual, for the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
B.
Shop Drawings:
1.
1.5
Indicating clocks.
Booster relays.
Equipment enclosures and back boxes.
Accessory components.
Interconnection and system wiring diagrams to detail power, signal, control, and
correction circuits. Identify terminals and wiring color-codes to facilitate installation,
operation, and maintenance. Indicate recommended wire types and sizes, and circuiting
arrangements for field-installed system wiring.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Field quality-control test reports.
1.6
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For clock and program control system components to include
in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of
the manufacturer of master clock and program system components, who is trained and approved
for installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.
CLOCK SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
275313 - 2
B.
Source Limitations: Obtain secondary clocks and signal-device-control components through
one source from a single manufacturer (who assumes responsibility for compatibility of system
components).
C.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
D.
Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by SimplexGrinnell
to match existing system.
SECONDARY INDICATING CLOCKS
A.
Product: SimplexGrinnell 6310-9221 Series.
B.
Description: Synchronous-wired, analog, 12-inch diameter wall clock, compatible with the
master clock.
1.
2.
3.
4.
2.3
Clock shall operate by means of a dedicated 120-volt, 3-wire circuit, originating from
either the master clock or a local booster relay.
Clock bezel shall be anti-glare with a smooth surface. No external screws or studs shall
be visible on the bezel or clock housing.
Clock shall have UL, ULC and FCC compliances.
Clock case and lens shall be constructed of shatter-proof plastic.
CLOCK SYSTEM POWER BOOSTERS
A.
Clock System Booster Relays: Provide clock booster relays as indicated and as required for
Project based on manufacturer's requirements for maximum circuit lengths and loads on
circuits.
1.
2.
3.
Booster relay shall consist of a 120-volt contactor, double pole, with a minimum switch
contact rating of 5A at 120 volts.
Provide a suitable housing and label the cover "Clock System Relay."
Booster relays shall be connected directly to the master clock correction signal and shall
pass a locally originated 120-volt correction signal to the clocks.
CLOCK SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
275313 - 3
2.4
BACK BOXES FOR SECONDARY INDICATING CLOCKS AND PROGRAM DEVICES
A.
2.5
Description: Box and coverplate assembly shall be furnished by device manufacturer and shall
be suitable for device to be mounted. Back boxes shall be equipped with knockouts and hanger
straps or mounting adapters arranged for flush mounting device, unless otherwise indicated.
WIRE AND CABLE
A.
Conductors: Size, type, and quantity of conductors as recommended by equipment
manufacturer, in raceway.
B.
Conductor Color-Coding: Uniformly identified and coordinated with wiring diagrams.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Provide all equipment
necessary for a complete and operable system.
B.
Install systems to comply with Drawings, Specifications, and final Shop Drawings.
C.
Label all wires at all junction boxes, pull boxes, cabinets, boxes and terminations. All wiring
shall be tested for continuity and freedom of all grounds and short circuits. Each cable run
between terminating locations shall be one continuous cable (no splices or connections ).
D.
Protect cable from stretching, kinking or sharp bends during installation. Remove and replace
cable damaged during installation at no additional cost to Owner.
E.
Provide outlet boxes for clocks in accordance with manufacturers recommendations.
F.
All interior wiring shall be installed in raceway.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Color-code wire and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so they
are uniformly identified and coordinated with wiring diagrams throughout the system.
3.3
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect,
test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections,
and to assist in programming and field testing. Report results in writing.
CLOCK SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
275313 - 4
B.
Perform the following field adjustments, tests, and inspections and prepare test reports:
1.
2.
3.
C.
3.4
Perform operational-system tests to verify compliance with the Specifications and make
adjustments to bring system into compliance. Include operation of all modes of clock
correction and all programming and manually programmed signal and relay operating
functions.
Correct any condition producing cross-talk, appreciable loss of amplitude, or distortion in
the system after installation has been completed.
Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and
terminals are identified.
Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest as specified above.
PROGRAMMING
A.
3.5
Program system according to Owner's requirements. Set system so signal devices operate on
Owner-required schedules and are activated for durations selected by Owner. Program
equipment-control output circuits to suit Owner's operating schedule for equipment controlled.
DEMONSTRATION
A.
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to
adjust, operate, and maintain clock-and-program-control system components.
**END OF SECTION 275313**
CLOCK SYSTEMS
Greenfield Architects, Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
275313 - 5
SECTION 281300
INTEGRATED ACCESS CONTROL/
SECURITY SYSTEM
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
Work of this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, and performance of all
operations in connection with extension of an existing integrated security system consisting of
intrusion detection sensors, proximity card readers, signal equipment, system controls, alarm
displays, and alarm indicating devices for a complete and fully functional system. Provide all
new-to-new interface and any new-to-existing interface as may be required. Refer to Drawings
for detailed requirements. Include system setup, programming, and operator training.
B.
It is the intent of this Specification to describe the minimum requirements to furnish and install
an extension of the existing Integrated Access Control/Security System as described in these
specifications and as shown on the Drawings. All equipment and installation materials required
for a fully functional system shall be provided whether or not indicated or enumerated herein.
The integrated system shall include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
C.
Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.3
Card Access System.
Perimeter and Interior Security System.
Closed Circuit TV System.
Other systems as described in the specifications and as shown on the Drawings.
Fire Alarm System.
Panic stations interfaced with Nextel Phones.
Section 260500 "Common Work results for Electrical."
Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
A.
Following is a brief description of each of the systems to be provided. There shall be a complete
integration of these systems on a software/hardware basis.
INTEGRATED ACCESS
CONTROL/SECURITY SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
281300 - 1
B.
Card Access System – Shall be a PC-based Access Control System that is capable of utilizing
multiple technologies of access control credentials such as proximity access credentials, smart
card technology, or other standard Weigand access control technology. The security system
shall include a PC to meet software requirements (Pentium III, 2.4 GHz, 512MB RAM with
Windows XP, CD-Rom drive, and network interface card), 17-inch flat panel monitor, printing
capabilities, control modules, access control units, card readers, and other ancillary devices for a
complete and operational system. In addition, the system shall include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
C.
Access Control Hardware and Software.
Serial Printer to log desired system functions and print reports.
Access control Remote Controllers.
Proximity Digital Access Readers.
Keypad Access Units.
Proximity Access Credentials.
System Setup, Programming, and Operator Training.
Conduit, Wire, Outlet Boxes, complete Installation.
Access Controlled Door Hardware shall be supplied under the General Contract unless
otherwise indicated in these specifications.
Perimeter and Interior Security System – All exterior doors shall be monitored for open/closed
door position by the installation of flush wide gap door contacts. Overhead doors, if any, shall
be protected by the installation of overhead door contacts. In addition, the system shall be an
integral part of the Access/Security System and include the following:
1.
2.
Alpha-numeric keypads that allow arming/disarming of zones of security devices.
Interior audible alarm devices that operate when a violation of security occurs. These
alarm devices shall time out after a preprogrammed time period.
D.
If indicated on the Drawings, the alarm devices shall be integrated as part of the interior speaker
paging system to provide a preprogrammed message over all interior speakers that a security
violation has occurred in the specific zone of alarm. The number of zones of preprogrammed
messages shall match the number of alpha-numeric keypad zones plus two spare zones.
E.
Closed Circuit TV System – The Closed Circuit TV shall be an integral part of the
Access/Security and include a fully featured digital video recorder. Up to eight cameras shall
connect to a remote intelligent access control panel which shall simultaneously record, review
and email event video of cameras up to 30 frames per second for individual cameras or up to
12.5 frames per second for a fully loaded 8 camera controller. The system shall have the
minimum capacity of up to eight additional Access System Controllers with CCTV capability.
In addition, the CCTV feature shall provide:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Wavelet compression of video.
Up to 720 x 486 pixels x 24-bit color recording resolution.
Associate any two cameras for recording from any security zone in the system.
Adjustable pre/post event recording time and motion detection sensitivity by camera.
Live and stored video review screens viewed on Access/Security System Monitor(s).
Access Controller with CCTV Video and Control shall be operated over a Lan/Wan and
utilize only one IP address.
INTEGRATED ACCESS
CONTROL/SECURITY SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
281300 - 2
F.
Other Systems Integrated with the Access Control/Security System – The Access
Control/Security System may be utilized to monitor and control other security and non-security
functions within the facility. These may include, but not limited to the list below, or as
described elsewhere in the Specifications and as shown on the Drawings:
1.
2.
3.
G.
1.4
Control of protected doors upon operation of the Fire Alarm System.
Alarm and status inputs Building Automation functions.
Reporting of alarms and abnormal conditions to off-site monitoring facilities such as
remote supervising stations requiring notification of emergency services or building
personnel for response required.
The Access Control System shall be provided with a software option to display all alarms,
trouble and supervisory conditions from the fire alarm system. The fire alarm system will
provide a system interface to the local access control PC
SUBMITTALS
A.
1.5
General: Submit each item in "Submittals" Articles according to the Conditions of the Contract
and Division 01 Specification Sections. All of the following (excluding field test report and
operation and maintenance data) shall be submitted as a complete package submittal; a partial
package submittal will be returned without Architect's review.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including components for sensing, detecting,
systems integration, and control, with dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical
characteristics, ratings, and finishes.
B.
Shop Drawings:
following:
1.
Detail the security system including, but not necessarily limited to, the
System Riser Diagrams: Show connections for all devices, components, and auxiliary
equipment. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and
interconnections identified. Indicate wiring sizes, quantities, and types of conductors.
C.
System Wiring Diagrams: Detail power, signal, and control wiring, and grounding and
differentiate clearly between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Identify
terminals to facilitate installation, operation, and maintenance.
D.
Equipment and System Operation Description: Include method of operation and supervision of
each component and each type of circuit. Show sequence of operations for manually and
automatically initiated system or equipment inputs. Description must cover this specific
Project; manufacturer's standard descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
1.6
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
Qualification Data: For Installer.
B.
Field quality-control test reports.
INTEGRATED ACCESS
CONTROL/SECURITY SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
281300 - 3
C.
1.7
Warranty: Submit written warranty as specified in this Section.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.8
Operation and Maintenance Data: For components of integrated security system to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Include complete material listing (inventory)
and manufacturer's printed maintenance instructions, including methods and frequency
recommended for maintaining optimum condition under use conditions. Including wiring and
circuit diagrams.
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
1.9
Intrusion Detection Devices: Furnish quantity of four (4) PIR devices.
Card Readers: Furnish quantity of two (2) proximity readers.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Equipment: All equipment shall conform to the manufacturer's latest published specifications in
feature and function, both physically and electrically, whether or not those specifications are
delineated herein. The manufacturer's latest published specifications shall be incorporated
herein by reference.
B.
Equipment Supplier Qualifications: An authorized dealer of all the systems required to meet
these Specifications with certified technicians who are trained and approved for installation of
systems required for this Project.
C.
Installer Qualifications: A certified technician of the equipment supplier or manufacturer's
authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this
Project.
D.
Source Limitations: The intrusion detection and security access equipment shall be standard
products of a single manufacturer. All equipment for Work of this Section shall be furnished by
a single supplier who has been a certified representative of the manufacturers of the intrusion
detection and security access systems for a minimum of five years.
E.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
F.
Comply with NFPA 70.
INTEGRATED ACCESS
CONTROL/SECURITY SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
281300 - 4
1.10
COORDINATION
A.
As much as possible, all equipment shall be from the same Manufacturer and shall be furnished
by the same Equipment Supplier (to maintain equipment compatibility) and all Work shall be
performed by the same Installer.
B.
Coordinate layout and installation of system components and suspension system with other
construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC
equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.
1.11
A.
WARRANTY
Installer's Warranty: Submit written warranty signed by the Installer, agreeing to correct system
deficiencies and replace components that fail in materials or workmanship within the specified
warranty period when installed and used according to the manufacturer's written instructions.
This warranty shall be in addition to, and not limiting, other rights the Owner may have under
other provisions of the Contract Documents. The written warranty shall ensure that the
downtime of the systems will not exceed four (4) hours in the event of a major equipment
failure. Contractor will be required to provide service within four (4) hours of receipt of notice
within the hours of 8:00 AM to 5:00 PM, Monday through Friday.
1.
B.
Installer shall warrant that all specified functions are provided even if functional omission
is not discovered until the end of the warranty period. This shall warrant full function of
the system even if Owner does not fully utilize the capabilities of the system initially.
Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer and Installer agreeing to replace
intrusion detection devices and equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified
warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
CARD ACCESS / SECURITY SYSTEM
A.
Provide Integrated Card Access / Security System components and wiring as detailed on the
Electrical Drawings. Provide connection to existing building Card Access/Security System.
Provide all required programming, testing and commissioning of the existing system for
operation of new devices and equipment.
B.
Access to a protected area shall be controlled by proximity card readers for entry into an area.
Exit from the protected area shall be controlled by microwave Request-to-exit sensors installed
near each protected door. These units place a temporary flag on the system software for a
preprogrammed time period so that an alarm does not occur with an authorized exit. However,
if the door remains open for longer than the preprogrammed time period, a "Door Held Open"
alert shall occur on the system monitor(s). At locations shown on the drawings, a card reader
may be installed on both sides of the door for entry and exit control.
INTEGRATED ACCESS
CONTROL/SECURITY SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
281300 - 5
2.2
PERIMETER AND INTERIOR SECURITY SYSTEM
A.
2.3
The perimeter and interior security system shall include devices to monitor exterior doors and
interior doors. Model numbers are as shown on the Drawings.
CLOSED CIRCUIT TV SYSTEM
A.
Provide CCTV cameras where shown on the Drawings and connect to the ACU(s) serving that
area.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
A.
Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with
requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of security
system.
1.
2.
B.
3.2
Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations of
security connections before security installation.
For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental
to performance of security system.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
INSTALLATION
A.
Drawings show the general arrangement of sensors and alarm contact devices. Contractor shall
be responsible for verifying exact location and mounting requirements with the equipment
manufacturer and the Architect.
B.
In general, PIR's shall be located to provide the maximum area and range of coverage in
accordance with the manufacturer's design recommendations. Detectors shall not be mounted
more than nine (9) feet above the floor unless specifically noted on the drawings or approved by
the manufacturer.
C.
All detectors and contact devices shall be located and mounted to minimize access by vandals.
Detectors shall be securely mounted to outlet boxes to prevent tampering and unauthorized
adjustment.
D.
All equipment in this Section shall be installed in accordance with the National Electric Code
for security alarm and communications systems. The Equipment Supplier shall provide CAD
drawings for review and approval. Drawings shall show all field devices and wiring
terminations to the remote control units.
E.
Install equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. All wiring (size, type, and
quantity of conductors) shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer.
INTEGRATED ACCESS
CONTROL/SECURITY SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
281300 - 6
F.
3.3
Install systems to comply with Drawings and final Shop Drawings in compliance with
manufacturer's printed instructions.
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Wiring Method: Install wiring and cables in metal raceways according to Section 260533
"Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems." Conceal raceway except in unfinished spaces
and as indicated. Minimum conduit size shall be 3/4 inch. Control and data transmission
wiring shall not share conduit with other building wiring systems.
B.
Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points. Use lacing
bars and distribution spools. Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as
recommended in writing by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to
sides and back of enclosure. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in
any enclosure associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal
according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal
spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
C.
Wires and Cables:
1.
2.
3.
Conductors:
Size, type, and quantity as recommended in writing by system
manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.
120-V Power Wiring: Install according to Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical
Power Conductors and Cables," unless otherwise indicated.
Control and Signal Transmission Conductors: Install unshielded, twisted-pair cable,
unless otherwise indicated or if manufacturer recommends shielded cable.
D.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
E.
Install power supplies and other auxiliary components for detection devices at controllers,
unless otherwise indicated or required by manufacturer. Do not install such items near devices
they serve.
F.
Identify components with engraved, laminated-plastic or metal nameplate for control unit and
each terminal cabinet, mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. Nameplates and label products
are specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
G.
Coordinate conductor paths for devices installed in casework with Architect and casework
installer prior to casework fabrication.
H.
Wiring shall be shielded where indicated or recommended by the manufacturer. Install the
wiring as recommended by manufacturer and shall minimize splices and "T-taps" of the address
loop circuits.
I.
Install a minimum twelve (12) inch tail at all junction and outlet boxes. The tail shall be looped
in the box to minimize stress to the connected device.
INTEGRATED ACCESS
CONTROL/SECURITY SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
281300 - 7
3.4
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A.
3.5
Update software for the complete and proper operation of systems involved. Program system as
directed by Owner.
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
Interior/Exterior Security System: Install devices at locations indicated on Drawings.
1.
3.6
Card Readers: Install number of conductor pairs recommended by manufacturer for the
functions specified.
CCTV CAMERA INSTALLATION
A.
Install cameras level and plumb.
B.
Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations, unless otherwise
indicated.
C.
Avoid ground loops by making ground connections at only the control station.
1.
D.
3.7
For 12- and 24-V dc cameras, connect the coaxial cable shields only at the monitor end.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance system and perform complete pretesting
to determine compliance of system with requirements in the Contract Documents. Correct
deficiencies observed in pretesting. Replace malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones
and retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for
systematic recording of acceptance test results.
B.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to supervise
the field assembly and connection of components, perform system programming (provide all
system programming as directed by Owner), and to inspect, test, and adjust field-assembled
components and equipment installation, including connections, and to assist in field testing.
Report results in writing.
C.
Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare reports:
1.
2.
3.
Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires
and terminals are identified.
Operational Tests: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed. Test
each circuit and component of each system. Test all modes of system operations.
Intrusion Detection Operational Tests: Schedule tests after pretesting has been
successfully completed. Test all modes of system operation and intrusion detection at
each detection device. Test for detection of intrusion and for false alarms in each zone.
Test for false alarms by simulating activities outside indicated detection patterns.
INTEGRATED ACCESS
CONTROL/SECURITY SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
281300 - 8
4.
5.
Security Access Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors,
demonstrate product capability and compliance with requirements. Test each signal path
for end-to-end performance from each end of all pairs installed. Remove temporary
connections when tests have been satisfactorily completed.
Electrical Tests: Comply with NFPA 72, Section A-7. Minimum required tests are as
follows:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.
Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device.
With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of circuit and measure circuit
resistance with an ohmmeter. Record circuit resistance of each circuit on Record
Drawings.
Verify that each controller is in normal condition as detailed in manufacturer's
operation and maintenance manual.
Test signal and data transmission circuits for proper signal transmission under
open-circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10
percent of initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission
according to class of wiring used.
Verify that transient surge-protection devices are installed according to
manufacturer's written instructions.
Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response
at control unit.
D.
Remove and replace malfunctioning devices and circuits and retest as specified above.
E.
Report of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a written record of tests, inspections, and detailed test
results in the form of a test log.
F.
Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily
completed.
3.8
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
Coordinate with Owner to demonstrate and confirm proper operation of the security system in
the renovated areas.
1.
2.
3.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures for troubleshooting, servicing,
adjusting, and preventive maintenance. Provide one 4-hour training session.
Review data in maintenance manuals.
Schedule demonstration and training with Owner with at least 14 days' advance notice.
**END OF SECTION 281300**
INTEGRATED ACCESS
CONTROL/SECURITY SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
281300 - 9
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 281310
DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
1.3
Work of this Section includes the furnishing of all labor, materials, and performance of all
operations in connection with the extension of an existing door entry system consisting of a
master station, a door station, and all hardware and software required for a fully operational
system. Provide all new-to-new interface and any new-to-existing interface as may be required.
Refer to Drawings for detailed requirements. All equipment and installation materials required
shall be furnished whether or not enumerated herein or indicated.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.4
System shall consist of a master station with open voice communications to a single door
intercom station.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B.
Shop Drawings: Include system wiring diagram, showing connections for all devices,
components, and auxiliary equipment. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and fieldinstalled wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and
interconnections identified.
1.5
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
System Operation Description: Include method of operation and supervision of each
component and each type of circuit, and sequence of operations for manually and automatically
initiated system inputs. Description must cover this specific Project; manufacturer's standard
descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
B.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of components certifying that products furnished
comply with requirements.
C.
Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.
DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
281310 - 1
D.
1.6
Field quality-control test reports.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
1.7
Operation and Maintenance Data: For door entry system to include in operation and
maintenance manuals. Include data for each type of product, including all features and
operating sequences, both automatic and manual.
Include user's software data and
recommendations for spare parts and components to be stocked at Project site.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: A certified technician who is an authorized service representative of
central control unit manufacturer.
B.
Manufacturer Qualifications: Central control unit manufacturer, or firm approved by
manufacturer, that maintains a service center capable of providing training, parts, and
emergency maintenance and repairs for overall system at Project site within eight hours'
maximum response time.
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain system components from central control unit manufacturer, who
shall assume responsibility for system components and for their compatibility.
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for
intended use.
E.
Comply with NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code."
1.8
WARRANTY
A.
Warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have
under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract
Documents.
B.
Special Warranty: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer and Installer agreeing to replace
door entry system components and equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within
specified warranty period.
1.
Warranty Period: One year from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
DOOR ENTRANCE SYSTEM
A.
Provide Door Entry System components and wiring as detailed on the Electrical Drawings.
Provide connection to existing building Access/Security System.
DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
281310 - 2
B.
2.2
Provide all required programming, testing and commissioning of the existing system for
operation of new devices and equipment.
CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A.
Power Wiring to Supply Side of Remote-Control Power Sources: Not smaller than No. 12
AWG, complying with requirements in Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power
Conductors and Cables."
B.
Class 1 Control Cable: Size, type, and quantity of conductors as recommended by equipment
manufacturer, plenum rated above accessible ceilings, in raceway above non-accessible
ceilings.
C.
Classes 2 and 3 Control Cable: Size, type, and quantity of conductors as recommended by
equipment manufacturer, in raceway.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
A.
Install system according to NFPA 70, applicable codes, and manufacturers written instructions.
B.
Comply with UL 1641.
C.
Wiring Method: Install cable in raceways except in accessible indoor ceiling spaces, attics, in
hollow gypsum-board partitions, and as otherwise indicated. Conceal raceways and wiring
except in unfinished spaces.
D.
Wiring Within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no
excess. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.
E.
Conductors: Use size, type, and quantity of conductors as recommended by equipment
manufacturer.
F.
Splices, Taps, and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in
junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures.
G.
Connections: Comply with torque-tightening values specified in UL 486A and UL 486B, as
applicable.
3.2
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Comply with Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
B.
Color-code conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so
they are uniformly identified and coordinated with wiring diagrams throughout the system.
DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
281310 - 3
3.3
GROUNDING
A.
3.4
Ground system components and conductor and cable shields to eliminate shock hazard and to
minimize ground loops, common-mode returns, noise pickup, and other impairments.
SYSTEM SOFTWARE
A.
3.5
Update software for the complete and proper operation of systems involved. Program system as
directed by Owner.
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and
terminals are identified.
B.
Inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections, and
perform system pre-testing, testing, adjusting, and programming. Report results in writing.
C.
Pre-Testing: Align and adjust system and perform pre-testing of all components, wiring, and
functions to verify compliance with specified requirements. Correct deficiencies by replacing
malfunctioning or damaged items with new items.
D.
Operational Test: After installation of cables and connectors, demonstrate product capability
and compliance with requirements. Schedule tests after pre-testing has been successfully
completed. Test all modes of system operation.
E.
Retesting: Remove and replace malfunctioning devices and circuits and retest as specified
above until total system meets requirements of the Specifications and complies with applicable
standards.
F.
Schedule testing with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.
3.6
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
A.
Coordinate with Owner to demonstrate and confirm proper operation of the door entry system in
the renovated areas.
1.
2.
3.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures for troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and preventive maintenance. Provide one 4-hour training session.
Review data in maintenance manuals.
Schedule demonstration and training with Owner with at least 14 days' advance notice.
**END OF SECTION 281310**
DOOR ENTRY SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
281310 - 4
Renovations for Children & Youth Agency
Lancaster County Government Center
Lancaster, PA
SECTION 283111
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED DOCUMENTS
A.
1.2
Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
SUMMARY
A.
This Section includes fire alarm systems with manual stations, detectors, signal equipment,
controls, and devices.
1.
Work of this Section includes the furnishing of all labor and materials and the
performance of all operations in connection with the installation of the fire alarm system.
Work includes new fire alarm initiating devices, notification appliances, and connection
to the existing building SimplexGrinnell fire alarm system. Provide all new-to-new
interface and any new-to-existing interface as may be required. Refer to Drawings for
detailed requirements.
B.
The intent of this Specification is to provide a complete and satisfactorily operating fire alarm
system. All equipment and installation materials required shall be furnished whether or not
enumerated herein or indicated.
C.
Related Sections include the following:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1.3
Section 087100 "Door Hardware" for door closers/holders/smoke detectors, electric door
locks, and release devices that interface with fire alarm systems.
Section 211313 "Wet-Pipe Sprinkler Systems" for coordinating fire alarm system
requirements.
Section 260500 "Common Work Results for Electrical."
Section 260519 "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."
Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems."
Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."
DEFINITIONS
A.
FACP: Fire alarm control panel (or fire alarm control unit).
B.
LED: Light-emitting diode.
C.
NICET: National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies.
D.
Definitions in NFPA 72 apply to fire alarm terms used in this Section.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 1
1.4
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A.
1.5
General: Noncoded, UL-certified addressable system with multiplexed signal transmission,
dedicated to fire-alarm service only. Provide complete new fire alarm system in the renovated
areas of the building including but not limited to: notification appliances, initiating devices,
extender (NAC) panels, conduit, wiring and connection to existing building fire alarm system.
Provide all required programming, testing and commissioning.
SUBMITTALS
A.
General Submittal Requirements:
1.
2.
Submit a complete package submittal that contains Product Data, Shop Drawings,
operating instructions, certificates, and submissions to authorities having jurisdiction. A
partial package submittal will be returned without Architect's review.
Shop Drawings shall be prepared by persons with the following qualifications:
a.
b.
B.
1.6
Trained and certified by manufacturer in fire-alarm system design.
NICET-certified fire-alarm technician, Level III minimum.
Submissions to Authorities Having Jurisdiction: In addition to distribution requirements for
Submittals, make an identical submission to authorities having jurisdiction, including local fire
marshal. Include copies of annotated Contract Drawings as needed to depict component
locations to facilitate review. Include UL Listing Certification number for the Alarm Service
Company. Resubmit if required to make clarifications or revisions to obtain approval. On
receipt of approval from authorities having jurisdiction, submit them to Architect for review.
ACTION SUBMITTALS
A.
Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include list of materials (complete Bill of
Materials) and Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) listing data.
B.
Shop Drawings: For fire-alarm system. Include plans (including scaled plan and layout of Fire
Command Center), elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Comply with recommendations in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of
Fire Alarm Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72.
Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and
field-installed wiring. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals
and interconnections identified. Make all diagrams specific to this Project.
Batteries: Sizing calculations (both standby power and total alarm power).
Voltage drop calculations, including calculations for notification appliance circuits.
Include performance parameters and installation details for each detector, verifying that
each detector is listed for complete range of air velocity, temperature, and humidity
possible when air-handling system is operating.
Include installation details of duct smoke detectors. Indicate location of detectors and
remote status and alarm indicators.
Floor Plans: Include on plans the use of all rooms. Indicate panel and device locations
for every panel and device in the system. Indicate final outlet locations showing address
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 2
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
1.7
of each addressable device. Show size and routing of cable and conduits (including both
initiation circuits and signal circuits). Drawing sheet size and scale shall match Contract
Drawings.
Alarm control and trouble signaling equipment.
Annunciation.
Power connection.
Conductor type and sizes.
Conduit sizes.
Manufacturers, model numbers and listing information for equipment, devices, and
materials.
Details of ceiling height and construction.
Interface of fire safety control functions.
Riser Diagram: Indicate every panel and device in the system and connection to the
system. Generic riser diagram is not acceptable. Include all device addresses, conduit
sizes, and wire types, quantities, and sizes.
System Operation Description: Detailed description for this Project, including method of
operation and supervision of each type of circuit and sequence of operations for manually
and automatically initiated system inputs and outputs. Manufacturer's standard
descriptions for generic systems are not acceptable.
Device Address List: Coordinate with final system programming.
Graphic drawing with fire alarm devices in frame.
Include voice/alarm signaling-service equipment rack or console layout, grounding
schematic, amplifier power calculation, and single-line connection diagram.
INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
A.
NICET certification certificate.
B.
Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of system components certifying that products
furnished comply with requirements.
C.
Installer Certificates:
requirements.
D.
Field Quality-Control Test Reports: Indicate and interpret test results for compliance with
performance requirements. Comply with NFPA 72.
E.
Qualification Data: For testing agency.
1.8
Signed by manufacturer certifying that installers comply with
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
A.
Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire-alarm systems and components to include in
emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01,
include the following:
1.
2.
Comply with the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance"
Chapter in NFPA 72.
Provide "Record of Completion Documents" according to NFPA 72 article "Permanent
Records" in the "Records" Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 3
3.
4.
Record copy of site-specific software.
Provide "Maintenance, Inspection and Testing Records" according to NFPA 72 article of
the same name and include the following:
a.
b.
c.
d.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Frequency of testing of installed components.
Frequency of inspection of installed components.
Requirements and recommendations related to results of maintenance.
Manufacturer's user training manuals.
Manufacturer's required maintenance related to system warranty requirements.
Include recommendations for spare parts to be stocked at the site. Provide the names,
addresses, and telephone numbers of service organizations that carry stock of repair parts
for the system to be furnished. Provide complete Bill of Materials, including model/part
numbers of all components or devices.
Abbreviated operating instructions for mounting at fire-alarm control unit.
Copy of NFPA 25.
Record (As-Built) Drawings: Required by UL.
B.
Approval Certificate: Signed by an independent Electrical Inspection Agency certifying
compliance of fire alarm system with Article 760 of the NEC and other applicable articles of the
NEC. Approval certificate shall be submitted to the Architect before final approval of the
system is granted.
C.
Certificate of Completion: Comply with NFPA 72.
1.9
MAINTENANCE MATERIALS SUBMITTALS
A.
Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged
with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1.10
Lamps for Strobe Units: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount installed, but not less
than one unit.
Smoke Detectors and Heat Detectors: Quantity equal to 10 percent of amount of each
type installed, but not less than one unit of each type.
Detector Bases: Quantity equal to 2 percent of amount of each type installed, but not less
than one unit of each type.
Keys and Tools: One extra set for access to locked and tamperproofed components.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.
Installer Qualifications: Personnel shall be trained and certified by manufacturer for installation
of units required for this Project. Installer must meet all qualifications required for installing a
UL Certificated System.
B.
Electrical Inspection Agency Qualifications: An independent Electrical Inspection Agency with
the experience and capability to conduct the inspections of the fire alarm system for compliance
with requirements specified. The Inspection Agency shall not be the same Electrical Inspection
Agency used by the Electrical Contractor.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 4
C.
Source Limitations: Obtain fire alarm system components through one source from a single
manufacturer (who assumes responsibility for compatibility of system components).
D.
Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,
by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.
E.
Compliance with State Requirements: Comply with applicable state codes (including code
amendments).
1.
F.
Comply with requirements of the Pennsylvania Department of Labor and Industry.
Compliance with Local Requirements: Comply with applicable building code, local ordinances
and regulations (including code amendments), and requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction (including local fire marshal).
1.
2.
Comply with 2003 International Building Code.
System shall be UL Certificated.
G.
ADA Requirements: Comply with Department of Justice, Code of Federal Regulations,
Americans with Disabilities Act 28 CFR, Part 36. Comply with 1990 Americans with
Disabilities Act. Comply with ANSI A117.1-1998.
H.
NFPA Certification: Obtain certification according to NFPA 72 by a UL-listed alarm company.
I.
NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 70, 72 (1993 and 1999), and 90A.
J.
NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and installation of fire
alarm detection system components and accessories.
1.
The fire alarm system supplier shall contract with an independent Electrical Inspection
Agency to inspect the fire alarm system installation for
K.
Each component of the fire alarm system shall be Factory Mutual Approved and/or Listed as a
product of a single fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. (UL) and shall bear the "FM" and/or "UL" labels.
L.
The equipment furnished under this Specification shall be provided by a fire alarm system
supplier who has been providing this type of equipment for the past five years. The system
supplier shall have a service organization capable of providing a service technician to the site
within 24 hours of a request for on-site service.
1.
UL Listing: In addition to the fire alarm equipment being UL listed, the fire alarm
system equipment supplier shall be pre-approved by the Lancaster City Bureau of Fire
and shall be UL Listed, UUJS, as an alarm service company for Local, Remote Station,
Auxiliary, and Proprietary Protective Signaling systems. A company with branch offices
shall be required to be UL listed for the branch office supporting this Project. Home
office UL listing alone is not acceptable. Equipment suppliers not UL listed shall
subcontract with a UL listed alarm service company to certify that the system installation
and operation is in accordance with the Contract Documents. Indicate the service
company providing this service.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 5
a.
2.
1.11
A.
NICET Certification: The equipment supplier shall employ at least one individual full
time in the office supporting this Project that has attained NICET Level III certification in
fire alarm systems. All submittals shall be approved, initialed, and show the NICET
certification number of the individual maintaining the certification and taking
responsibility for the documentation.
PROJECT CONDITIONS
Interruption of Existing Fire-Alarm Service: Do not interrupt fire-alarm service to facilities
occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only
after arranging to provide temporary guard service according to requirements indicated:
1.
2.
1.12
Include the UL Listing Certification number in the Submittal information for the
alarm service company accepting responsibility for the Project.
Notify Owner no fewer than 14 days in advance of proposed interruption of fire-alarm
service.
Do not proceed with interruption of fire-alarm service without Owner's written
permission.
SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
A.
Existing Fire-Alarm Equipment: Maintain existing equipment fully operational until new
equipment has been tested and accepted. As new equipment is installed, label it "NOT IN
SERVICE" until it is accepted. Remove labels from new equipment when put into service and
label existing fire-alarm equipment "NOT IN SERVICE" until removed from the building.
B.
Equipment Removal: After acceptance of new fire-alarm system, remove existing disconnected
fire-alarm equipment and wiring/conduit (raceway).
C.
Conform to construction phasing or schedule in accordance with Contract Documents.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MANUFACTURERS
A.
2.2
Existing: SimplexGrinnell Fire Alarm System.
SYSTEMS OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTION
A.
Fire-alarm signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and systems:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Manual stations.
Heat detectors.
Smoke detectors.
Duct smoke detectors.
Verified automatic alarm operation of smoke detectors.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 6
6.
7.
8.
B.
Fire-alarm signal shall initiate the following actions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
C.
Continuously operate alarm notification appliances.
Identify alarm at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators.
Transmit an alarm signal to the remote alarm receiving station.
Unlock electric door locks in designated egress paths.
Release fire and smoke doors held open by magnetic door holders.
Activate voice/alarm communication system.
Switch heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning equipment controls to fire-alarm mode.
Activate smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter smoke-control system
panel.
Activate stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.
Close smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
Recall elevators to primary or alternate recall floors.
Activate emergency lighting control (if required by authorities having jurisdiction).
Record events in the system memory.
Supervisory signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1.
2.
3.
D.
Automatic sprinkler system water flow.
Heat detectors in elevator shaft.
Fire-extinguishing system operation.
Valve supervisory switch.
Low-air-pressure switch of a dry-pipe sprinkler system.
Elevator shunt-trip supervision.
System trouble signal initiation shall be by one or more of the following devices and actions:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Open circuits, shorts, and grounds in designated circuits.
Opening, tampering with, or removing alarm-initiating and supervisory signal-initiating
devices.
Loss of primary power at fire-alarm control unit.
Ground or a single break in fire-alarm control unit internal circuits.
Abnormal ac voltage at fire-alarm control unit.
Break in standby battery circuitry.
Failure of battery charging.
Abnormal position of any switch at fire-alarm control unit or annunciator.
Fire-pump power failure, including a dead-phase or phase-reversal condition.
Low-air-pressure switch operation on a dry-pipe or preaction sprinkler system.
E.
System Trouble and Supervisory Signal Actions: Initiate notification appliance and annunciate
at fire-alarm control unit and remote annunciators. Record the event on system printer.
F.
Elevator Controls: Operating a heat detector in the elevator shaft or elevator machine room
shuts down elevator power by operating a shunt trip in a circuit breaker feeding the elevator.
1.
A field-mounted relay actuated by the fire detector or the FACP closes the shunt trip
circuit and operates building notification appliances and remote annunciators.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 7
2.3
FIRE-ALARM CONTROL PANEL
A.
2.4
Existing SimplexGrinnell 4100 fire alarm control panel.
MANUAL PULL STATIONS
A.
Description: Fabricated of metal or plastic, and finished in red with molded, raised-letter
operating instructions of contrasting color. UL 38 listed. Device boxes shall be flush in all
finished spaces. Device boxes shall be flush to the highest extent possible in unfinished spaces.
For surface installations, utilize manufacturer-supplied back boxes (standard outlet/device boxes
are not permitted). Provide all mounting hardware.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
2.5
Dual-action mechanism requires two actions, such as a push and a pull, to initiate an
alarm. Verify with authorities having jurisdiction.
Station Reset: Key or wrench operated; double pole, double throw; switch rated for the
voltage and current at which it operates.
Hermetically sealed in locations subject to extreme temperatures or humidity.
Indoor Protective Shield for Physical Protection: Factory-fabricated clear plastic
enclosure, hinged at the top to permit lifting for access to initiate an alarm. Lifting the
cover actuates an integral battery-powered audible horn intended to discourage false
alarm operation. Provide where required by authorities having jurisdiction.
Weatherproof Protective Shield (for devices exposed to interior wet locations or exterior
weather elements): Factory-fabricated clear plastic enclosure, hinged at the top to permit
lifting for access to initiate an alarm.
There shall be no limit to the quantity of stations, detectors, or zone adapter modules that
may be activated or in alarm simultaneously.
Integral Addressable Module (or located remote from device when device is located
exterior or in an unheated space): Arranged to communicate manual-station status
(normal, alarm, or trouble) to the FACP. Provide NEMA rated enclosure (NEMA rating
suitable for application) to house addressable module when module is located remote
from device.
AUTOMATIC DETECTORS
A.
General: All devices shall be UL listed and shall comply with UL 268. Include features and
meet requirements as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Detectors shall be documented as compatible with the control equipment to which they
are connected. Detectors shall be listed for the applications indicated (i.e. ceiling, wall,
below access floor).
The environmental rating of each detector shall be suitable for the space in which it is
installed.
Photoelectric type detectors shall fit into a base that is common with both ionization type
detectors and heat detectors and shall be compatible with other addressable detectors,
addressable manual stations, and addressable zone adapter modules on the same circuit.
Detectors shall also fit into nonaddressable bases that are capable of being monitored by
addressable zone adapter modules.
There shall be no limit to the number of detectors or zone adapter modules that may be
activated or in alarm simultaneously.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 8
2.6
SMOKE DETECTORS
A.
General: Include the following features:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
B.
Operating Voltage: 24-V dc, nominal.
Self-Restoring: Detectors do not require resetting or readjustment after actuation to
restore them to normal operation.
Plug-in Arrangement: Detector and associated electronic components are mounted in a
module that connects in a tamper-resistant manner to a fixed base with a twist-locking
plug connection. Terminals in the fixed base accept building wiring.
Each sensor base shall contain an LED that shall flash each time it is scanned by the
control panel (once every 4 seconds). When the control panel determines that a sensor is
in the alarm or a trouble condition, the control panel shall command the LED on that
sensor's base to turn on steady indicating the abnormal condition. Sensors that do not
provide a visible indication of an abnormal condition at the sensor location will not be
acceptable.
Each sensor shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide for easy alarm
testing at the sensor location.
Each sensor shall be scanned by the control panel for its type identification to prevent
inadvertent substitution of another sensor type. The control panel shall operate with the
installed device but shall indicate a WRONG DEVICE trouble condition until the proper
type is installed or the programmed sensor type is changed.
The sensor's electronics shall be immune from false alarms caused by EMI and RFI.
Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to the FACP.
Photoelectric Smoke Detectors:
1.
2.
Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
5.
C.
Primary status.
Device type.
Present average value.
Present sensitivity selected.
Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
Sensor: LED or infrared light source with matching silicon-cell receiver. Detectors shall
be solid state and shall be sealed against rear airflow entry.
Detector Sensitivity: Between 2.5 and 3.5 percent/foot smoke obscuration when tested
according to UL 268A.
Integral Thermal Detector: Fixed-temperature type with 135 deg F setting.
Duct Smoke Detectors: Photoelectric type complying with UL 268A.
1.
Detector address shall be accessible from fire-alarm control unit and shall be able to
identify the detector's location within the system and its sensitivity setting.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 9
2.
An operator at fire-alarm control unit, having the designated access level, shall be able to
manually access the following for each detector:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
2.7
Primary status.
Device type.
Present average value.
Present sensitivity selected.
Sensor range (normal, dirty, etc.).
Detectors shall be non-polarized 24-V dc type, compatible with the fire alarm panel, and
obtain operating power from the supervisory current in the fire alarm detection loop.
Detectors shall be solid state, photoelectric type and shall operate on the light scattering,
photodiode principle. To minimize nuisance alarms, detectors shall have an insect screen
and shall be designed to ignore invisible particles or smoke densities that are below the
factory setpoint. No radioactive material shall be used.
Detector head shall be directly interchangeable with an ionization detector type. The
24-V dc detector may be reset by actuating the control panel reset switch.
Removal of the detector head from the base shall interrupt the supervisory current of the
fire alarm detection loop and cause a trouble signal at the control panel.
Each sensor shall have multiple levels of detection sensitivity.
Sampling Tube: Design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the
specific duct size, air velocity, and installation conditions where applied.
Cleaning the duct housing sampling tubes shall be possible by accessing them through
the duct housing front cover.
Voltage and RF suppression techniques shall be employed as well as a smoke signal
verification circuit and an insect screen to minimize false alarms.
Relay Fan Shutdown: Rated to interrupt fan motor-control circuit. Provide auxiliary
relays with normally closed auxiliary contacts to shut down associated air handler unit
upon alarm.
Remote Test Switch: Provide remote test switch with key test and LED indicating
light(s) (for each duct detector) to alarm the duct housing.
Weatherproof Duct-Housing Enclosure: For duct detectors located external to the
building or external to a heated space. Provide weatherproof enclosure, NEMA 250,
Type 4X; NRTL listed for use with the supplied detector. Provide with key lock and
115-VAC, 15-watt strip heater with integral thermostat. Provide 115-VAC source of
power (in separate conduit) to the strip heater.
HEAT DETECTORS
A.
General Requirements for Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 521.
B.
Heat Detector, Combination Type: Actuated by either a fixed temperature of 135 deg F or rate
of rise of temperature that exceeds 15 deg F per minute, unless otherwise indicated.
Automatically restorable.
1.
2.
Mounting: Plug-in base, interchangeable with smoke detector bases.
Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to the fire alarm control unit.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 10
C.
Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type: Actuated by temperature that exceeds a fixed
temperature of 190 deg F, unless otherwise indicated.
1.
2.
D.
2.8
Mounting: Adapter plate for outlet box mounting.
Integral Addressable Module: Arranged to communicate detector status (normal, alarm,
or trouble) to fire-alarm control unit.
Heat Detector, Fixed-Temperature Type (Elevator Shunt Trip): Actuated by lower temperature
and higher sensitivity as compared to sprinkler head.
NOTIFICATION APPLIANCES
A.
General Requirements for Notification Appliances: Connected to notification appliance signal
circuits, zoned as indicated, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for
system connections.
1.
B.
Description: All devices shall be UL listed. Equip for mounting as indicated and have screw
terminals for system connections. Device boxes shall be flush in all finished spaces. Device
boxes shall be flush to the highest extent possible in unfinished spaces. For surface
installations, utilize manufacturer-supplied back boxes. (Standard outlet/device boxes are not
permitted.) Provide all mounting hardware.
1.
C.
Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a singlemounting assembly, equipped for mounting as indicated and with screw terminals for
system connections.
Combination Devices: Factory-integrated audible and visible devices in a singlemounting assembly where indicated. Unless indicated or required, combination devices
shall be horizontal type (audible portion beside visual device).
Visible Notification Appliances: Xenon strobe lights listed under UL 1971 with clear or
nominal white polycarbonate lens. Mount lens on an aluminum faceplate. The word "FIRE" is
engraved in minimum 1-inch-high letters on the lens. ADA compliant, 24-V dc; 4-wire
connection to ensure properly supervised in/out system connection. Suitable for either wall or
ceiling mounting. Pyramidal shaped lens for better visibility.
1.
Rated Light Output: 75 candela minimum or meeting the requirements of "equivalent
facilitation." Note: If meeting the requirement of "equivalent facilitation" (i.e., providing
units less than 75 candela), the visible alarm device(s) must be located where indicated
on the Drawings.
a.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Provide 110 candela devices or higher candela rating where required by code (to
meet code-required candela requirements for locating the devices where indicated
on the Drawings).
For units with guards to prevent physical damage, light output ratings shall be determined
with guards in place.
Flashing shall be in a temporal pattern, synchronized with other units.
Strobe Leads: Factory connected to screw terminals.
Mounting Faceplate: Factory finished, white.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 11
6.
7.
D.
Voice/Tone Notification Appliances:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
2.9
Devices installed in wet or damp interior areas shall be UL listed as weatherproof.
Devices installed in exterior locations, interior unheated spaces, or refrigeration rooms or
coolers shall be UL listed as weatherproof and suitable for use in cold weather
applications (-31 deg F to 150 deg F).
Appliances shall comply with UL 1480 and shall be listed and labeled by an NRTL.
High-Range Units (for Noisy Environments): Rated 2 to 15 W.
Low-Range Units (for Quiet Environments): Rated 1 to 2 W.
Mounting: Flush or semirecessed mounted and bidirectional.
Matching Transformers: Tap range matched to acoustical environment of speaker
location.
REMOTE DEVICE LOCATION-INDICATING LIGHTS AND IDENTIFICATION PLATES
A.
2.10
A.
2.11
Description: LED indicating light near each smoke detector that may not be readily visible, and
each sprinkler water-flow switch and valve-tamper switch. Light is connected to flash when the
associated device is in an alarm or trouble mode. Lamp is flush mounted in a single gang wall
plate. A red, laminated, phenolic-resin identification plate at the indicating light identifies, in
engraved white letters, device initiating the signal and room where the smoke detector or valve
is located. For water-flow switches, the identification plate also designates protected spaces
downstream from the water-flow switch.
MAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
Material and Finish: Match door hardware. Coordinate requirements with General Contractor.
Provide all power for magnetic door holders and all associated conduit and wiring.
ADDRESSABLE INTERFACE DEVICE
A.
Description: Microelectronic monitor modules NRTL listed for use in providing a multiplex
system address for listed fire and sprinkler alarm-initiating devices with normally open contacts.
B.
Description: Microelectronic control modules and relay modules listed for fire alarm system
use.
C.
Integral Relay: Capable of providing a direct signal to the elevator controller to initiate elevator
recall and/or to shunt trip for power shutdown. Comply with requirements of authorities having
jurisdiction.
2.12
A.
WIRE
Non-Power-Limited Circuits: Solid-copper conductors with 600-V rated, 75 deg C, color-coded
insulation. Size, type, and quantity of conductors as recommended by equipment supplier, in
raceway.
1.
Low-Voltage Circuits: No. 14 AWG, minimum.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 12
2.
3.
B.
Line-Voltage Circuits: No. 12 AWG, minimum.
Use larger sizes per manufacturer's recommendations to meet Project requirements.
Power-Limited Circuits: NFPA 70 (size, type, and quantity of conductors as recommended by
equipment supplier, in raceway where indicated).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
A.
General: Install system in accordance with all applicable codes.
B.
Comply with NFPA 72 for installation of fire-alarm equipment. Maintain existing system fully
operational until new system is approved operational by authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Connect the FACP and remote panel(s) with circuit breaker(s) with lockable handle(s) or
cover(s). Lock circuit breaker(s) in the "ON" position.
D.
Manual Pull Stations: Mount semiflush in recessed back boxes.
E.
Water-Flow Detectors and Valve Supervisory Switches: Connect for each sprinkler valve
station required to be supervised.
F.
Ceiling-Mounted Smoke Detectors: Not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge.
For exposed solid-joist construction, mount detectors on the bottom of joists. On smooth
ceilings, install not more than 30 feet apart in any direction.
G.
Wall-Mounted Smoke Detectors: At least 4 inches, but not more than 12 inches, below the
ceiling.
H.
Smoke- or Heat-Detector Spacing:
1.
2.
Smoke Detectors near HVAC: Install no closer than 60 inches from air-supply diffuser
or return-air opening.
Smoke Detectors near Lighting Fixtures: Locate detectors not closer than 12 inches from
any part of a lighting fixture.
I.
Heat Detectors in Elevator Shafts and Elevator Machine Rooms: Coordinate temperature rating
and location with sprinkler rating and location.
J.
Duct Smoke Detectors and Remote Test Stations: Comply with NFPA 72, NFPA 90A, and
with manufacturer's written instructions.
1.
2.
K.
Verify that each unit is listed for the complete range of air velocity, temperature, and
humidity possible when air-handling system is operating.
Install sampling tubes so they extend the full width of the duct.
Remote Status and Alarm Indicators: Install near each smoke detector and each sprinkler waterflow switch and valve-tamper switch that is not readily visible from normal viewing position.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 13
L.
Audible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install at heights indicated. Install on flush-mounted back
boxes in finished spaces with the device-operating mechanism concealed behind a grille.
Combine audible and visible alarms at the same location into a single unit.
M.
Visible Alarm-Indicating Devices: Install at heights indicated.
N.
Device Location-Indicating Lights: Locate in public space near the device they monitor.
O.
FACP and Remote Panel(s): Surface mount with tops of cabinets not more than 66 inches
above the finished floor or LCD display at 5 feet AFF to center.
P.
Remote Annunciators: Install with the top of the panel not more than 60 inches above the
finished floor. Verify mounting height with Owner and authorities having jurisdiction prior to
installation.
Q.
Knox Box(es): Verify location and mounting height with Owner and authorities having
jurisdiction prior to installation.
3.2
WIRING INSTALLATION
A.
Wiring Method: Install wiring in raceway according to Section 260533 "Raceways and Boxes
for Electrical Systems." Conceal raceway in walls in both finished and unfinished spaces.
1.
Install all wiring in conduit, minimum 3/4-inch, or as indicated.
B.
Wiring within Enclosures: Separate power-limited and non-power-limited conductors as
recommended by the manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides
and back of the enclosure. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess.
Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with
the fire alarm system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to the system's wiring
diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type
terminal blocks, or plug connectors.
C.
Cable Taps: Use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes, cabinets, or
equipment enclosures where circuit connections are made.
D.
Color-Coding: Color-code fire alarm conductors differently from the normal building power
wiring. Use one color-code for alarm circuit wiring and a different color-code for supervisory
circuits. Color-code audible alarm-indicating circuits differently from alarm-initiating circuits.
Use different colors for visible alarm-indicating devices. Paint fire alarm system junction boxes
and covers red and label "FIRE ALARM".
E.
Wiring to Remote Alarm Transmitting Device: 1-inch conduit between the FACP and the
digital dialer integral to the security system panel. Provide number of conductors and electrical
supervision for connecting wiring as needed to suit monitoring function.
F.
Wiring Entering/Existing Building to Exterior Devices: Provide transient protection as required
interior to building and nearest the point of entrance. Locate in an accessible location in
enclosure rated for the applicable environment.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 14
3.3
CONNECTIONS
A.
For fire-protection systems related to doors in fire-rated walls and partitions and to doors in
smoke partitions, comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware." Connect
hardware and devices to fire-alarm system.
1.
B.
Make addressable connections with a supervised interface device to the following devices and
systems. Install the interface device less than 3 feet from the device controlled. Make an
addressable confirmation connection when such feedback is available at the device or system
being controlled.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
3.4
Verify that hardware and devices are NRTL listed for use with fire-alarm system in this
Section before making connections.
Alarm-initiating connection to smoke-control system (smoke management) at firefighter
smoke-control system panel.
Alarm-initiating connection to stairwell and elevator-shaft pressurization systems.
Smoke dampers in air ducts of designated air-conditioning duct systems.
Alarm-initiating connection to elevator recall system and components.
Alarm-initiating connection to activate emergency lighting control (if required by
authorities having jurisdiction).
Supervisory connections at valve supervisory switches.
Supervisory connections at low-air-pressure switch of each dry-pipe sprinkler system.
Supervisory connections at elevator shunt trip breaker (or shunt trip fusible switch).
Supervisory connections at fire-pump power failure including a dead-phase or phasereversal condition.
Supervisory connections at fire-pump engine control panel.
IDENTIFICATION
A.
Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Section 260553
"Identification for Electrical Systems." In addition, label all wiring at each device box, junction
box, at FACP, at remote panel(s), and at remote annunciator.
B.
Install instructions frame in a location visible from the FACP.
C.
Paint power-supply circuit breakers red and label "FIRE ALARM."
D.
Individually number all alarm initiating and alarm notification appliances.
E.
Install UL Certificate in Fire Command Center adjacent to fire alarm control unit.
3.5
PROGRAMMING
A.
Program zones as directed by Owner and as required by all applicable codes and authorities
having jurisdiction. When any zone goes into alarm, the signal shall be communicated to the
digital alarm communicator transmitter.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 15
3.6
GROUNDING
A.
Ground cable shields and equipment according to system manufacturer's written instructions to
eliminate shock hazard and to minimize, to the greatest extent possible, ground loops, commonmode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments.
B.
Ground equipment and conductor and cable shields. Provide 5-ohm ground at main equipment
location. Measure, record, and report ground resistance.
C.
Signal Ground Terminal: Locate at main equipment rack or cabinet. Isolate from power system
and equipment grounding.
D.
Install grounding electrodes in accordance with NFPA 70 and installation requirements in
Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems."
E.
Ground fire-alarm control unit and associated circuits. Comply with IEEE 1100.
3.7
FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A.
Provide all system programming and remote station monitoring as directed by Owner, per code
requirements (including amendments), and per all authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
Field tests shall be witnessed by Owner and authorities having jurisdiction.
C.
Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect
field-assembled components and connections and to pretest, test, and adjust the system. Report
results in writing.
D.
Pretesting: After installation, align, adjust, and balance the system and perform complete
pretesting. Determine, through pretesting, the compliance of the system with requirements of
Drawings and Specifications.
Correct deficiencies observed in pretesting.
Replace
malfunctioning or damaged items with new ones, and retest until satisfactory performance and
conditions are achieved. Prepare forms for systematic recording of acceptance test results.
E.
Report of Pretesting: After pretesting is complete, provide a letter certifying the installation is
complete and fully operable, including the names and titles of witnesses to preliminary tests.
F.
Tests and Inspections:
1.
Visual Inspection: Conduct visual inspection prior to testing.
a.
b.
2.
Inspection shall be based on completed Record Drawings and system
documentation that is required by NFPA 72 in its "Completion Documents,
Preparation" Table in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire
Alarm Systems" Chapter.
Comply with "Visual Inspection Frequencies" Table in the "Inspection" Section of
the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72; retain the
"Initial/Reacceptance" column and list only the installed components.
System Testing: Comply with "Test Methods" Table in the "Testing" Section of the
"Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 16
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
G.
Test audible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions. Perform the test using a portable sound-level meter complying with Type 2
requirements in ANSI S1.4.
Test audible appliances for the private operating mode according to manufacturer's
written instructions.
Test visible appliances for the public operating mode according to manufacturer's written
instructions.
Factory-authorized service representative shall prepare the "Fire Alarm System Record of
Completion" in the "Documentation" Section of the "Fundamentals of Fire Alarm
Systems" Chapter in NFPA 72 and the "Inspection and Testing Form" in the "Records"
Section of the "Inspection, Testing and Maintenance" Chapter in NFPA 72.
Submit Record of Completion to Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. The Record
of Completion shall be signed by the installing Contractor, equipment supplier, and
authorities having jurisdiction. Include any/all deviations from referenced standards.
Final Test Notice: Provide a minimum of 14 days' notice in writing when the system is ready
for final acceptance testing.
1.
2.
Before requesting final approval of the installation, submit a written statement using the
form for Record of Completion shown in NFPA 72.
Perform each electrical test and visual and mechanical inspection listed in NFPA 72.
Certify compliance with test parameters. All tests shall be conducted under the direct
supervision of a NICET technician certified under the Fire Alarm Systems program at
Level III.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
g.
h.
Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground.
Test all conductors for short circuits using an insulation-testing device.
With each circuit pair, short circuit at the far end of the circuit and measure the
circuit resistance with an ohmmeter. Record the circuit resistance of each circuit
on record drawings.
Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the
manufacturer's operation and maintenance manual.
Test initiating and indicating circuits for proper signal transmission under open
circuit conditions. One connection each should be opened at not less than 10
percent of initiating and indicating devices. Observe proper signal transmission
according to class of wiring used.
Test each initiating and indicating device for alarm operation and proper response
at the control unit. Test smoke detectors with actual products of combustion.
Test the system for all specified functions according to the approved operation and
maintenance manual. Systematically initiate specified functional performance
items at each station, including making all possible alarm and monitoring
initiations and using all communications options. For each item, observe related
performance at all devices required to be affected by the item under all system
sequences. Observe indicating lights, displays, signal tones, and annunciator
indications. Observe all voice audio for routing, clarity, quality, freedom from
noise and distortion, and proper volume level.
Test Both Primary and Secondary Power: Verify by test that the secondary power
system is capable of operating the system for the period and in the manner
specified.
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 17
3.
4.
Visual Inspection: Conduct a visual inspection before any testing. Use as-built drawings
and system documentation for the inspection. Identify improperly located, damaged, or
nonfunctional equipment, and correct before beginning tests.
Testing: Follow procedure and record results complying with requirements in NFPA 72.
a.
5.
Detectors that are outside their marked sensitivity range shall be replaced.
Test and Inspection Records: Prepare according to NFPA 72, including demonstration of
sequences of operation by using the matrix-style form in Appendix A in NFPA 70.
H.
Fire-alarm system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.
I.
Retesting: Correct deficiencies indicated by tests and completely retest work affected by such
deficiencies. Verify by the system test that the total system meets Specifications and complies
with applicable standards.
J.
Prepare test and inspection reports.
K.
Tag all equipment, stations, and other components at which tests have been satisfactorily
completed.
3.8
ACCEPTANCE TEST
A.
Before the installation shall be considered completed and acceptable by the authorities having
jurisdiction, an acceptance test shall be performed.
The factory-authorized service
representative shall perform the test in the presence of a representative of the equipment
manufacturer, Owner, and authorities having jurisdiction.
B.
The system shall be considered ready for the acceptance test only after successful completion of
the demonstration test, and a minimum of one week of satisfactory operation of the system after
the successful completion of the demonstration test.
C.
Provide all the necessary personnel and equipment required to conduct the test. As a minimum,
perform the following:
1.
2.
3.
Operate every fire alarm device to ensure proper operation of the system, including
correct annunciation at each remote annunciator and at the control panel, and proper
operation of auxiliary functions. Where applying heat would destroy any detector,
operate detectors manually.
Open the initiating circuits and the notification circuits in at least two locations per zone
to check for the presence of correct supervisory circuitry.
Perform one-half of all test on battery standby power.
D.
When the testing has been completed to the satisfaction of the Owner, equipment manufacturer,
and authorities having jurisdiction, provide written certification attesting to the satisfactory
completions of said testing.
E.
Submit field quality-control test report(s).
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 18
3.9
CLEANING AND ADJUSTING
A.
3.10
A.
Cleaning: Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and
marred finish to match original finish. Clean unit internally using methods and materials
recommended by manufacturer.
DEMONSTRATION
Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance and security
personnel as specified below:
1.
2.
3.
B.
Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules for starting and
stopping, troubleshooting, servicing, adjusting, and maintaining equipment and
schedules. Provide a minimum of 12 hours' training (three 23-hour initial sessions and
one 3-hour follow-up session three months later or when directed by Owner within the
one-year warranty period).
Training Aid: Use the approved final version of the operation and maintenance manual
as a training aid.
Schedule training with Owner with at least 14 days' advance notice.
Demonstration services shall be in addition to inspection, testing (including acceptance testing),
adjusting, and start-up and programming services.
**END OF SECTION 283111**
DIGITAL, ADDRESSABLE
FIRE-ALARM SYSTEM
Greenfield Architects Ltd. / 14106
July 29, 2014
283111 - 19